Home

TM 11-5820-890-10-8 SINCGARS GROUND

1. Change 1 5 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 OTHER OPERATOR PROCEDURES a Battery Life Condition Loading and Clearing Offset Frequencies Scrolling COMSEC 4 nennen enne nennen Scanning it ertet sace bene 5 1 GENERAL 5 2 BY DESIGN TASK DIVISION TRAINING MATERIALS The SINCGARS radio was designed for ease of operation by the non technical general purpose user operator Once the radio has been put into operation and the operator has entered the net there are but few requirements left for the operator to perform Technically the SINCGARS radio is as complex as it is capable Operationally it is simple and easy for the operator to use The SINCGARS radio offers many more capabilities than are routinely employed Retransmission RXMT for example is a built in SINCGARS capability which is of great value when needed When it is needed not every operator in the unit will be involved Only a select few operators need to be trained on this task It is on this basis that operator tasks have been divided into Primary and Special as discussed below The job of the SINCGARS operator has also been simplified by the statement of task procedures in clear easy to follow steps Also t
2. 2 11 Performance Data Single Radio Mount Radios 2 12 RGU Physical Data ce uet enira da sat cde 2 13 Control Monitor Physical nennen 2 14 ES 671 Physical die el ed nig addi a Change1 v TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Table Page 2 15 Physical Data Single ASIP Radio Mount Radios 1 2 43 2 16 Performance Data Single ASIP Radio Mount 3 1 FHMUX Physical Dalta eet AEE HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Refer to the Table of Contents to find where the information you need is located CHAPTER CONTENTS Each chapter begins with a list of its major paragraphs SUBJECT INDEX An alphabetical subject index is located at the rear of the manual OPERATIONS Chapter 4 Principles of Operation covers how SINCGARS radios and associated equipment are employed to accomplish various communications requirements during unit mission operations Some specific subjects addressed are single channel communications frequency hopping nets use of Julian Date and GPS Zulu time net openings and late net entry methods updating procedures retransmission operations use of antennas remote control operations and frequency management TASKS
3. T 5 68 Scope Wal Ia i r E ean 1 1 Scrolling communications security COMSEC 5 67 Secure communications spk i temet 4 2 Secure Telephone tend t tette Det eiie ee E ER E 3 8 T c HE 3 8 amp eM 3 9 D tinitlon oT TASKS 7 11 Physical data 3 9 Summary of TASKS htec oeopeesavti 7 11 Noc DR LE E 7 11 Security classification and MARKING de i cech 1 2 Select RT preparation settings from emen 5 29 Index 6 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Send COMSEC Key FH data from ANCD to ANCD via STU 7 12 Send data via HS 232 xc co aree tnos o ce od nex Rr onan Da op eer ERE DEDE UO RR 5 63 Send ERF Electronic Remote Fill as part of retransmission RXMT operation task 5 58 Send information from ANCD to ANCD via Secure Telephone Unit STU task 7 14 Send Traffic Encryption Key to net operators using AK method of task 6 26 Send Traffic Encryp
4. 2 5 1528 6 2 6 15230 Features eie cerei reposo ete 2 7 RIONE Features iot aque 2 7 1 RT 1523F Features ades SIP ASIP Keypads io tpe teet tte er a eH dec 2 9 SIP RT GORHPOCIOES ctii te 2 10 ASIP RT Connectors eie tede indiana Gee Mencia Manpack Radio 2 12 Vehicular Radio Components 2 13 Vehicular Radio Components lllustrated sene 2 14 Short Range SR Radio 2 15 Long Range LR Radio Change 1 iii TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Figur Page Short Range Long Range SR LR Radio Components 23 Long Range Long Range LR LR Radio Components VAA Connectors Models sse nennen nene SIP ASIP VAA Components of Short Range Radio in Single Radio Mount SRM Components of Control Receiver Transmitter Components of Control Monitor C 11291 sse Components of Loudspeak
5. o o o o o o o o o TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST Continued 1 2 National Stock Description Number CAGEC and Part Number Control Receiver Transmitter 5895 01 277 2680 C 11561 C U 80058 Remote Control Unit RCU Initially issued with the following components LS 685 U 1 ea Battery Box CY 8523A PRC or CY 8523B PRC 1 ea and Handset H 250 U 1 ea This issue is at time of SINCGARS fielding only Data Transfer Device 5810 01 343 1194 AN CYZ 10 ANCD 98230 0N477400 1 5810 01 517 3587 AN PYQ 10 C SKL 3CN36 200 000001 001 5810 01 026 9618 KYK 13 TSEC 98230 0N190318 Fill Device ECCM 5895 01 188 8816 MX 10579 VRC 80058 5895 01 270 3935 MX 18290 VRC 80058 Installation Kit Electronic Equipment MK 80063 Refer to SB 11 131 2 for listings of individual kits Installation kit is required to mount AN VRC 87A D F through AN VRC 92A D F radio sets and ancillary equipment in vehicles Embedded GPS Receiver EGR Kit 5820 01 523 9646 A3210991 1 80063 Used on MP ASIP 5820 01 523 9758 A3210990 1 80063 Used on Vehicular ASIP NOTE Vehicular Kit also requires the use of the following antenna cable components 5985 01 502 6692 Antenna RA 1 Remote 13499 P N 013 1981 010 5995 01 504 1762 Cable DAGR to RA 1 13499 5995 01 521 4244 Cable DAGR to RA 1 13499 5985 01 521 1775 Antenna RA 2 Remote 1
6. ANTENNAS a Long Manpack Antenna 5 4266 b SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna 3916 254 REMOTING CAPABILITIES OF E Se Oi 4 40 of rA Use of nnn nr nn sr nsns nn sana eas Use of Wire Line Adapter 57 7 Use of Remote Control Device C 2329 GRA 39 NET MANAGEMENT DISCIDIING Lm Roleof thea NOS cco 4 47 Role of Alternate NCS 4 47 Special Task PerformahCe 2 iter eL t te ta edd eua eves 4 48 omn Does na MSE GComipatibilily ceat ttt rettet cete aaa re redatto ie eae 4 48 Role of Signal Officers NCOS pte rtm iens iieri rame 4 49 4 1 SECURE CIPHER TEXT CT COMMUNICATIONS 4 1a Integrated COMSEC ICOM BUILT IN COMSEC SINCGARS ICOM radios have COMSEC capability built in to the RT All that is required to achieve secure cipher text commun
7. RTA wA CG 3855 VRC J1 POWER AMPLIFIER AUD DATA AN J2 POWER AMPLIFIER ans ie DATAB J4 DATA J5 RTA WA 2 Receiver Transmitters RT RT 1523 A B C D E F Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E 2 Vehicular Antennas AS 3900A or 5 3916 part of installation kit 2 Handsets HS H 250 part of installation kit 2 Loudspeakers LS LS 671 part of installation kit Power Amplifier PA AM 7238 A B Cable W2 connects RT ANT to PA 2 Cables W4 connect RTs to VAA 2 Antenna Cables CG 3856 part of installation kit 2 Loudspeaker Cables CX 13292 part of installation kit Power Cable part of installation kit po du Figure 2 16 Short Range Long Range SR LR Radio Components LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 FOR RT IN POSITION OR J4 R IN FOR RT POSITION B LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 FOR RT IN 1 POSITION A OR J4 FOR RT IN POSITION B Change 1 2 23 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 51 Short Range Long Range Radio with Dismount Components AN VRC 89A D F Same as Short Range Long Range Radio plus Dismount Manpack components 2 5g Long Range Long Range Radio Components AN VRC 92A D F COLOR CODED COLOR CODED CABLE AND
8. Summary of Primary Operator Preparation Select RT Preparation Settings from MENU Preparation Task 1 29 Load Single Channel Frequencies into RT Primary Operator Task 1 5 30 Load COMSEC FH Data Sync Time into RT Using ICOM Fill from ANCD Primary Operator Task 2 sssssssccccssssssesesesscesssessesesescsesseseseneseseseeeeneneees 5 32 Perform Hot Start Net Opening Primary Operator Task 3 1 5 34 Perform Passive Late Net Entry Primary Operator Task 4 1 5 36 Perform Cold Start Net Opening Special Operator Task 3 5 51 Receive Net Update from NCS Special Operator Task 4 1 5 53 Perform CUE Late Net Entry Special Operator Task 5 1 55 Conduct Retransmission RXMT Operations Special Operator Task 6 Send an ERF as Part of RXMT Operation Special Operator Task 7 5 58 Change Net ID Special Operator Task 8 SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS SIP ASIP a Use SIP ASIP RT as Special Operator Task 9 b Send Data via RS 232 Mode Special Operator Task 10
9. 2 8 mdi dM dou UE 2 9 Connectors SIP 6i dtes couette oe het adt pretii need ue HE Physical eii dade tecti ee rd e aee oap Held da Common 2 0 0040400 00 sisi esses assa MANPACK MP RADIOS SARRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRMMMMMMMMMMMM a b C Manpack Radios 2 Manpack Radio Components 4 sse ener nnns trennen Manpack Radio Physical VEHICULAR 2 19 dco o M MENTO PORC Short Range SR Radio Components AN VRC 87A D F 2 21 Short Range Long Range Radio Components AN VRC 89A D F 4 Short Range Long Range Radio with Dismount Components AN VRC 91 A D F VAA Connectors models sss ennt nnns VAA Connectors C D E 2 27 E 2 29 Vehicular Radio Physical essent 2 30 Vehicular Radio Performance 31 2 6 SINGLE RADIO MOUNT RADIO SRM ossssssoressssseesnsneetensonersnaneeesnaneetnnonntaneenesa a b SRM Radio Physical SRM Radio Performance
10. 5 12 SIP RI Connectors tir nor rit cae drerit ap Ginn Pen atat e 5 13 ASIP M 5 14 ASIP RT FGTN SWitth aa Front 5 16 Keypad 2 5 17 MC C Loudspeaker ES 671 tie e e lt E Battery Life Indicator 1 nennen nenne ANCD Battery LIST OF TABLES Table Receiver Transmitter Physical 2 2 vestctees Manpack Radio Physical 2 4 Manpack Radio Performance 2 5 Manpack Radio Main esent SIP ASIP RT Used As RCU Main Power essere 2 7 SIP ASIP Radio Hold Up 2 8 Vehicular Radio Components Physical Vehicular Radio Performance enne 2 10 Physical Data Single Radio Mount
11. 4404 nennen Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time from PLGR PLGR 1 Manually Load PLGR Date and Zulu Time Into ANCD PLGR Task 2 Electronically Load PLGR Date and Zulu Time into RT PLGR Task 3 Load PLGR Key from ANCD into PLGR PLGR 4 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU TASKS esent ttnnnttnnntnnntnnnttnn 7 11 Definition of STU 7 11 Summary of STU Tasks rete patet ia ie pep etat ena eie Peste inre 7 11 Definition of EGR 020222244 00 00 enne nnns intr nnns Summiary of EGR Tasks te aoa aa aaiae Combat Identification CID Load EGR Task 1 sese 7 19 Enabling GPS EGR Task 2 sse nennen nennen Enabling Situation Awareness EGR Task 3 Load EGR Key from ANCD into EGR EGR Task 4 Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time from EGR EGR Task 5 ONTROL DISPLAY UNIT CDU Sumrnary of CDU Tasks eto ettet ret etta n ei bern os ens pene need a RT Control GDU Task 1 3 Local Position Display Copy CDU
12. petia cO Ne 2 17 me EUM 2 17 via PE 2 17 Power 22 2 17 ROU RT Batey Lite shes deerit rep Pe E Ee be alum br t 2 18 Broadcast procedure for SOI information 4 27 gute wa 2 29 Change Eset in one channel 6 11 Change net ID 85 et e tr Foe eS UN ok ed beg 5 60 Cipher Text CT operations 4 3 Cold Start net opening ec etie S ee 4 17 COMMON Gornnmnecllglis sus ca onore obti E m ln e pa 2 13 DE TIT cuc 4 11 COMSEGC Alani SUR DUE Cera aqu LER dade tied 4 2 Conduct Cold Start net opening 6 15 Conduct Hot Start net opening task ue ore ex pede dba p set EM 6 14 Conduct retransmission RXMT operations task 5 56 Connectors a iie ette ce eee ced Needed awd vee Ae ea vedere ees 2 11 Connectors SIP RIT 2 10 Change Index 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Consolidated index of Army publications and blank 1 1 Cont
13. rr soe 4 16 Obtain date and GPS Zulu time from Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR task 7 4 Obtain date and GPS Zulu time from EGR task sssssseennn 7 23 Obtain information from Automated Net Control Device ANCD task 5 37 ME 5 5 COMM ONS eT rH 5 5 T cc 8 1 Taskspgeneral M M 5 2 Troubleshooting QUIdes a RARE HA DU Foul ee e Lees ctu ERU RR UAR KE tne udo 8 8 Over The Air Rekey 4 24 Sending aine br Ge eset o i he ERN PC ci tue 6 26 Sending by method of OTAR een 6 24 Receiving sent by MK method 00000 6 29 Passive method of late net 00 4 18 Perform Cold Start net opening task oc pbi virtu ictu eei rne pui dite 5 51 Perform CUE and Electronic Remote Fill late net entry method task 5 55 Perform Hot Start net opening task 5 34 Perform Passive Late Net Entry method 5 36 Periodi
14. 4 22 Of Communications Security COMSEC 4 22 Of Frequency Hopping 4 22 Of Signal Operating Instructions SOI 4 22 eo oce qut Mex pA LI ADEM EI 4 22 Precise Global Positioning System GPS 4 11 Index 4 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver 3 4 Elle C 3 4 rie EP Pm 3 4 Main power HUB requirements rect ect ter epa hae cp erba 8 25 Operator 8 e 5 21 Operator maintenance peux Re c e e oki 8 22 Physical dal ersten x nin 3 4 E octets et cL Dc rud Mu e 7 3 TASKS tee tet Ee Ee EL EO e a ec e ET a Eod dp 7 3 BEES HEC IRANIAN I IUE 7 3 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 8 3 For Control Display 8 24 1 For Gontrol Monitor CM soos tie 8 17 For Remote Control Unit ROW 8 13 For SINGGARS adis ec tete ii xt qM OR ob Dd e estoit eed 8 4 EC TP 8 3 Primary Net Control Station NCS eene 6 6 Pup e x cre 6 6 6 6 Primary operator
15. 868 440 1 2 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CONTROL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER 11561 0 2 35 a scere MELITESSE mU 2 36 Performance 2 36 C M Components b 2 38 Performance LOUDSPEAKER LS 15 671 a ES o71 Components rtr tree t e d ie aab E t ue P Rasa bau Aa Rudi be LS 671 Physical Data 2 10 SINGLE ASIP RADIO MOUNT SARM MX 12275 VRC 2 41 a Components of Short Range SR Radio in Single ASIP Radio Mount AN VRC 87G 2 41 Components of Long Range LR Radio in Single ASIP Radio Mount AN VRC 90G 2 1 SINCGARS RECEIVER TRANSMITTERS RT RT 1523 Series 2 1a RT Capabilities SINGLE CHANNEL Single channel SC frequency modulation FM operation in very high frequency VHF band of 30 000 to 87 975 Megahertz MHz FREQUENCY HOPPING Frequency hopping FH mode for electronic counter counter measure ECCM operation PRESET CHANNELS Preset channels eight for SC mode and six for FH mode each of which may be loaded with COMSEC and used in CT or PT mode DIGI
16. 5 23 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 3g Loudspeaker LS 671 CONTROLS There are only two controls for the LS 671 plus a power indicator lamp The LS 671 allows the SINCGARS operator to perform two functions from the loudspeaker turn the radio on and off and adjust the volume level of the handset and speaker POWER POWER SWITCH i HANDSET CONNECTOR VOLUME J2 CONTROL CAUTION Turn Loudspeaker Power Switch OFF when radio is not in use Figure 5 19 Loudspeaker LS 671 LOUDSPEAKER LS 671 CONTROLS AND USES CONTROL PURPOSE POWER This switch enables the SINCGARS radio operator to turn the radio on and off from SWITCH the loudspeaker VAA CB1 must be set to ON VOLUME When pushed in this control adjusts the audio level of the handset When pulled CONTROL out it adjusts the volume of the loudspeaker Turning the control clockwise increases the volume counterclockwise decreases it POWER The Power Indicator Lamp lights when VAA CB1 is ON and LS 671 Power Switch INDICATOR is turned on LAMP 5 24 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 3h Vehicular Intercommunications Set VIC CONTROLS The main control box of the VIC Audio Frequency Amplifier AM 1780 provides five controls for main power intercom accent radio transmission and installation control Crew boxes C 2297 and C 2298 provide two controls each a
17. Do not press SEND until you ensure the receiving station is ready to receive 7 15 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 31 Receive SOI Information Into An ANCD via STU STU Task 4 DESCRIPTION This task allows an NCS or communications specialist to receive and store in an ANCD that SOI information classified or unclassified sent from another station by STU RECEIVE SOI INFORMATION INTO ANCD VIA STU SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Coordinate SOI transfer 1 Receive initial call from N A by STU sending station 2 Coordinate STU transfer Proper STU keys 2400 BPS preparations PT CT voice checked b Prepare ANCD for STU 1 ANCD ON select transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 8 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu b Enter STU Connect to STU and press SEND WAIT c Receive SOI data sent 1 Ensure you are ready for N A by STU transfer sender to SEND 2 Place your STU in secure N A data mode 3 Press RCV when Processing Please wait sender presses SEND shows nr of bytes sent Sending of SOI data is completed V Set is selected only as an example Any item may be selected for transfer by STU Do not press RCV until sending station is ready to press SEND 7 16 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 4 FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TASKS DESCRIPTION This task allows an
18. Figure 4 17 SENDING NET UPDATE BY ERF TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 8c Sending SOI Information by Broadcast Method DEFINITION LIMITATION DATA MODE PROCEDURE SPECIAL FEATURE Broadcast is a term used for transmitting SOI information over the air from one ANCD to another using SINCGARS radios for transmission Because of the amount of data involved in an SOI normally no more than one time period of information is sent by the Broadcast method This is not a limitation of the radio but a consideration that the radio is used for other purposes The Broadcast method uses only the 1200 bits per second data rate of the SINCGARS radio The procedure for using an ANCD to send SOI information by Broadcast Mode is as shown in Figure 4 18 also see Special NCS Task 2 Transfer SOI Information Using Broadcast Mode for detailed procedure Set NCS RT to SQ ON CT FH M and DATA to 1200 Prepare ANCD for Broadcast select SOI data to be sent enter Broadcast IDs of stations to be polled and new SOI set name Connect ANCD to AUD DATA RT connector and handset to AUD FILL connector Alert net operators to Standby for Broadcast go to SQ ON FH CT and DATA at 1200 Direct net operators to turn ANCD ON enter SOI Receive Broadcast station ID connect ANCD to AUD DATA connector of RT and standby NCS presses SEND on net operators press RCV on ANCD SOI data is transmitted Figure 4 18 SENDING SOI BY
19. Made te 2 33 SIP ASIP Receiver Transmitter 2 8 SIP aC n ded tec M A d 2 8 SIP ASIP VAA S copie fete toe tata ia b Mbit alu deser tiec 2 9 Special Net Control Station NCS tasks 6 18 Definition of tasks T 6 18 Summary Of Tasks PN 6 18 Special Operator tasks o rte te 5 42 Definition of tasks 5 42 Summary of 5 43 Special operator tasks SIP ASIP ctu 5 62 Surtp DIOBSdglll gas se A cant sss 5 3 Change 1 Index 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Te TET 2 8 Traffic Encryption Key re e tae ton a 4 3 Transfer COMSEC FH data from ANCD to ANOD task 5 45 Transfer COMSEC key from ANCD to RT 1 6 9 Transfer full SOI information from ANCD to ANOD task 5 49 Transfer partial COMSEC FH data from ANCD to ANOD 6 7 Transfer Quick Refer
20. NCS forwards MIJI to IEWO NOTES 1 Operate SINCGARS radios in SC CT mode only when absolutely necessary 2 When operating in a jamming environment all net members load CUE frequency Typically only Alt NCS and NCS load CUE frequency ALL net members switch to CUE channel and wait for NCS instructions 5 70 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CHAPTER 6 NET CONTROL STATION NCS TASKS GENERAL NCS RESPONSIBILITIES 63 a b d e f g h j Respond to CUE Calls Primary NCS Task 5 SPECIAL NCS TASKS Definition of Special NCS Summary of Special NCS Tasks ener enne nennen Transmit Updated FH Data via Net Update ERF Special NCS Task 1 19 Transmit SOI Information Using Broadcast Mode Special NCS Task 2 6 21 Send to Net Operators Using AK Method of Special NCS Task 4 6 26 Receive and Store Sent by MK Method of OTAR Special NCS Task 5 6 29 6 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 1 GENERAL 6 2 CONTROL TASK DIVISION TRAINING MATERIALS The SINCGARS radio employs keys and variables to provide secure frequency hopping communications The big advantage is that the enemy cannot read your traffic cannot locate your position through direction finding and has great difficulty in trying to jam your communications Control is the price to
21. T BINDING POSTS J TWO WIRE Figure 4 25 DISMOUNTED RCU TO A VEHICULAR RADIO 4 36 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 e Vehicular mounted located VAA to a manpack radio Seg Figure 4 26 below E1A E2A li R E1B E2B OO BINDING POSTS a 15 6850 Figure 4 26 VEHICULAR MOUNTED RCU TO MANPACK RADIO e Vehicular mounted RCU to vehicular radio See Figure 4 27 below E1A E2A OR E1B E2B WAS ZA NX LS 685 U Figure 4 27 VEHICULAR MOUNTED RCU TO VEHICULAR RADIO 4 37 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATION REMOTE FUNCTIONS 4 38 Change 1 Only those functions which differ from the radio are described below FCTN TST position provides self test of both RCU and radio FCTN ICM position allows RCU and radio operators to talk over connecting field wire when COMSEC is set to PT CHAN switch enables RCU operator to select channel 1 6 CUE or MAN for the companion radio SIG display lights at RCU when radio receives signal For RT 1523C E F RCU is displayed when the radio receives a signal HUB indicator shows status of RCU HUB only radio HUB must be checked by radio operator BATT button checks status of RCU manpack battery when pressed once checks manpack radio battery status when pressed a second time CALL button enables RCU operator t
22. 1444444000 nnne 1 2 Frequency hopping FH communications x 4 6 Advantages uc cte 4 9 4 6 4 6 SI IAN 4 7 Frequency Hopping Multiplexer 3 5 T ccm 3 5 er 3 6 Physical 3 5 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 8 23 M 7 17 Hand receipt HR manuals e 1 2 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device 3 12 lip 3 14 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 8 24 Hot Start net opening 0 00100011 4 16 Option for late net entry isse c Sets 4 18 ICOM Fill of Receiver Transmitter 2 80 4 4 15 Integrated Communications Security 4 2 2 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Julian Date and GPS Zulu do peste dy tetti re eaten Go 4 10
23. DESCRIPTION This task is performed when there is a requirement to change or update some element of FH data and the operational situation makes it impossible or impractical to disseminate the new data by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD or SKL to SKL In such cases the NCS alerts net operators that they are to receive a net update ERF Operators then change the RT FCTN from SQ ON to LD remaining on the operational channel The NCS sends the ERF on the operational channel not on MAN as during a Cold Start net opening Once the net update ERF has been sent the new data may be made effective immediately or stored for later implementation ERF Broadcast and OTAR constitute the means by which FH data SOI information and COMSEC key TEK only can be transferred electronically from one location to another SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Prepare to receive net 1 Stay on the operational channel N A updale ERE 2 Set FCTN to LD N A Receive and store net 1 Standby for NCS to send N A update ERF net update ERF 2 Note signal display activate Display shows HF XXX 3 Press STO Display shows STO 4 Enter X 1 6 Display shows STO X and blinks Change 1 5 53 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Make communications 1 Set CHAN to X 1 6 Channel in which ERF was stored check 2 Set FCTN to SQ ON N A 3 Call NCS or respond to NCS Net update ERF is completed call The NCS will direct which c
24. Dates in the ANCD SKL EGR and PLGR take the form of Day Month Year 23 09 95 When these dates are loaded into a SINCGARS radio they are automatically converted to the correct two digit Julian Date needed by the radio Appendix Alto this manual provides two digit Julian Date calendars for both regular and leap years If your net were the only one operating in the FH mode your NCS could select any two digit date for net opening Technically the radio will work on any two digit date The importance of using the prescribed two digit Julian Date is when there are other FH nets operating and you may need to contact them or they may need to contact you Unless both nets have the same two digit date as a part of sync time they cannot communicate TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 45 Precise GPS Time IMPORTANCE As with the two digit Julian Date the importance of having the same accurate sync time in all FH radios is for cross net communications If only one net is involved any time will do If you want to communicate with nets you do not have loaded in your radio having the same sync time is a big advantage SOURCE Global Positioning System GPS satellites offer SINCGARS users very precise time by use of the Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR or Embedded GPS Receiver EGR COMMON BASE When all FH nets are opened using precise GPS time and when sync time of the NCS radio is checked against GPS time daily all nets within a divisi
25. GPS DISPLAY BACKLIGHT CONNECTOR Turn on radio power with CDU To control radio functions set With GPS on and satellite a CDU fails self test connected CDU passes self test b CDU does not control radio FCTN to REM use UP A radio and DOWN V arrows to select control field press ENT to enter radio control use UP A and DOWN V and ENT to change settings c CDU does not display acquired CDU displays your your position position To turn backlight on press the light button To turn the light off press the light button a second time Check for proper installation Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cable Check for obvious damage to connectors Check for missing O rings Check for bent broken pins Change i 8 24 1 8 24 2 blank TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 3 BATTERY REQUIREMENTS 8 3a General POWER Manpack radios RCUs ANCDs SKLs and PLGRs all depend SOURCE upon batteries for their main power source For SKL battery procedures see TM 11 5810 410 13 amp P Manpack and vehicular radios RCUs and PLGRs depend upon hold up batteries HUB for retention of stored data when main power is interrupted PURPOSE The objective of this paragraph is to offer users of SINCGARS radios and associated equipment general guides regarding the number of hours of a particular type usage each battery is expected to provide CAUTION It
26. display shows the CID and position or navigation solution to the last SA transmission SA received ABS absolute is the actual location DISPLAY of the transmitter REL relative is the navigation solution to the transmitter The operator may toggle between ABS and REL using the ENT UP A LEFT lt and RIGHT gt arrow keys The navigation solution provided by the REL display option is updated every six seconds to provide real time tracking of received positions while the RT is moving The DOWN arrow and ENT key may be used to copy the SA position into memory for pasting into a specific waypoint The entire field will change to reverse video when the down arrow is pressed 7 30 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CHAPTER 8 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE SINCGARS RADIO MAINTENANCE b PMCS Guidane c PMCS for SINCGARS Radios sse ener enne nennen d Operator Troubleshooting Guides sse Loudspeaker 15 671 oct rne ete e eee aeu c rua d 8 20 Automated Net Control Device ANCD 2 10 Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR 5 11 Frequency Hopping Multiplexer Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD i BATTERY REQUIRE
27. 4 second window SITUATION The typical situation where the Passive method is most useful is when the radio remains fully loaded with data but sync time has for whatever reason drifted out of the 4 second window It must still be within one minute of net sync time PROCEDURE An indicator of the above situation is that no traffic is heard on the net for some period The operator merely presses FREQ on the keypad and then SYNC The RT display shows LF XXX The operator then waits for traffic to be heard on the net at which time the display drops the L and reads a normal XXX At this point time has been electronically brought back into sync and the operator is back in the net See Primary Operator Task 4 for details 4 18 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Note lack of traffic on net Hotstart Press FREQ on RT keypad display reads F XXX Press SYNC on RT keypad display read LF XXX Wait to hear traffic on net DO NOT Note that L disappears from RT display Your radio has brought you back into sync time you are back in the net Figure 4 10 PASSIVE LATE NET ENTRY f you PTT while your radio is in late net entry mode your sync time will be thrown farther out of sync RT 1523 only 4 6c Hot Start Option NEXT EASIEST In this option the operator connects the ANCD or SKL to the RT and repeats the ICOM fill procedure It is easy to perform and takes very little time SITUATION A typical situ
28. Although the KEK in receiving radios is automatically updated during an AK OTAR transfer a KEK cannot be electronically transferred from one location to another 6 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3 PRIMARY NCS TASKS 6 3a Definition of Primary NCS Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED There are five tasks categorized as primary for SINCGARS NCS personnel These five tasks along with both Primary and Special Operator Tasks enable a SINCGARS NCS to meet all normal communications requirements when the unit is in an operational situation These five primary tasks involve partial transfer of COMSEC FH data SOl information from one ANCD to another both Hot and Cold Start methods of net opening and responding to CUE calls NCS personnel are expected to be able to perform these five primary tasks without assistance other than reference to the NCS Pocket Guide TM 11 5820 890 10 7 Operator Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS seb Chapter 8 are to be performed prior to performing operator or NCS tasks 6 3b Summary of Primary NCS Tasks 6 6 PRIMARY TASK 1 PRIMARY TASK 2 PRIMARY TASK 3 PRIMARY TASK 4 PRIMARY TASK 5 Transfer Partial COMSEC FH Data ANCD to ANCD Used to download selected COMSEC keys or FH data elements from one ANCD to another This task supplements Special Operator Task 1 Transfer COMSEC FH Data From ANCD to ANCD which transfers complete data loads
29. Enabling Situation Awareness EGR Task 3 DESCRIPTION This procedure enables the ASIP RT to look for SA data on received messages This information is available at both the AUD DATA and GPS connectors and can be used by an external device i e the CDU to display net member positions Your ASIP RT must have a CID loaded EGR Task 3 ENABLING SITUATION AWARENESS SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Verify RT is in CT mode Observe HT display Display reads CT If not set up the RT for CT operation b Show SA mode Press SA 6 on RT keypad RT display shows OFF or ON A indicates no GPS syne it goes away when you have GPS sync Set SA mode Press CHG 7 on RT keypad asas RT display changes to ON needed Change 1 7 21 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 51 Load EGR Key from ANCD into EGR Task 4 DESCRIPTION This task allows the NCS or operator to load the EGR COMSEC key variable NOTE W20 used for EGR fill is not the same cable as W4 used for RT fill LOAD EGR KEY FROM ANCD INTO EGR SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare RT for loading key 1 Set FCTN to LD 2 Set COMSEC to CT 3 Set MODE to FH 4 Connect GPS Fill Cable W20 to RT GPS connector J5 o Q 3 gt gt but not to ANCD b Prepare ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON loading EGR key Soi Radio sUpervisor Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time Enter COMSEC Ld i Enter LD select Tek K
30. Figure 2 6 RT 1523D Features 2 6 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RT 1523E Reduced size and weight Internal battery Increased battery life Enhanced display Backlight level selectable Only one front panel switch Spare slots for future enhancements Enhanced self test BIT RT Mode may remain in FH to change net ID Enhanced Operating Mode EOM All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Simple Key Loader SKL Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Embedded GPS Receiver EGR manually via the keypad or by ERF RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time New keypad with SIP features GPS connector AUX connector for HRCRD 2 wire adapter or CDU Figure 2 7 RT 1523E Features RT 1523F Reduced size and weight Internal battery Increased battery life Enhanced display Backlight level selectable Only one front panel switch Spare slots for future enhancements Enhanced self test BIT RT Mode may remain in FH to change net ID Enhanced Operating Mode EOM All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Simple Key Loader SKL Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Embedded GPS Receiver EGR manually via the keypad or by ERF RT will accept ERF if sync time is l
31. 9 indicates it is 3 4 gone and 12 represents exhaustion These are rough estimates only and they apply to operators not NCS or other heavy radio users A 6 could mean power exhaustion for a manpack NCS operator Figure 5 24 Battery Life Indicator Chart 5 66 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 7b Loading and Clearing Offset Frequencies DEFINITION LOADING PROCEDURE CLEARING PROCEDURE The SINCGARS radio allows single channel frequencies to be offset by plus or minus 5 or 10 KHz When operating in the single channel mode this capability can be employed to help work through jamming or other interferences Use the following procedure to load an offset frequency Load regular SC frequency Primary Operator Task 1 Set FCTN to SQ ON and CHAN to one to be offset Press FREQ then OFST then CHG until desired offset is shown in RT display Use the following procedure to clear an offset frequency Set FCTN to SQ ON and CHAN to one to be cleared Press FREQ then OFST then CHG until RT display shows 00 5 7c Scrolling COMSEC Keys DEFINITION USE OF LOADSETS EXAMPLE OF NEED EXAMPLE OF USE SCROLL PROCEDURE The SINCGARS radio allows you to move COMSEC keys about in channels 1 through 5 in both SC and FH modes of communication This movement is called scrolling With normal use of loadsets which align channels and COMSEC keys according to unit needs there is limited requirement to scroll TEK
32. MT 6353 to MT 6352 CX 13303 VRC 80063 A3014040 9 Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 ICOM RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 or A3137500 ICOM RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 2 or A3028860 4 ICOM U 80063 A3249545 1 SIP U A3137700 SIP A3266100 1 ASIP A3307000 1 ASIP C C C Lever Locking Locking Bar 80063 A3256492 ICOM SIP 80063 A3256669 3 ASIP Strap Tiedown Electrical 81343 MS3367 5 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF THE END ITEM Continued 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 304 2045 6130 01 284 4195 5995 01 323 2729 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 555 7674 6130 01 540 5244 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 535 3667 5820 01 555 7371 6130 01 540 5244 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 5975 01 235 1962 5995 01 222 4209 3 Description and Part Number SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO SET USING SINGLE RADIO MOUNT RADIO SET AN VRC 87C Adapter Power Supply PSA MX 10862 VRC 80063 A3018352 1 Cable Assembly Special Purpose CX 13314 VRC 80063 A3142069 1 Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 ICOM RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 or A3137500 ICOM RT 1523B C er 80063 A3018860 2 or A3018860 4 ICOM RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 SIP RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 SIP SHORT RANGE VE
33. RESULTS Available in ANCD for from unit ACTIONS 1 Obtain required SC FH data for RXMT operation SOP 2 Load RT C and RT D with RT C and RT D require different SC SC FH data for mission freq Net IDs 3 SUBTASKS Prepare to perform RXMT mission 3 Move to RXMT site LOS communications with RT A and RT B are desirable Establish comm from 1 Call NCS on F1 using F1 may be net operational channel RXMT site RT C or RXMT special 2 Contact distant station RT B Relocation of RXMT site may be using RT D required to contact RT B 3 Provide to RT B if Distant station may require FH required data sync time 4 Contact RT B on F2 using Contact between RT B and RT D RT D on F2 is essential 1 Install RXMT cable between RT C and RT D 2 c Initiate RT A to RT B RXMT communications 2 Set RT C and RT D FCTN N A switches to RXMT 3 Set RT C MODE to FH RT A continues to be the NCS on F1 linkage 5 56 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS 4 Set RT D MODE to FH M RT D serves as NCS on F2 ensure RT B is in FH 5 Set RT C and RT D See below for COMSEC switch COMSEC to CT PT requirements 6 Request RT A NCS call RXMT mission is now being RT B using RXMT setup performed RXMT MODE When ASIP radios are used at the RXMT site and are temporarily taken out of the RXMT mode the RXMT cable must be disconnec
34. Set qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo select Choose Send Receive Scroll M Y press ENTR to select SOI set V Set name nr Edn name nr A SET may be deleted by entering Set and pressing the ANCD DELE delete key g SIGN COUNTERSIGN Enter C s to view sign countersign for current time period To view sign countersign for other time periods go to Tmpd and enter time period desired C s qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 1 Sign HARDWOOD Cntrsign SNEAKER 5 40 h FIND i MEMO TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Enter Find then select the category of SOI item desired If the first item viewed is not the desired one press J for JUMP to cause the ANCD to continue to search for the SOI item you want to see Find qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Find Net nEtid Sfx Word Clsgn Grp gRp Des Frq Enter Memo and select the memo number desired Each of four memos may be six lines long with 22 spaces on each line Memos are available in QREF files as well as full SOI files They may be transferred from ANCD to ANCD in both full and QREF transfers You may both create and read memos qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Memo 1 5 41 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5 SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS 5 5a Definition of Special Operator Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS SIP ASIP WHAT S REQUIR
35. Transfer Selected SOI Information ANCD to ANCD Used when less than a complete SOI load is to be downloaded from one ANCD to another This task supplements Special Operator Task 2 Alternate Transfer Full SOI Information From ANCD to ANCD which transfers the complete SOI file Conduct Hot Start Net Opening This is the principal method used for net openings operators load all required data and sync time and at the prescribed net opening time call the NCS and enter the secure FH net Conduct Cold Start Net Opening This is an alternate method for opening the net It requires operators to load COMSEC and FH data standby to receive an ERF containing sync time and properly storing the ERF It requires close coordination and correct operator actions It may be used in situations where the NCS wants all operators to enter the net at the exact same time Respond to CUE Calls This task is performed whenever the CUE message appears in the NCS s RT display In that response to a CUE message requires leaving the operational net transmitting in SC mode possibly sending an ERF and probably displacing physically to avoid enemy direction finding the NCS designates an Alternate NCS to respond to the CUE call TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3c Transfer Partial COMSEC FH Data ANCD to ANCD Primary NCS Task 1 DESCRIPTION DETAILED FLOWCHART In addition to transferring complete SOI files quick reference or full 015 an NCS is expected to
36. cause the to lose its fill of data Be sure you know which battery you are installing Always read the label before installing either HUB or ANCD batteries Change 1 3 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 2 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR AN PSN 11 3 2a PLGR Capabilities LOCATION Through global positioning system GPS satellite contact provides accurate location information in various formats TIME Through global position system GPS satellite contact provides accurate time in various formats and for various time zones USES Primary use is to determine position location secondary use is as the primary source of sync time used in SINCGARS radios 3 2b PLGR Characteristics ANTENNA The PLGR has built in antenna that can be swivelled to improve reception KEYPAD The PLGR has a keypad with twelve multifunction keys that are used to control PLGR operation DISPLAY The PLGR display contains four lines of information with 16 characters per line HANDLE A built in adjustable handle facilitates reading the PLGR display and making keypad entries while holding the device in the hand 3 2c PLGR Physical Data MEASUREMENTS Length is 24 1 CM 9 5 IN Width is 10 4 CM 4 1 IN Depth is 6 6 CM 2 6 IN POWER For primary power the PLGR uses a 6 volt lithium BA 5800 battery and the memory battery is a 3 6 volt LS 6 lithium battery TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 3 FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TD
37. d Cross Net NET OPENING General ESI lee dst gt HotStart ProceGure Procedure uie iced setae asset erbe nidos a dara adea LATE NET ENTRY LE To AD RR Passive Methodl HOt Start Opto R loading SYNC TIImie Ga CUE PERIODIC UPDATING a ME 4 22 ANCD SKL Loads elei dias ite uenti 4 23 Change 1 4 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 ELECTRONIC UPDATING a Sending by Over The Air Rekey b Sending FH Data by Electronic Remote Fill c Sending SOI Information by Broadcast RETRANSMISSION RXMT OPERATIONS 4 28 b RXMT Capability 2 2444 0 0 010 000 nennen nennen snnt nnns
38. for Repair Parts and DATE BLANK FORMS Special Tool Lists RPSTL and Supply For use of this form see AR 25 30 the proponent agency is Catalogs Supply Manuals SC SM 30 August 2002 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code Commander US Army C E LCMC Jane Q Doe SFC ATTN AMSEL LC LEO E ED 1234 Any Street Fort Monmouth NJ 07703 5006 Anytown AL 34565 PART I ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC SM AND BLANK FORMS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE TM 11 1234 567 14 16 Sep 2001 Operator Field and Sustainment Support Maintenance Manual for Radio AN ABC 123 PARA FIGURE ITEM PAGE GRAPH LINE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON 1 0005 2 Test or Correctiive Action column should identify a different WP number PG3 TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION Jane Q Doe SFC 123 4567 DA FORM 2028 FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028 1 DEC 68 WHICH WILL BE USED APD V4 00 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART Il REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS SUPPLY MANUALS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER DATE TOTAL NO PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE ITEM RECOMMENDED ACTION NO NO NO NUMBER NO NO NO 28 g PART Ill REMARKS Any gf rema kod 51905 or
39. while ANCD batteries are 3 Volts each If three HUB batteries are mistakenly placed in an ANCD the ANCD will be destroyed Placing one ANCD battery in the SIP radio HUB position will cause the RT to lose its fill of data Therefore be sure you know which battery goes where Always read the label before installing either HUB or ANCD batteries CAUTION YOUR RT CAN BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER ATTACHMENT OF MANPACK ANTENNAS 1 To avoid damage turn the sleeve only not the antenna 2 Turning the antenna can destroy the antenna connector in the RT CAUTION TURN RADIO OFF WHEN NOT IN USE Turn Loudspeaker LS 671 power switch OFF when radio is not in use to prevent drain on vehicle batteries Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY Change No 1 Washington DC 1 December 2007 Operator s Manual SINCGARS Ground ICOM Combat NET Radios AN PRC 119A NSN 5820 01 267 9482 EIC L2Q AN PRC 119D NSN 5820 01 421 0801 EIC GC9 AN PRC 119F NSN 5820 01 451 8252 EIC GA4 AN VRC 87A NSN 5820 01 267 9480 EIC L22 AN VRC 87C NSN 5820 01 304 2045 EIC GDC AN VRC 87D NSN 5820 01 351 5259 EIC GAR AN VRC 87F NSN 5820 01 451 8248 EIC GA5 AN VRC 87G NSN 5820 01 555 7674 EIC N A AN VRC 88A NSN 5820 01 267 9481 EIC L23 AN VRC 88D NSN 5820 01 352 1694 EIC GAS AN VRC 88F NSN 5820 01 452 8435 EIC GA3 AN VRC 89A NSN 5820 01 267 9479 EIC L24 AN VRC 89D NSN 5820 01 4
40. will ever be completely shut down until the exercise or operation has been completed In combat situations it would be rare for an entire net to shut down The minimum essential data required by a SINCGARS radio prior to net opening are COMSEC key and TSK These data elements must be manually loaded into the radio even when an is to be sent Maximum data that can be loaded into the radio prior to net opening include COMSEC key FH data and sync time In this case the radio is ready to enter the secure FH net at the opening time or when called A Loadset is defined as all of the COMSEC keys TEK and KEK and FH data hopset TSK and net ID required to load all six channels of the SINCGARS radio Loadsets are tailored to the needs of each net or unit specifying by channel where the operational net will be and what other nets will be loaded into the remaining channels For examples of company and platoon loadsets series and 4 6 below Unit loadset composition may be left to the discretion of each operator but it is normally prescribed by the unit SOP to ensure that all operators have the same information and can readily contact other nets in the loadset 4 13 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CHANNEL 1 NET ID 275 CO TEAM COMMAND NET CHANNEL 2 NET ID 678 FIRE SUPPORT NET CHANNEL 3 NET ID 280 RIGHT FLANK CO TEAM CHANNEL 4 NET ID 250 BN TF COMMAND NET CHANNEL 5 NET ID 733 ATCHD ENGINEER PLT CHANNEL 6 NET ID 255 BN TF ADMIN LOG
41. 1 thru 6 15 i thru vi Chapter 1 1 1 thru 1 4 4 32 and 4 33 Chapter 2 4 34 thru 4 37 2 1 thru 2 3 2 25 and 2 26 2 27 thru 2 31 4 43 thru 4 48 2 32 thru 2 39 4 49 4 50 blank 2 40 thru 2 44 Chapter 5 2 45 2 46 blank Chapter 3 5 10 thru 5 12 5 13 and 5 14 5 14 1 5 14 2 blank 8 26 thru 8 28 5 15 thru 5 17 Appendices A 1 thru A 3 3 15 3 16 blank Chapter 4 B 4 thru B 12 rh 1 B 13 B 14 blank 5 27 2 blank C 1 thru C 4 5 28 and 5 29 D 1 thru D 10 5 58 thru 5 63 5 64 thru 5 66 5 67 and 5 68 5 69 and 5 70 A B blank TM 11 5820 890 10 8 HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY WASHINGTON DC 1 DECEMBER 1998 OPERATOR S MANUAL SINCGARS GROUND ICOM COMBAT NET RADIOS Technical Manual No 11 5820 890 10 8 AN PRC 119A AN PRC 119D NSN 5820 01 267 9482 EIC L2Q NSN 5820 01 421 0801 EIC GC9 AN PRC 119F NSN 5820 01 451 8252 EIC GA4 AN VRC 87A NSN 5820 01 267 9480 EIC L22 AN VRC 87C NSN 5820 01 304 2045 EIC GDC AN VRC 87D NSN 5820 01 351 5259 EIC GAR AN VRC 87F NSN 5820 01 451 8248 EIC GA5 AN VRC 87G NSN 5820 01 555 7674 EIC N A AN VRC 88A NSN 5820 01 267 9481 EIC L23 AN VRC 88D NSN 5820 01 352 1694 EIC GAS AN VRC 88F NSN 5820 01 452 8435 EIC GA3 AN VRC 89A NSN 5820 01 267 9479 EIC L24 AN VRC 89D NSN 5820 01 420 6619 EIC GD8 AN VRC 89F NSN 5820 01 451 8247 EIC GAY AN VRC 90A NSN 5820 01 268 5105 EIC L25 AN VRC 90D NSN 5820
42. 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2h Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES Item to Operator Procedure Equipment Not Check Service Ready Available If CONTROLS To control radio functions press SEL HRCRD cannot control until the required function is highlighted RT CHAN COMSEC RF PWR MODE Then press the DOWN ARROW until specific item you need appears in the display To turn backlight on press the light Backlight required for button To turn the light off press the mission but not light button a second time functioning To change the level of audio volume HRCRD cannot control rotate the volume control knob on the RT volume side of the HRCRD to reach desired level Check for proper installation Cable is damaged Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cable CONNECTORS Check for obvious damage to Any connector connectors damaged Check for missing O rings Check for bent broken pins COMM CHECK Check for sidetone Cannot transmit or Check voice comm receive HRCRD is mission capable as long as transmit and receive functions are operable If controls are not functioning place radio function switch to normal operating position SQ ON LD and change functions via keypad switches 8 24 Change 1 8 2i Control Display Unit CDU TM 11 5820 890 10 8 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES SELF TEST CONTROLS
43. 1456 VRC The multiplexer combines any mix of up to four low to high power frequency hopping SINCGARS transceivers to a single antenna The FHMUX unit operates across the 30 000 to 87 975 MHz frequency range The primary function is to extend the multiplexing capability to frequency hopping radios In addition to the multiplexing function the FHMUX prevents frequency collisions and provides the selectivity necessary to attenuate any local interfering signal which might otherwise result in degrading the receiver sensitivity The FHMUX is digitally tuned via the SNAP interface when controlled by a SINCGARS radio 3 3a FHMUX COMPONENTS Multiplexer TD 1456 VRC FHMUX Mounting Base MT 6845 VRC Figure 3 2 Multiplexer TD 1456 VRC and Mounting Base MT 6845 VRC 3 3b FHMUX Physical Data ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT cm in ccm uU 482070 2889 2569 Multiplexer mounting base 40 6 16 0 41 4 16 3 8 9 3 5 8 6 19 Table 3 1 FHMUX Physical Data Change 1 3 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 3c FHMUX Performance Data Vehicular Configuration Figure 3 5 shows a typical vehicular configuration using one multiplexer and two VRC 92A radios The introduction of the multiplexer into the radio system is transparent that is it does not affect the way the radios are operated The number of vehicular antennas needed is reduced from four to one Instead of each radio going directly to its own a
44. 2 Waypoint Display CDU Task 3 Keypad Display CDU Task 4 7 27 Navigation Display CDU Task 5 7 28 a b C d e f g b d e f h Change 7 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 1 GENERAL SCOPE This chapter addresses three items of equipment associated with SINCGARS operations PLGR The PLGR in addition to its primary function of determining position location serves as a source of correct Julian Date and exact GPS Zulu time for SINCGARS net sync time Julian Date and GPS Zulu time can be downloaded from the PLGR by direct connection to the RT or by manually loading PLGR time into an ANCD with subsequent loading of the RT from the ANCD Additionally the ANCD can be used as the source of required PLGR keys FHMUX FHMUX will allow operation of up to four SINCGARS vehicular radios from a single antenna STU By connecting the STU to an ANCD it is possible to transfer COMSEC keys FH data and SOI information over commercial or military telephone circuits for unlimited distances This capability enhances SINCGARS operations for widely dispersed units and it could be especially useful during mobilization of Reserve Component forces 7 2 7 2 PLGR TASKS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 2a Definition of PLGR Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED There are four PLGR ta
45. 2 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 2d Connectors SIP RT P1 System The P1 systems connector is located on the back of the SIP RT This connector provides RT power and signaling interfaces SYSTEMS CONNECTOR P1 ANTENNA CONNECTOR J1 GPS CONNECTOR J5 RXMT CONNECTOR J2 AUD FILL CONNECTOR 43 AUD DATA CONNECTOR 44 Figure 2 9 51 RT Connectors J5 GPS Located on the back of the SIP RT the GPS J5 connector provides an interface to the VAA GPS connector J4 AUD DATA The J4 AUD DATA connector supports general data communications at SINCGARS Data Rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 BPS and at Enhanced Data Rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS The RS 232 interface allows transmission of data via SINCGARS SIP radios using computers and commercial Xmodem software If not using Packet PCKT data mode or the internet controller INC feature of the SIP radio all data devices must be connected to the AUD DATA port not to the SIP VAA J3 AUD FILL Handsets used with the SIP RT may be connected to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL connector NOTE Handsets will not function if connected to the front of the SIP VAA 2 10 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 22e Connectors ASIP RT P1 System J6 Auxiliary J5 GPS J3 AUD DATA J2 AUD FILL J1 Antenna This connector provides RT power and signaling interfaces GPS CONNECTOR 45 SYSTEMS CONNECTOR P1 AUXILIARY CONNECTOR
46. 7 Respond NO Do you want to specify groups to send Y N 8 Respond YES Scroll MV amp press ENTR to select groups 9 Press 4VV to display and 1 group selected press ENTR to select keep selecting Y N 10 Enter YES to continue enter NO to quit Do you want to specify a time pd to send Y N 6 21 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 p ACTIONS RESULTS 11 Respond ilsBesondVES Enter Time Pd 4 gt 12 Enter Time Period and press Include Suffix amp Smoke Pyro ENTR data Y N 13 Respond YES to include Send to respond NO to exclude Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 14 Enter BROADCAST Enter ID for each polled ANCD and 0 when done 15 Press down arrow Polled 1234567890123456 gt 16 Enter IDs for polling see Polled 12 456 901 34 6 example press ENTR gt 17 Enter 0 to quit Do you want to save this SOI set Y N 18 ear YES to save SOI New SOI set name ear Enter SOI set name and Connect ANCD to RT AUD DATA press ENTR 20 Press down arrow Press SEND to send WAIT c Prepare net operators Say Standby for Broadcast Alerts net members to an immediate for receipt of SOI follow my instructions ACK requirement Broadcast 2 After ACK say Go to SQ Ensures net radios and ANCDs are ON FH CT DATA 1200 properly prepared 3 ANCD ON select Soi Radio sUpervisor 4 Say Enter SOI qRef Grou
47. A3018860 2 or A3018860 4 ICOM RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 SIP RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 SIP RT 1523E 80063 A3266100 1 ASIP CU RT 1523F C U 80063 A3307000 1 ASIP Lever Locking Locking Bar 80063 A3256492 ICOM SIP 80063 A3256669 3 ASIP LONG SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO SET RADIO SET AN VRC 89A ICOM RADIO SET AN VRC 89D SIP RADIO SET AN VRC 89F ASIP Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 ICOM AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 ICOM AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 or A3148136 2 ICOM AM 7239C V RC 80063 A3245066 1 SIP AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 SIP AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3256600 1 ASIP Amplifier Radio Frequency RFPA AM 7238 VRC 80063 A3013357 1 or A3191000 1 AM 7238A VRC 80063 132135 1 or A3251212 AM 7238B VRC 80063 A3210919 1 or A3256646 1 Cable Assembly Radio Frequency W2 RT to RFPA 80063 A3013824 3 Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 RT to VAA 80063 A3013735 8 ICOM 80063 A3255571 SIP ASIP Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 ICOM RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 or A3137500 ICOM RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 2 or A3018860 4 ICOM RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 SIP RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 SIP RT 1523E C U 80063 A3266100 1 ASIP RT 1523F C U 80063 A3307000 1 ASIP Lever Locking Locking Bar 80063 A3256492 ICOM SIP 80063 A3256669 3 ASIP Chang
48. ANT CONNECTOR J1 AUD FILL CONNECTOR 42 Figure 2 10 ASIP RT Connectors Used to connect HRCRD handset two wire adapter or CDU On RT 1523F may be used to connect an expansion module Enables a PLGR GPS fill cable or GPS antenna via GPS adapter connector in manpack configuration to be connected to the ASIP RT The J3 AUD DATA connector supports general data communications at SINCGARS Data Rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 BPS and at Enhanced Data Rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS The RS 232 interface allows transmission of data via SINCGARS ASIP radios using computers and commercial Xmodem software If not using Packet PCKT data mode or the internet controller INC feature of the ASIP radio all data devices must be connected to the AUD DATA port not to the ASIP VAA Also serves as the RXMT connector Handsets used with the ASIP RT may be connected to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL connector NOTE Handsets will not function if connected to the front of the ASIP VAA RF Input Output Change 1 2 11 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 2f RT Messages CALL This message appears in the display of a remoted radio when an RCU RT operator presses the CALL key and at the RCU RT when the remoted radio operator presses the CALL key EXT If your radio has been set to EXT as an option of the RCU key menu an EXT message will be displayed RT front panel controls except COMSEC are disabled Unless you
49. Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 05842 DISTRIBUTION To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number IDN 369784 requirements for TM 11 5820 890 10 8 U S GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1999 710 117 80152 PIN 073599 000 This fine document Was brought to you by me Liberated Manuals free army and government manuals Why do I do it I am tired of sleazy CD ROM sellers who take publicly available information slap watermarks and other junk on it and sell it Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that sell free information come up first in search engines They did not create it They did not even scan it Why should they get your money Why are not letting you give those free manuals to your friends I am setting this document FREE This document was made by the US Government and is NOT protected by Copyright Feel free to share republish sell and so on I am not asking you for donations fees or handouts If you can please provide a link to liberatedmanuals com so that free manuals come up first in search engines A HREFzhttp www liberatedmanuals com Free Military and Government Manuals lt A gt Sincerely Igor Chudov http igor chudov com
50. BROADCAST USING ANCD Up to 16 stations may be polled during use of the Broadcast method stations receive the transmission but the NCS may select by identity code those stations to be polled At the end of the first transmission the ANCD determines which stations did not receive the SOI data and rebroadcasts After the third broadcast to polled stations the ANCD reports to the sending NCS any stations which still have not received the SOI data If the NCS does not desire to use this polling feature it can be shut off by entering O Change1 4 27 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 9 RETRANSMISSION RXMT OPERATIONS 4 9a General BUILT IN CAPABILITY The SINCGARS radio has a built in retransmission capability which requires only two radios and the addition of an RXMT cable CX 13298 for operations Any configuration of the ground ICOM radio can be used for retransmission The two radios may be installed on the same vehicle on two separate vehicles or two manpack versions may be used RXMT cables come in two lengths 5 inches and 15 feet to accommodate various radio configurations CAPABILITY MODES There are three modes of retransmission when using SINCGARS radios Each is described below 1 Frequency hopping net to frequency hopping net 2 Frequency hopping net to single channel net 8 Single channel net to single channel net RXMT SITUATION A typical situation requiring retransmission communications is used to illustrate t
51. By carrying this guide with them on the job and by following the procedures provided operators can be assured of required job task proficiency When overall operator proficiency is low due to personnel turnover or other factors units may elect to have communications specialists or designated NCOs perform selected tasks such as loading data and sync time into radios Whether the objective is to build or maintain SINCGARS operator proficiency there is no better or easier tool to use than the unit communications exercise Opening nets frequently and having operators transmit and receive realistic traffic are important requirements Weekly short duration COMM EXs are one of the best ways to conduct SINCGARS sustainment training for both operators and NCS personnel Unit sustainment training is the key to SINCGARS proficiency SINCGARS and the Mobile Subscriber Equipment MSE System were designed to work together on the battlefield The two systems even share some frequencies without interference to either Some vehicles such as command post vehicles have both SINCGARS and MSE radios installed The Mobile Subscriber Radio Telephone MSRT and a SINCGARS radio cannot be operated from the same vehicle at the same time unless one or both of the antennas are remoted TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 12g Role of Signal Officers NCOs IMPORTANCE FUNCTIONS The important role of unit Signal Officers and Non Commissioned Officers has been signifi
52. CUE the NCS 1 Press PTT for 4 or 5 seconds There is no need to speak 2 Set COMSEC to CT at once 5 NCS will respond in CT on CUE frequency 4 Repeat every 15 seconds You have no way of knowing if net until NCS responds is busy or quiet Obtain ERF 1 When NCS responds Responding NCS will direct you to request an ERF the MAN channel 2 Receive and store ERF See Special Operator Task 3 for when sent by NCS detailed procedure 3 Re enter the net CUE and late net entry is completed 3 Wait for NCS to respond CUE signal goes through only when the net is quiet iet 5 55 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 51 Conduct Retransmission RXMT Operations Special Operator Task 6 DESCRIPTION This special operator task may be required whenever communications with a net station is lost or at risk of being lost due to distance or physical obstacles such as hills and mountains Communications specialists scouts staff drivers and other operators having dual radio configurations should be trained to perform this task whenever it is required The task involves communications between the requesting NCS and the RXMT site and between the RXMT site and the distant station It requires the use of two net IDs or two SC frequencies and physical connection of the two RXMT radios by special retransmission cable Radio and frequency designations are as shown in the graphic Figure 5 23
53. D use a different net ID than that used by RADIO A and RADIO C Use of the same hopset and TSK poses no problem When the requesting station RADIO A calls the outstation RADIO B using one net ID the message passes through RADIO C and the RXMT cable to RADIO D which then sends the message to RADIO B using another net ID Other than a slight delay in transmission and the fact that distance and obstacles are overcome there is no difference between direct and RXMT communications It is anticipated that there will be both US and Allied Forces units equipped with SC only radios for some time When it is necessary for a FH net to make contact or maintain communications with a unit using an SC net RXMT can be useful regardless of distance or obstacles In the FH to SC RXMT operation RADIO A and RADIO C are frequency hopping while RADIO B and RADIO D operate in the single channel mode RADIO A and RADIO C use the same FH data RADIO B and RADIO D use the same SC frequency An FH message entering RADIO D reaches RADIO B as SC traffic A SC message entering RADIO C reaches RADIO A as FH traffic Although there should be little need for this mode of RXMT operation it is available if required In this case RADIO A and RADIO C operate on a SC frequency that is at least 10 MHz different from that used by RADIO B and RADIO D Net ID and SC frequencies used in RXMT operations are obtained from your or unit SOP At the RXMT site maximum res
54. DA Pam 750 8 Change 1 Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 JULIAN DATE CALENDAR DAY MO JAN Change 1 A 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 TIME ZONE MAP AND oooooooooooooo gt OOO000000000C RO 995 dd ZN v ODOTA AFRICA 2OO000000c 0 9 00 O NM DAY R STE YE lt 2O0o0lo ooooooo TONO NNNNA DATE LINE TM 11 5820 890 10 8 APPENDIX B COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS SECTION I INTRODUCTION B 1 SCOPE This appendix lists components of end item for Radio Sets AN PRC 119A D F and AN VRC 87A D F thru AN VRC 92A D F AN VRC 87C AN VRC 87G and AN VRC 90G to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient operation B 2 GENERAL The Components of End Item List is found at Section Il This listing is for informational pu
55. ESET select Eset name Select new Eset and press Modify another loadset element ENTR Y N Respond NO select Replace iNsert name The bUild feature should not be used unless you are specifically trained to perform this task Serious database errors can occur if incorrect procedures are used At this point select the Eset you wish to replace At this point select your replacement Eset by name 6 11 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3g Transfer Selected SOI Information ANCD to ANCD Primary NCS Task 2 DESCRIPTION Although Primary Operator Tasks 2 and 2 Alternate provide for the transfer of full or quick reference SOI information an NCS may at times need to transfer only selected items of SOI information For example it may be necessary to transfer only one SOI set 5 days of information the detailed procedure shown below uses an SOI set for the example Steps to be taken are the same for other categories of SOI information This task involves preparing the Source and Target ANCD plus performing the data transfer TRANSFER SELECTED SOI INFORMATION ANCD TO ANCD SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare Source ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON select selected SOI transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter SEND Scroll MV amp press ENTR to select SOl V 5 Press down arrow SOI Set
56. Jamming anti jamming aetlofis aues oco Does tese ipe 5 69 Late net entry LNE passive 4 18 Load COMSEC FH data sync time into RT using ICOM fill procedure task 5 32 Load date and Zulu time into SINCGARS Receiver Transmitter RT task 7 7 Load EGR Key from ANCD into uiia Rites Desa etu idet dui vada 7 22 Load Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver key from ANCD into PLGR task 7 9 Load single channel frequencies into Receiver Transmitter RT task 5 30 Loading and clearing offset 0 4422 5 67 Horno m cr S 4 13 Long manpack amnia 4 32 Long Range Long Range LR LR Radio 2 24 Long Range LR Radio components prre RA en te Ded riesen 2 22 Long Range LR Radio with Single ASIP Radio Mount SARM components 2 42 Loudspeaker 5 671 ea dieu 2 39 Components E 2 39 Operator COMMONS 5 27 Operator MaIMIBNANCe Te E t 8 20 Performance 2 40 Physical dataset 2 39 Maintenance
57. NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION APD V4 00 RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND Use Part Il reverse for Repair Parts and BLANK FORMS Special Tool Lists RPSTL and Supply For use of this form see AR 25 30 the proponent agency is Catalogs Supply Manuals SC SM TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART I ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC SM AND BLANK FORMS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER PARA FIGURE ITEM PAGE GRAPH LINE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION DA FORM 2028 FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028 1 DEC 68 WHICH WILL BE USED APD V4 00 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART ll REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS SUPPLY MANUALS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE TOTAL NO OF MAJOR PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE ITEM ITEMS RECOMMENDED ACTION NO NO NO NUMBER NO NO NO SUPPORTED PART Ill REMARKS Any general remarks or recommendations or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank forms Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION APD V4 00 RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO
58. NCS to establish radio priority strategy for up to four radios when FHMUX is employed NCS OPERATIONS WITH MULTIPLEXER SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a SET POWER ON b SET RADIO PRIORITY Set POWER toggle switch to ON The POWER indicator should illuminate continuously and the four BIT FAULT indicators should illuminate for approximately five seconds after power on and then extinguish upon successful completion of the self test The POWER ON indicator should stay illuminated Get Net Priority strategy Set RADIO PRIORITY to EQUAL to give all RTs equal communications priority OR Set RADIO PRIORITY to desired 1A thru 2B to give highest priority to a single RT OR Set RADIO PRIORITY to RXMT 1 1 if RT 1A and RT 1B are in the retransmit mode and they are to have higher priority than RTs 2A and 2B 7 17 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 5 EMBEDDED GPS RECEIVER EGR TASKS 7 5a Definition of EGR Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED 7 5b Summary of EGR Tasks EGR TASK 1 EGR TASK 2 EGR TASK 3 EGR TASK 4 EGR TASK 5 7 18 Change 1 There are five EGR tasks One allows you to load accurate GPS time for FH sync time use In addition the ASIP RT can be set to automatically provide your GPS position and to determine the GPS position of received messages called situation awareness SA These five tasks involve loading GPS time loading the EGR key setting a co
59. NET OR KEK Figure 4 5 EXAMPLE OF COMPANY LOADSET CHANNEL 1 NET ID 276 1ST PLT CHANNEL 2 NET ID 277 2ND PLT CHANNEL 3 NET ID 278 3RD PLT CHANNEL 4 NET ID 275 CO TEAM COMMAND NET CHANNEL 5 NET ID 678 FIRE SUPPORT NET CHANNEL 6 NET ID 733 ATCHD ENGR PLT OR KEK Figure 4 6 EXAMPLE OF PLATOON LOADSET If a KEK is loaded in Channel 6 in preparation for use of OTAR procedures Channel 6 may not then be used for either voice or data communications Sending a TEK by OTAR procedures is normally an infrequent requirement and Channel 6 requires FH data be loaded in order to send an OTAR message One solution is to load a TEK in Channel 6 use it for normal communications until an OTAR requirement comes up and then load a KEK from the ANCD into Channel 6 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RESPONSIBILITIES Unit Signal Officers NCOs are responsible for determining unit specific loadset requirements and advising the brigade or separate battalion level Lightweight Computer Unit LCU operator of those requirements The LCU operator using the computer assembles data into loadsets and distributes them to the using units TF CHANGES When changes in task organization can be anticipated revised loadsets are developed by the supporting LCU operator When time does not permit LCU operator support using units change net IDs as appropriate to accommodate changes in task organization 4 5c ICOM Fill of RT DEFINITION An ICOM fill is the loading o
60. Nosy f8Hous f amp Hous 180 Standby STBY 3 Months 3 Months 3 Months 3 Months 3 Months 3 Months Use of HRCRD reduces times shown by approximately one half hour Represents 9 minutes of receiving and monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting Represents 2 minutes of receiving and monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting In STBY RT draws power from main battery not the HUB Note Battery selection based on Cost weight and mission runtimes listed below BA 5390 LMC2 runtime is approximately 5096 greater than the BA 5590 BB 2590 Li lon rechargeable runtime is about equal with the BA 5590 BB 390B U Ni Mh rechargeable runtime is about 2596 lower than BA 5590 BA 8180 runtime is 4 days longer than the BA 5590 but is much heavier and requires a tethered adapter see AAL Appendix Change 1 2 17 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 4e RCU RT Battery Life Estimated Battery Life BA 5590 For RT Used as RCU Table 2 6 SIP ASIP RT Used As RCU Main Power VOICE DATA RT 1523C RT 1523D RT 1523E F FH amp CT Standby STBY 3 Months 3 Months 3 Months 24 Hold Up Battery Life Estimated Hold Up Battery Life BA 5372 SIP Radio Table 2 7 SIP ASIP Radio Hold Up Battery use RT 1523 RT 1523A RT 1523B RT 1523C RT 1523D RT 1523E F Back Up 6 Months 6 Months 6 Months 6 Months 6 Months 6 Months CAUTION SINCGARS HUB and ANCD batteries look similar and can be
61. Number RADIO SET AN VRC 91A D F continued Amplifier Radio Frequency RFPA AM 7238 VRC 80063 A3013357 1 or A3191000 1 AM 7238A VRC 80063 A3132135 1 or A3251212 AM 7238B VRC 80063 A3210919 1 or A3256646 1 Cable Assembly Radio Frequency W2 RTA to RFPA 80063 A3013824 3 Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 RTA to VAA 80063 A3013735 8 ICOM 80063 A3255571 SIP ASIP Antenna Manpack AS 3683 PRC 80063 A3147901 2 Battery Box CY 8523A PRC 80063 A3148167 1 CY 8523B PRC 80063 A3132600 1 Required for MP SIP RT as RCU CY 8523C PRC 80063 A3249648 1 Required for MP using HRCRD Handset HRCRD H 250 U 80058 C 12493 U 80063 A3249865 1 HRCRD MP requires use of Battery Box CY 8523 PRC Carrying Case Radio 80063 A3142076 1 ICOM SIP 80063 A3142076 2 ASIP Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 ICOM RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 or A3137500 ICOM U 80063 A3018860 2 or A3018860 4 ICOM U 80063 A3249545 1 SIP U 80063 A3137700 SIP U 80063 A3266100 1 ASIP U 80063 A3307000 1 ASIP Lever Locking Locking Bar 80063 A3256492 ICOM SIP 80063 A3256669 3 ASIP Change 1 B 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 B 10 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF THE END ITEM Continued 2 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 267 9477 5820 01 421 2605 5820 01 451 8250 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 58
62. Operator Tasks includes Primary and Special Operator NCS Primary and Special plus PLGR FHMUX STU Transfer EGR and CDU tasks ANCD and SKL tasks are addressed as integral parts of Operator and NCS tasks BATTERIES Because of the critical importance of batteries to the operation of SINCGARS radios and associated equipment a Battery Requirements section provides general guidance regarding the number of hours of service that may be expected of various types of batteries under differing operational conditions NOMENCLATURE CROSS This manual often uses abbreviated common names for items REFERENCE LIST Refer to the Nomenclature Cross Reference List i to find the official nomenclature ABBREVIATIONS This manual often uses abbreviations Abbreviations are identified with their complete meaning at first use and are listed alphabetically Appendix D along with their definitions GLOSSARY The Glossary Appendix gives the definitions of technical terms used in this manual POCKET GUIDES TM 11 5820 890 10 6 Operator s Pocket Guide and TM 11 5820 890 10 7 Net Control Station NCS Pocket Guide contain important information and procedures from this manual Use these pocket guides as a handy reference to Operator s tasks vi Change 1 Lm 16 Im 1 9 in 1 12 11 5820 890 10 8 1 INTRODUCTION MAINTENANCE FORMS RECORDS AND REPORTS a Reports of Maintenance and Unsatisfactor
63. PUBLICATIONS AND Use Part Il reverse for Repair Parts and BLANK FORMS Special Tool Lists RPSTL and Supply For use of this form see AR 25 30 the proponent agency is Catalogs Supply Manuals SC SM TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART I ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC SM AND BLANK FORMS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER PARA FIGURE ITEM PAGE GRAPH LINE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION DA FORM 2028 FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028 1 DEC 68 WHICH WILL BE USED APD V4 00 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART ll REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS SUPPLY MANUALS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE TOTAL NO OF MAJOR PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE ITEM ITEMS RECOMMENDED ACTION NO NO NO NUMBER NO NO NO SUPPORTED PART Ill REMARKS Any general remarks or recommendations or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank forms Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION APD V4 00 By Order of the Secretary of the Army 2 2 Z DENNIS J REIMER B HUDSON General United States Army ee Chief of Staff
64. RXMT mission use of RT D is recommended Use of RT D on F2 Sed Figure 5 23 minimizes the possibility of interfering with net sync time Once RXMT operations begin RT D must be set to FH M as shown in Special Operator Task 6 The best rule to follow is do not transmit in the FH M position except to send an ERF and for RT D during RXMT operations RK If common TEK FH data and sync time are being used an alternate procedure is for RXMT operator to contact RT B on a secure FH channel and request RT B operator to change to a specified net ID for purpose of RXMT operation 5 59 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5 Change Net ID Special Operator Task 8 DESCRIPTION This Special Operator Task is performed when there is a requirement to communicate with a net or station which is not a part of the operational loadset or loadsets if more than one radio is being used Commanders staff officers drivers and others who frequently move about the battlefield should be able to perform this task without assistance other than reference to the Operator s Pocket Guide As noted below the RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio requires use of the FH M position in order to change a net ID and will allow the operator to change only the last two digits of the net ID Despite these differences the procedure for changing a net ID is essentially the same Use of this procedure enables the operator to contact virtually any SINCGARS station within a divisio
65. SET AN PRC 119D SIP RADIO SET AN PRC 119F ASIP Antenna Manpack AS 3683 PRC 80063 A3147901 2 Battery Box CY 8523A PRC 80063 A3148167 1 CY 8523B PRC 80063 A3132600 Required for MP SIP RT as RCU CY 8523C PRC 80063 A3249648 1 Required for MP RT using HRCRD Handset HRCRD H 250 U 80058 C 12493 U 80063 A3249865 1 HRCRD Requires use of Battery Box CY 8523C PRC Carrying Case Radio 80063 A3142076 1 ICOM SIP 80063 A3142076 2 ASIP Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 ICOM RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 or A3137500 ICOM RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 2 or A3018860 4 ICOM RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 SIP RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 SIP RT 1523E C U 80063 A3266100 1 ASIP RT 1523F C U 80063 A3307000 1 ASIP SHORT RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO SET RADIO SET AN VRC 87A ICOM RADIO SET AN VRC 87D SIP RADIO SET AN VRC 87F ASIP Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 ICOM AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 ICOM AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 or A3148136 2 ICOM AM 7239C V RC 80063 A3245066 1 SIP AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 SIP AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3256600 1 ASIP Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 RT to VAA 80063 A3013735 8 ICOM 80063 A3255571 SIP ASIP Change 1 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF THE END ITEM Continued 2 National Stock Number 5820 0
66. Single Channel operation FH Selection of the FH position places the radio in the frequency hopping mode of Frequency Hopping operation FH M The FH M position used by NCS operators only causes the NCS radio to Frequency Hopping electronically keep all net radios within the plus or minus 4 second window required Master for frequency hopping communications CHAN CHANNEL This control allows the operator to select from among eight SC and six FH channels These preset channels are tuned electronically for ease of operation Net change is accomplished by merely moving the switch from one channel to another Figure 5 4 CHANNEL Switch CHANNEL SWITCH POSITIONS AND USES POSITION PURPOSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Channel switch positions 1 through 6 are used for SC and or FH nets These channels are routinely loaded with COMSEC keys FH data and sync time as required for unit communications With the correct SC frequency loaded in this position an operator with a non FH radio is able to contact a frequency hopping net This position may be used for another SC net if desired The Manual position is required for sending and receiving the Cold Start net Manual opening ERF This position also may be used for another SC net 5 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RF PWR RF POWER POSITION This control allows the operator to adjust the level of radio frequency RF power and related range of operation Basic rule is to use the lea
67. an which stands for Hand Receipt TM 11 5820 890 10 HR consists of preprinted hand receipts DA Form 2062 that list end item related equipment i e COEI and AAL you must account for As an aid to property accountability additional HR manuals may be requisitioned from the US Army Publishing Agency Distribution Operations 1 6 DESTRUCTION OF ARMY ELECTRONICS MATERIEL Destruction of Army electronics materiel to prevent enemy use shall be in accordance with TM 750 244 2 1 7 SECURITY CLASSIFICATION AND MARKING The following items are designated as Controlled Cryptographic Items CCI SINCGARS Ground ICOM receiver transmitters RT 1523 A B C D E F SINCGARS Remote Control Unit C 11561 C U Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 Simple Key Loader SKL AN PYQ 10 Handle Controlled Cryptographic Items in accordance with TB 380 41 5 1 8 PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT c EL a B Y lt lt 3 2 D Q 2 gt g n lt n qe 2 n a a a ES n get e 5 a o 3 ES a gt qe after storage or shipment to assure operational readiness Remove all batteries from equipment prior to storage or shipment 1 2 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 1 9 NOMEN
68. and receiving the electronic remote fill ERF which contains FH data and sync time for frequency hopping operations When an operator needs to enter an FH net and does not have the required FH data or a radio with FH capability it is necessary to cue press PTT on CUE channel or frequency with COMSEC set to PT For detailed procedure see Figure 4 3 below Calling operator sets CHAN to CUE MODE to SC COMSEC to PT RF PWR to presses PTT Calling operator changes from PT to CT immediately after pressing PTT This procedure is repeated about every 15 seconds until answer received Receiving NCS sees CUE in RT display NCS changes to CUE responds in CT Deleted Deleted Figure 4 3 HOW TO CUE AN NCS Change1 4 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 3 FREQUENCY HOPPING FH COMMUNICATIONS 4 3a Capabilities FREQUENCIES ENHANCED OPERATING MODE HOPPING COMMUNICATING In the frequency hopping FH mode of operation the SINCGARS radio transmits and receives on any or all of the 2320 frequencies with 25 KHz separation in the 30 000 to 87 975 MHz range For best results 1200 or more of the total 2320 frequencies are normally used For ASIP radios only the RT has a keypad selectable enhanced FH operating mode Enhanced Operating Mode EOM provides added security in addition to COMSEC security In the FH mode the SINCGARS radio hops over 100 frequencies per second For two or more rad
69. are installed in vehicles using specified installation kits Procedure by which stored data COMSEC FH data sync time and SC frequencies may be cleared from the RT TM 11 5820 890 10 8 INDEX SUBJECT PAGE Antenrias ERR 4 32 Antenna AS 3916 SEPA ait breue tein oi p E o p d E DER ERR ERE edd 4 33 Antenna AS 4266A Long Manpack Antenna sss eene 4 32 Antenna OE 254 iita oii s de 4 34 JAMA GACT ONS c M 5 69 Associated equiprrernt tie tardies eti rege i eee 8 13 Automated Net Control Device ANCD 3 2 Capabiliti S PE 3 2 Gharacteristies ioi defe te 3 3 Loads and updating duet epp avide e bit eeepc 4 23 Main power battery nennen enne nennen nnns 8 27 Operator Controls ib eo ete etd 5 19 Oper tor maintenance wade eal be tea el eid tienen he eel 8 21 isco seid EE 3 3 Battery lite condition IndiCaltor uoc Iac irre 5 64 Battery requirements teres festis esa eR Nu dea uten 8 25 Battery requirements decane dave 2 17 Hold Up Battery E EX cm 2 18
70. be able to transfer partial data loads For example performance of this task enables the NCS to transfer specific loadsets Esets COMSEC keys 5 or sync time from one ANCD to another This capability facilitates dissemination within the unit when less than total data is required There are three options associated with this task allowing the NCS to perform selected special functions NCS personnel perform the actions required in each subtask in the order shown Results are shown as ANCD displays dark bordered boxes or as RT displays in the form of RT display shows Where appropriate results are expressed as explanations of occurrences TRANSFER PARTIAL COMSEC FH DATA ANCD TO ANCD SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare Source ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON select partial data transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter SEND send to Radio Ancd Stu Pc 4 Enter ANCD Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter LOADSET select Loadset name ENTR 6 7 Scroll PgUP PgDN to Do you want to include time loadset desired ENTR Y N Respond YES unless you Connect to ANCD and press SEND want to omit time WAIT 6 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS b Prepare Target ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON select partial data transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Ent
71. be cabled directly to the SIP ASIP RT AUD DATA connector Change 1 5 13 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SIP ASIP RT Keypad General The keypad of the SIP ASIP radio is similar to that of earlier versions except four of the keys have been given new designations RCU GPS SA and CID The ASIP keypad adds a MENU and Backlight function Each is explained below CMSC RCU SYNC CMSC RCU SYNC 1 2 3 1 2 3 DATA ERF DATA ERF 4 OFST 4 OFST CHG CID LOUT CHG CID LOUT 7 8 9 7 8 9 CLR LOAD STO BATT CLR LOAD STO BATT 0 CALL MENU 0 CALL RCU 2 GPS 5 SA 6 5 14 Change 1 Figure 5 11 SIP ASIP RT KEYPAD The RCU key is used to select operating mode options of RT RCU EXT or LDE RT is the normal employment of the RT as a receiver transmitter Selecting RCU allows the SIP ASIP RT to be used as a remote control device EXT is a capability of the SIP ASIP that allows the radio to be controlled externally via the system connector The ASIP radio is automatically in EXT when proper interface and software is detected Selecting EXT disables the front panel controls of the RT EXT is used for GRM 122 testing LDE stands for local data entry and represents a future capability of the SIP ASIP RT to communicate with its SIP ASIP VAA regarding data loads and requirements This feature is currently not used If GPS receiver is present EGR installed in ASIP RT pressing this key displays the current GPS se
72. be used at the RXMT site and outstations 5 44 SPECIAL TASK 7 SPECIAL TASK 8 SPECIAL TASK 9 SPECIAL TASK 10 Send an ERF as Part of RXMT Operation This task is required only as a part of RXMT operations In some situations it may be necessary for the RXMT operator to send an ERF to the distant station before retransmission can be started Any operator held responsible for performing Special Task 6 should also be trained in this task Change Net ID When contact with a non loadset not loaded in radio Channel 1 through 6 station is desired the operator needs to be able to change to the net ID of the desired station Use SIP ASIP RT as an RCU This task allows the operator to use a SIP ASIP RT as either a Manpack RCU or remote radio Send Data Via RS 232 Mode This allows the operator to use any one of four enhanced data rates to transmit and receive data messages using RS 232 mode TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5c Transfer COMSEC Keys FH Data Sync Time ANCD to ANCD Special Operator Task 1 DESCRIPTION During preparations for net opening and during periodic updating of COMSEC keys FH data and sync time stored in the ANCD it is necessary to transfer data from one ANCD to another If such transfers are not made by communications specialists or designated NCOs operators must be able to perform this special task DETAILED FLOWCHART Operators perform the actions required in each subtask in the order shown Results ar
73. destroy the antenna connector in the RT Change 1 5 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 PMCS After completing radio assembly operators perform their Before Operation Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS as shown in Chapter 8 Performing PMCS involves checks of controls cables antennas power source self test keypad data loading and ability to communicate By performing PMCS the operator is assured that all components of the radio are working properly or that something needs to be fixed by the operator or unit maintenance The PMCS charts found ii Chester 8 should be followed exactly in the performance of PMCS No operator action will pay greater dividends STATUS Upon completion of Before Operation PMCS actions the operator is ready to load the radio with data and enter the net The first three of the five Primary Operator Tasks provide detailed procedures for doing just that 5 4 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 3 OPERATOR CONTROLS 5 3a SINCGARS Receiver Transmitter RT Controls GENERAL The SINCGARS radio has seven controls plus the RT keypad and display for the operator to use Several of these controls are used infrequently but they are available when required Each control is described below See RT front panel graphic for the location of each ANT SIG AUD FILL ANTENNA RF i SIGNAL DISPLAY COMSEC AUDIO FILL coMsEC cr IP monen en FH FAEM SC Ae 2 sge FREG voL WHSP DATA
74. entry This task involves two basic steps loading the radio with COMSEC keys FH data and sync time by use of the ICOM fill procedure Primary Operator Task 2 and calling the NCS in secure frequency hopping mode to request net entry PERFORM HOT START NET OPENING SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Load RT with COMSEC 1 Perform ICOM Fill RT channels 6 are loaded with FH data sync time Primary Opr Task 2 COMSEQC FH sync time 2 Load sync time manually if N A required by RT version 1 Call NCS using CT FH mode N A NCS responds 2 Request permission to Hot Start net opening is completed enter the net for this operator If the message RT cannot accept time from ANCD appears go to subtasks d below to manually load Julian Date and sync time Once that has been accomplished contact your NCS and enter the net 5 34 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Load Julian Date JD RT 1 Turn ANCD ON select Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO in ANCD Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter TIME in ANCD Julian Day X X V 4 Press TIME on RT keypad RT display shows D D one time 5 Press CLR on RT keypad RT display shows 6 Enter XX JD from ANCD RT display shows X X 7 Press STO on RT keypad New Julian Date is now stored in the radio d Load Sync Time in RT 1 Press down arrow on ANCD ANCD Time running see c 3 above HH
75. forms records reports 1 2 10 lt n 2 14 Antenna JONG 4 32 e ceto Reus pM E 2 14 TOES 2 14 Performance 2 16 Ix cielo e c 2 15 Hold battery HUB requirements odeur ede nter rut rte ege tcs eels 8 26 Main power battery requirements 8 25 Manually load PLGR date and Zulu time into ANCD PLGR 7 5 Nebr Control Staton REO S 6 2 FOSPONSIDINTGS 6 3 TASKS gerieral e ME UNE 6 2 Change 1 Index 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Net managerrmernt e eo me tee db tue bdo veta nO I Eu be 4 46 4 46 Mobile Subscriber Equipment MSE 4 48 Operator proflelehiey ss edet oe 4 48 Pole cms 4 47 4 47 Role of Signal Officers 4 49 Special ASK perfor mane eieren o 4 48 Net opening general emet M 4 13 MC Olde Pm 4 17 Hot Start proced re
76. from a SINCGARS to an EPLRS net to reach a single addressee or broadcast sub net The SIP ASIP VAA controls internet operations through the software addresses and routing tables stored in its memory The internet capability is available only when the SIP ASIP radios are employed with the FBCB2 system The capability available when Packet data mode and the FBCB2 system are used which allows a single SIP ASIP radio to relay a data message to its addressee within the same frequency hopping net After the transmitting station tries unsuccessfully several times to reach the addressee station software in the SIP ASIP VAA causes the intranet relay station to retransmit the message The intranet feature is entirely automatic requiring no action on the part of the intranet relay station operator This represents a future capability and is currently not used Straight line path between two radios that is required for best communications All COMSEC keys FH data and sync time required to load all six RT channels for frequency hopping cipher text mode of communications Feature of hopset that precludes use of selected frequencies also used to expand the number of frequencies contained in a hopset SC frequency and designated channel used for transmission and receipt of ERFs during cold start net openings may also be used for normal SC channel Configuration consisting of RT battery battery box antenna handset and carrying case carried
77. in Progress 1 Keys Transferred Do not press SEND until net members acknowledge readiness to receive the AK OTAR Alternate NCS keeps radio on old TEK and KEK sends AK OTAR to net members who missed original transmission as contact is established If Alternate NCS has a second radio new TEK should be loaded into that radio for monitoring of net traffic after original AK OTAR is sent For ASIP The sent key is automatically placed in the radio Temp Register and applied to the operational channel This allows instant communication on new TEK NCS simply changes channel out then back into operational channel to contact any operator who did not receive the AK The in out step places NCS RT back to original TEK Load new TEK into operational channel because that is where it is stored in net members radios 6 28 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4g Receive and Store TEK Sent by MK Method of OTAR Special NCS Task 5 DESCRIPTION This task is performed by Target NCSs when a Source NCS electronically transmits a TEK using the MK method of OTAR This procedure allows Target NCSs to store the new TEK in their ANCDs for physical distribution to net operators when required The sending 5 directs receiving NCSs to perform this task as an integral part of the MK OTAR process This task supplements Special NCS Task 3 Send TEK to Other NCSs Using MK Method of OTAR RECEIVE AND STORE TEK SENT BY MK METHOD OF OTAR SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULT
78. in preparation for net opening The first three Primary Operator Tasks provide detailed procedures It falls to the NCS to maintain net discipline This responsibility includes controlling access to the net maintaining an informal record of which stations are in the net and ensuring that messages are as brief as possible and use proper language In that it is the NCS radio set to the FH M mode position that automatically keeps all of the net radios within the plus or minus 4 second window required for frequency hopping the NCS must transmit as often as necessary to maintain net sync time A general rule is for the NCS to transmit at least once every 24 hours in a very quiet net and about every half hour in a heavy traffic net TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CUE RESPONSE The NCS or an Alternate NCS is responsible for responding to CUE calls CUE caller is one who needs ERF to get back into the secure FH net or one who has a VRC 12 type radio and must use the SC mode to communicate By not loading the CUE frequency net operators are spared the distraction of CUE messages appearing in their RT displays Also if the enemy is credited with direction finding capability the NCS station that responds to a CUE call using single channel mode should displace immediately after completing the CUE response RXMT OPERATIONS It is the NCS who must anticipate the need for RXMT operations alert the RXMT crew in time for them to make preparations an
79. lamp is not intended for use with naked eye 5 19 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 PURPOSE This key is used in combat emergency situations to delete all data from the ANCD DO NOT use the ZERO key for routine deletion of data Pressing this button returns ANCD display to the main menu provides a quick and easy way to return to the start point of your procedure Will take operator to the RDS main menu if RDS is the default application not your starting point RCV Pressing this button at the proper time during data transfers causes the data to Receive enter the target ANCD Pressing this button at the proper time during data transfers causes data to be sent from the source to the target ANCD This button is used to cause program being used to return to the preceding display ON OFF This is a simple on off control by which the ANCD may be readily activated and deactivated P UP This key is used for scrolling and in some cases is required in lieu of up and down Page Up arrows BAT This key is not used Low battery light comes on automatically when batteries Battery become weak CLR Not used routinely when prompted to do so press this key to acknowledge receipt Clear of message or confirm successful operation DELE This button may be used to delete individual characters when data is being Delete manually entered into the ANCD Also used to delete SOI sets P DN This key is used for scrolling and in some cases is required in lieu of
80. of installation kit Power Amplifier PA AM 7238 A B Power Amplifier Mount PA Mt MT 6353 RF Cable CG 3856 connects RT ANT to PA fo um ML ON OE Antenna Cable CG 3855 connects PA to antenna part of installation kit e Loudspeaker Cable CX 13292 part of installation kit Cable CX 13291 connects RT PA MT to SARM Cable CX 13303 connects RT PA MT to SARM oo P gt Power Cable part of installation kit Figure 2 25 Components of Long Range Radio in Single ASIP Radio Mount SARM 2 42 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 10c Single ASIP Radio Mount SARM Physical Data Table 2 15 Physical Data Single ASIP Radio Mount Radios ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT cm in cm in cm in kg Ibs max max max approx Power Supply Adapter PSA SARM MX 12275 2 High Voltage Center Fed Antenna 286 6 AS 3900A 112 8 n a n a 11 6 Survivable Low Profile Antenna SLPA 209 9 4 AS 3916 82 6 n a n a 5 Handset H 250 n a n a n a Loudspeaker LS LS 671 Power Amplifier PA AM 7238 Series Power Amplifier Mount PA MT 6353 13 6 Receiver Transmitter RT 25 6 RT 1523E F 10 1 Change1 2 43 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 10d Single ASIP Radio Mount SARM Performance Data Table 2 16 Performance Data Single ASIP Radio Mount Radios TYPE COMM RANGE DATA SR RADIO 600 4800 BPS HI
81. of the SINCGARS radio RV This setting may be used in some forms of Over The Air Rekey OTAR Receive Variable transmissions but normal operator procedures do not require its use 2 This position may be used to clear the RT of stored COMSEC keys by setting the Zero Switch to Z for 5 seconds Knob must be pulled out to enter or leave this position When turning the radio off by moving to OFF it is not necessary to use the COMSEC switch Z setting in order to clear COMSEC keys For RT 1523E F Z clears all data Change 1 5 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RT DISPLAY SIGNAL The RT display window located above the keypad provides the operator information regarding signal strength status of the HUB battery and a host of operational messages such as SC frequencies net ID numbers sync time and failure messages This RT display is the primary means by which the radio communicates with its operator Figure 5 9 RT Display RT DISPLAY SIGNALS AND USES PURPOSE 5 10 SIG Signal LOW HUB M Message INFORMATION For the operator Signal strength is shown as a lighted vertical bar at the left side of the RT display window the higher the bar the stronger the signal Activation of this bar advises the operator that traffic is on the net or that an ERF or OTAR message has entered the radio Continuous activation of the signal display bar is an indication of enemy jamming or friendly interference When th
82. ors E C8 ooo TIME CLR o STO C RXMT MODE DIM KEYBOARD VOL VOLUME X AUD DATA RETRANSMIT FUNCTION WHSP WHISPER AUDIO DATA Figure 5 1 SINCGARS RT FRONT PANEL Some control positions found on the RT front panel are enclosed in a box To move the control into or out of these positions the operator must pull out on the control knob These controls are spring loaded and will return to normal position when released 5 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 FCTN FUNCTION This is the primary control with which the operator deter mines what function the radio 50 is to perform FCTN switch has nine LpON OF Fe positions as described below TST REM STBY FCIN Figure 5 2 FCTN Function Switch FUNCTION CONTROL POSITIONS AND USES POSITION PURPOSE OFF All power is shut off all stored data COMSEC FH sync time and manpack battery life indicator are deleted after 5 seconds radio is completely inoperative position is used when radio is not is use for storage and to preserve batteries Z FH Clears all FH data after 5 seconds operator pauses in this position for 5 seconds Zero FH data when setting FCTN switch to OFF STBY Makes radio inoperative but all stored data is retained sync time is lost after 24 Stand By hours setting FCTN to SQ ON returns radio to fully operational status In STBY power is drawn from main source RT
83. preparatlon tasks mire ordner 5 28 Bueno 5 28 Y eden eet a AN 5 28 FRAGIOS manpack eiiis MEE 2 14 Radios vehicular cccccceeeecceceeeseeceeseseececeaeeteceseesecenceeeesaneneeceaaeseatsageceetaneeeetaneaeeesanenaeees 2 19 Receive and store Traffic Encryption Key sent by MK method of task 6 29 Receive COMSEC key FH data into ANCD via STU task 7 13 Receive net update Electronic Remote Fill from Net Control Station task 5 53 Receive SOI information into ANCD via Secure Telephone Unit STU task 7 16 Receiver 1 E 2 4 Receier Trarismiller RT idi aee ederent 2 2 ASAD AIMS E E 2 2 Model api er ree pines teg het bae e ESAN dafs 2 4 Operator f ed cen 5 4 ee eee een 2 13 1 Index 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBJECT PAGE Reloading sync time method of late net 4 20 Remote Control Unit RGU ET 2 35 1 2 35 Hold up battery requiremen
84. press SEND WAIT TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Send AK OTAR 1 Say Standby for Target operators are alerted CT acknowledge contact is confirmed 2 Press SEND on ANCD Transfer in progress 1 Keys Transferred d Load TEK sent by AK Enter LD OTAR in NCS radio Enter Select key qUit name number 3 Press PgDN to display Select key qUit and ENTR to select name number X Connect ANCD to RT Press LOAD on RT AUD FILL press WV Press LOAD STO 1 Keys Transferred 1 2 4 Enter QUIT Connect ANCD to RT V 5 6 and X Vg F ES Ak Mk vU 6 27 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS e Update KEK used for AK 1 Set FCTN to LD and Select key qUit OTAR enter VU name number 2 Press PgDN to KEK Connect to RT and press RCV desired then press ENTR 3 Press RCV on ANCD Transfer in Progress Enter Text ID 4 Enter TEXT ID and Key updated successfully press ENTR b Press down arrow Select key qUit name number 6 Press ABORT until screen Vg Ld Rv shown appears Ak Mk vU 7 Enter LD select Tek Kek 8 Enter Select key quit name number 9 Press PgDN to display and Select key quit ENTR to select KEK X XMT Enter QUIT Connect ANCD to RT V 10 11 Press down arrow Press LOAD on RT 12 12 Press LOAD STO 6 Transfer
85. required if battery is new Set FCTN to LD press BATT note 00 in display press CLR enter battery life indicator number and press STO Battery life indicator of used battery has now been entered into the RT During radio operation you can determine an estimated status of main battery power by following these steps With FCTN at SQ ON press BATT and read battery life indicator Areading of 11 or higher may mean that your main battery is nearing exhaustion This reading is at best a estimate based on usage computations by the RT This statement does not apply to the ASIP RT During combat and operational missions you may want to replace the main battery when the battery life indicator reads 11 or higher for RT 1523 A B C D See Figure 5 25 or 1 8 for RT 1523E F or you may wait until your battery is exhausted before changing it One indicator of a weak manpack radio battery is a signal strength display reading of 3 or less when you PTT with RF PWR set to For training continue to use your main power battery until it is exhausted This is to save batteries and money Upon completing a mission when the main battery is to be removed note and record battery life on the side of the battery The Battery Life Indicator must be read before FCTN is set to OFF or battery life data will be lost TM 11 5820 890 10 8 HUB ROLE In combat or training remember that with a good HUB battery installed your RT wi
86. that a control will not do what it is intended to do for example turning the FCTN knob does not change the radio s function It may be necessary to wait until Item 7 Communications Checks to determine for sure that some controls do or do not function properly Damaged and cannot be used means that after visual inspection or operational check you determine that a piece of equipment for whatever reason is faulty and will not support your mission requirements or presents a safety hazard Use of the ICOM fill procedure is appropriate here but only COMSEC keys are loaded into the RCU Skip steps c and d if unit SOP or tactical situation prohibits transmitting Unless your mission is likely to require use of data mode you do not need to perform this check 8 16 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2b PMCS for Control Control Monitor C M PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SINCGARS CONTROL MONITOR Control Monitor C M C 11291 VRC Series Item to Check Service CONTROLS RADIO FCTN INIT DIM CABLES C M Cable CX 13290 SELF TEST Before CONTROL OF RT FUNCTIONS The Control Monitor is not essential to the operation of the SINCGARS radio with which it is used Problems found with the Control Monitor during PMCS are corrected or reported to Unit Maintenance but they do not result in Not Fully Mission Capable determinations Operator Equipment Not Procedure Ready Available If Check for cracke
87. the location of the position of the last SA transmission and copy it for pasting into a waypoint TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 6 RT Control CDU Task 1 DESCRIPTION This task allows the operator to set the following ASIP RT functions channel RF power SC FH and PT CT DETAILED PROCEDURE 1 Set the RT switch to REM gt 2 Observe CDU display 3 Using UP A and DOWN keys select the RT control field The selected field is boxed NOTE If necessary use ESC key as needed to return to main display 4 Press ENT to enter RT control 5 Use UP A DOWN V keys select the RT control function Channel CH RF Power PWR Single Channel or Frequency Hopping SC FH FH M Cipher Text or Plain Text CT or PT 6 As each function is selected the selection is highlighted boxed Press the ENT key to select it for editing It will now be displayed in reverse video 7 Change the setting by using the any arrow key to scroll through the available settings Press ENT to store At any point use the ESC key to return to the previous condition NOTE You cannot change to an Enhanced Operating Mode EOM using the CDU Instead set the RT FCTN switch to SQ ON set RT Mode using Preparation Task 1 in Chapter 5 then set RT FCTN switch back to REM Change 1 7 25 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 64 Local Position Display and Copy CDU Task 2 DESCRIPTION This task is used to s
88. the net as quickly as possible There are three procedures by which sync time can be reloaded 1 Repeat ICOM fill that includes sync time Procedure is the same as that described i and Primary Operator Task 2 Load COMSEC FH Data Sync Time into RT Using ICOM Fill 2 Use EGR or connect a PLGR to the RT and transfer GPS time See PLGR Task 3 Load PLGR Date and GPS Zulu Time in SINCGARS RT or EGR Task 1 Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time from EGR for detailed procedure 3 Determine correct GPS time from PLGR EGR ANCD or SKL Clear and load new Julian Date clear and load new hours and minutes Press STO at the time seconds is the same in the source device and the RT Newly loaded sync time should be within one second of source time otherwise try again See Figure 4 11 below or Subtasks c and d of Primary Operator Task 3 Perform Hot Start Net Opening for detailed procedures Obtain running GPS time from ANCD EGR SKL or PLGR Press TIME on RT display shows DD Press CLR on RT display shows __ Enter correct Julian Date display shows XX Press STO on RT Julian Date is stored Press TIME on RT display shows HH MM Press CLR RT display shows _ _ Enter GPS HH display shows HH Enter MM the minute ahead of GPS time When RT and GPS minutes are the same zero seconds press STO on RT If time stored in RT is more than one second different from GPS time reloa
89. the use of Alternate NCSs is essential if the NCS is to meet all primary net responsibilities 4 47 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 12d Special Task Performance 4 12e Operator Proficiency 4 12f MSE Compatibility 4 48 OPERATOR NCS amp ALT NCS PRIMARY TASKS POCKET GUIDE OPTIONS COMM EX DESIGN CO LOCATION There are 11 Special Operator Tasks described in detail in Most net operators do not need to be able to perform these tasks Some operators will be required to perform only certain special tasks for example retransmission operations Those operators who do need to perform one or more special tasks must be given extra training on an as required mission basis There are five Special NCS Tasks described in detail in Chapter 6 These tasks involve the electronic transfer of COMSEC keys FH data and SOI information from NCS to NCS and from NCS to net operators Whether or not all NCS and Alternate NCS personnel need to be able to perform any or all of these special tasks is a matter of command policy based upon mission requirements If an NCS or Alternate is expected to perform any of these tasks special training must be provided There are five primary tasks that all unit SINCGARS operators must be able to perform without assistance during unit mission operations They are described in detail in Chapter 5 Each operator is provided a copy of TM 11 5820 890 10 6 SINCGARS Ground Operator s Pocket Guide
90. to load any SC frequencies at least until a specific need arises 5 31 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 4e Load COMSEC FH Data Sync Time into RT using ICOM Fill Primary Operator Task 2 DESCRIPTION This task is required in preparation for a Hot Start net opening and without sync time for COMSEC FH data updates This task may also be performed in preparation for a Cold Start net opening by omitting sync time Performance of this task involves the use of an ANCD as a source of COMSEC keys FH data hopset TSK and net ID and sync time By use of the ICOM fill procedure COMSEC FH data and sync time are simultaneously loaded into all six channels of the SINCGARS radio Upon completion of the ICOM fill the radio is fully prepared for secure frequency hopping communications LOAD COMSEC FH DATA SYNC TIME INTO RT USING ICOM FILL SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare RT to receive an 1 Set COMSEC to CT Press PTT twice to clear COMSEC ICOM fill alarm 3 Set CHAN to MAN 4 Set MODE to FH Display shows FILL O 5 Set DATA to OFF Display shows OFF 5 32 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULTS b Prepare ANCD to perform 1 Turn ANCD ON ICOM fill i Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter SEND send to Radio Ancd Stu Pc 4 Enter RADIO select Nonicom Abn HRcu Haveq b Enter ICOM Connect to RT AUD FILL Connector 5 6 Connect A
91. up and down Page Down arrows SPACE This key is used to enter a space and may be used to erase characters during data entry LOCK LTR When this key is activated the word LETTER appears near the bottom left of the Lock Letter display and letters may be entered To use numbers and bottom level items press LOCK LTR again word LETTER disappears from the ANCD display Use this key to select item enter data and to continue to the next step in an operator procedure 5 20 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 3e Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Controls KEYPAD The PLGR keypad provides 12 buttons through which the operator exercises control This paragraph will discuss only those keys which the SINCGARS operator may use to check and load radio sync time and to load PLGR keys from an ANCD or SKL For navigational functions see PLGR manuals Figure 5 17 PLGR KEYPAD PLGR KEYPAD BUTTONS AND USES BUTTON PURPOSE 0 thru 9 These keys are used to enter numbers ON BRT Pressing the button once turns the PLGR on holding this key down with On Bright PLGR on enables the operator to adjust the display backlighting using up down arrows UP ARROW These keys are used to change display pages change number alpha field values DOWN ARROW activate functions and adjust brightness LEFT ARROW These keys are used to move the cursor from field to field in the display RIGHT ARROW Pressing the MENU key once displays fi
92. want to use the EXT feature use the RCU key to turn EXT mode off The ASIP RT is always in an EXT mode as long as it detects proper interface and software EXT will not be displayed Fail 5 If a FAIL 5 message is displayed during power up and BIT it means one of three things 1 You have an ANCD SKL or other fill device connected to the RT Disconnecting the fill device will correct the FAIL 5 situation 2 You have mistakenly set the COMSEC switch to Z Moving the COMSEC switch to another position will correct the FAIL 5 situation 3 The RT tamper switch has been activated or there is a hard COMSEC failure Unit level maintenance is required Fail 6 This message applies to INC and FHMUX failures Fail EGR This message applies to an EGR failure When GPS time has been successfully loaded into the SIP ASIP radio the letter G will be displayed When a radio loaded with GPS time is returned to SQ ON from STBY a blinking G indicates that GPS time needs to be reloaded Disappearance of the G indicates that the radio is no longer using GPS time GOPT Indicates that the SIP ASIP radio has experienced a COMSEC failure operator must change to PT in order to continue to communicate GOTST When this message appears it indicates a COMSEC problem The radio will not transmit receive or fill until BIT has been successfully run If the RT cannot run BIT successfully Unit level maintenance is required NOGPS Thi
93. your VIC system being inoperative constitutes a Not Mission Ready status will vary with combat vehicle type 8 19 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2d Loudspeaker LS 671 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR LOUDSPEAKER LS 671 Item to Check Service CONTROLS POWER SWITCH VOLUME CONTROL CABLE LS 671 Cable CX 13292 Before POWER CB1 VAA LS 671 Power Switch LS 671 Power Indicator Lamp 4 Before LS 671 CONTROL OF RT RT OFF ON Loudspeaker Volume Handset Volume 5 After POWER LS 671 Power Switch LS 671 Power Indicator Lamp The Loudspeaker LS 671 is not essential to the operation of the SINCGARS radio with which it is used Problems found with the LS 671 during PMCS are corrected or reported to Unit Maintenance but they do not result in Not Fully Mission Capable determinations 8 20 Change 1 Operator Procedure Equipment Not Ready Available If Check for cracked or broken controls Check for loose controls Check for frozen controls Check for missing controls Check for presence Check for proper installation of cable Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cable Turn LS 671 Power Switch to ON Turn VAA CB1 to ON Check that VAA 051 lights Check that LS 671 Power Indicator Lamp lights Check ability to turn RT OFF ON from LS 671 Check control of LS 671 volume Check control of handset volume when connected to LS 671 Turn LS 671 Power Swi
94. 0 340 12 for detailed operating instructions HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROL RADIO DEVICE HRCRD C 12493 U HRCRD Capabilities rc eee ete retento B HRGRD Operation eet eee ter kdo ga re eon ba ane E ERR aE un CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT CDU CDU GapabllitiGs 1 rede o xe fades ates EP HER eee Ee x Pascua b Operation Ee teo ena DIDI DM DEDE SIMPLE KEY LOADER See TM 11 5810 410 13 amp P for detailed operating instructions Global Positioning System Change 1 3 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 1 AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 3 1a ANCD Capabilities FUNCTIONS Capable of receiving storing and transferring data from ANCD to ANCD from ANCD to SINCGARS radios and from ANCD to other compatible communications electronic equipment PRIMARY USE The ANCD is used primarily for handling of COMSEC keys FH data sync time and signal operating instructions SOI information REPLACEMENT For SINCGARS applications the ANCD replaces COMSEC devices such as 13 KYX 15 and 18 as well as electronic counter counter measure fill MX 18290 DATA LOADS A typical ANCD data load at the operator level consists of two loadsets COMSEC keys and FH data for all six radio channels each good for 30 days of operation plus 60 days of SOI information structured in five ten day editions containing two 5 day sets each CAPACITIES When used for a single or special purpose an
95. 0 VRC INDICATO R IGHT L BIN BINDING POST LANDLINES 1 Audio Frequency Amplifier AM 1780 2 Commander and Crewmember Control Box C 2298 3 Driver Control Box C 2297 Figure 3 6 Components of AN VIC 1 Intercommunication Set 3 5b VIC Capabilities AM 1780 The audio frequency amplifier is the main junction box for the VIC 1 System It provides control of DC power to associated control boxes and to the radio system connected to the AM 1780 amplifier It also amplifies and controls audio signals in the intercom and radio circuits C 2298 C 2297 When a combat vehicle crew CVC helmet cord is connected to a control box the crewmember can select by means of the MONITOR switch and CVC controls to communicate on the intercom or on a radio 3 10 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 5c VIC Physical Data NOTE Measurements are in centimeters numbers in parentheses show equivalent inches All measurements are maximums MEASUREMENTS Height is 9 6 CM 3 8 IN AM 1780 Depth is 14 6 CM 5 8 IN Width is 24 6 CM 9 7 IN MEASUREMENTS Height is 11 4 CM 4 5 IN C 2297 C 2298 Depth is 14 6 CM 5 8 IN Width is 8 9 CM 3 3 IN 3 11 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 6 HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROL RADIO DEVICE HRCRD 3 6a HRCRD Capabilities The Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD is used with manpack radios AN PRC 119A D F and the dismount kits of vehicular radio configurations AN VRC 88A D F and AN VRC 91A D
96. 0 different frequencies in the range of 30 000 to 87 975 MHz with a 25 KHz separation between frequencies CHANNELS Eight single channel frequencies can be loaded into a SINCGARS RT one in each numbered channel 1 6 plus one each in the CUE and MAN channels LOADING SC frequencies are loaded via the RT keypad Although a matter of command policy operators are normally required to load only those SC frequencies they are expected to need during mission operations To load SC frequencies use the procedure shown ih Figure 42 below Also see Primary Operator Task 1 Load Single Channel Frequencies into SINCGARS RT Set FCTN switch to LD MODE to SC Select CHAN 1 6 CUE or MAN Press FREQ then CLR Enter 5 digit frequency Press STO Repeat for each channel to be loaded Figure 4 2 HOW TO LOAD SC FREQUENCIES 4 4 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 2b Limitations of SC Communications LOCATING JAMMING 4 2c Required Usage COLD START CUE PROCESS When using the SC mode of communication it is important to remember that an enemy with direction finding capability can pin point your location It may be necessary for you to move frequently or limit transmission times to avoid enemy action The SC mode uses only one frequency to send or receive messages the enemy may be able to jam your communications fairly easily To employ the Cold Start net opening procedure it is necessary to use the MAN channel for sending
97. 0044 4 0 0 2 1000 00 enne nennen iaaa Special Operator Tasks SIP ASIP sss Other Operator entrent NET CONTROL STATION NCS TASKS GON GMA sa NGS RESPONSIDININGS e Primary NGS Tasks c Special NES TASKS siiin esiisa eiaa aate aaia SINCGARS ASSOCIATED TASKS General Mic ds iaa a aE Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Secure Telephone Unit STU T38KB Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX Tasks Embedded GPS Receiver EGR Tasks Control Display Unit CDU sa stos 8 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE SINCGARS Radio Maintenance esses Associated Equipment Battery 5 tns APPENDIXES A References Components of End Item and Basic Issue Items Lists Additional Authorization List 1 D Reference Data LIST OF FIGURES Figure Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 Series 2 2 1522 E 2 3 RT 1523A Features ie YR dne pud 2 4 HT 1523B Features ertet teet
98. 01 420 6618 EIC GD9 AN VRC 90F NSN 5820 01 451 8246 EIC GA2 AN VRC 90F NSN 5820 01 451 8246 EIC GA2 AN VRC 90G NSN 5820 01 555 7371 EIC N A AN VRC 91A NSN 5820 01 267 9478 EIC L26 AN VRC 91D NSN 5820 01 420 6621 EIC GDG AN VRC 91F NSN 5820 01 451 8249 EIC GA8 AN VRC 92A NSN 5820 01 267 9477 EIC L27 AN VRC 92D NSN 5820 01 421 2605 EIC GDH AN VRC 92F NSN 5820 01 451 8250 EIC GM2 USED WITH AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 SIMPLE KEY LOADER SKL 10 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR AN PSN 11 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TD 1456 VRC REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms located in the back of this manual directly to Commander U S Army Communications Electronics Life Cycle Management Command LCMC and Fort Monmouth ATTN AMSEL LC LEO E ED Fort Monmouth NJ 07703 5006 You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is 732 532 3421 DSN 992 3421 Our e mail address is MONM AMSELLEOPUBSCHG conus army mil Our online web address for submitting DA Form 2028 is http edm monmouth army mil pubs 2028 html A reply will be furnished to you Change
99. 1 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 535 3667 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 5820 01 267 9481 5820 01 352 1694 5820 01 452 8735 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5985 01 235 9189 6160 01 284 4200 6160 01 304 2034 6160 01 424 8514 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 5965 00 043 3463 5895 01 432 8370 5820 01 322 3477 5895 01 461 4505 B 6 Change 1 3 Description and Part Number RADIO SETS AN VRC 87A D F continued Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 ICOM RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 or A3137500 ICOM RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 2 or A3018860 4 ICOM RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 SIP RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 SIP RT 1523E C U 80063 A3266100 1 ASIP RT 1523F C U 80063 A3307000 1 ASIP Lever Locking Locking Bar 80063 A3256492 ICOM SIP 80063 A3256669 3 ASIP SHORT RANGE DISMOUNT VEHICULAR RADIO SET RADIO SET AN VRC 88A ICOM RADIO SET AN VRC 88D SIP RADIO SET AN VRC 88F ASIP Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 ICOM AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 ICOM AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 or A3148136 2 ICOM AM 7239C V RC 80063 A3245066 1 SIP AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 SIP AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3256600 1 ASIP Antenna Manpack AS
100. 1523B C D E F standby time has been increased to 200 hours TST This position causes RT to perform self test of RT data and ECCM circuits test Test results are shown in RT display Running RT self test is a routine step in start up procedure LD The load position is required for loading SC frequencies FH data and COMSEC Load keys required also to receive an ERF SQ ON This is the normal operating position of the radio for FH mode For SC mode this Squelch On position reduces noise SQ OFF This position is not used for the FH mode In the SC mode SQ OFF helps to bring Squelch Off in distant stations to work through jamming and to be compatible with radios lacking squelch capability REM The REM position disables front panel controls and is required for use of the Remote Control Monitor and Remote Control Unit RCU RXMT Use of the RXMT position enables the RT to automatically retransmit traffic from Retransmit one radio through another Both RTs are set to RXMT position and connected by an RXMT cable 5 6 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 MODE SWITCH The MODE switch contains three positions for selecting SC or FH mode of operation It also r MODEA provides an FH M position that controls net sync SC FH time and is for use by NCS personnel only Figure 5 3 MODE Switch MODE SWITCH POSITIONS AND USES POSITION PURPOSE SC Selection of the SC position places the radio in the single channel mode of
101. 20 6619 EIC GD8 AN VRC 89F NSN 5820 01 451 8247 EIC GAY AN VRC 90A NSN 5820 01 268 5105 EIC L25 AN VRC 90D NSN 5820 01 420 6618 EIC GD9 AN VRC 90F NSN 5820 01 451 8246 EIC GA2 AN VRC 90G NSN 5820 01 555 7371 EIC N A AN VRC 91A NSN 5820 01 267 9478 EIC 126 AN VRC 91D NSN 5820 01 420 6621 EIC GDG AN VRC 91F NSN 5820 01 451 8249 EIC GA8 AN VRC 92A NSN 5820 01 267 9477 EIC 127 AN VRC 92D NSN 5820 01 421 2605 EIC GDH AN VRC 92F NSN 5820 01 451 8250 EIC GM2 USED WITH AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 SIMPLE KEY LOADER SKL AN PYQ 10 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR AN PSN 11 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TD 1456 VRC TM 11 5820 890 10 8 dated 1 December 1998 is changed as follows 1 Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page Added or revised illustrations and tables are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the caption Remove Pages Insert Pages ia hroug i through through 1 4 a through d i through iv 1 1 through 1 4 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 1 through 2 24 2 27 through 2 32 2 39 and 2 40 3 1 through 3 8 3 11 through 3 14 4 1 and 4 2 4 5 through 4 12 4 15 through 4 34 4 37 through 4 40 None 4 41 and 4 42 5 1 through 5 6 5 9 and 5 10 5 13 and 5 14 None 5 15 through 5 18 5 21 through 5 2
102. 200N 2400N BPS HI 5KM to 10KM 4800N BPS PCKT HI 5KM to 10KM 9600N BPS HI 5KM to 10KM EDM LR Radio 1200N 2400N BPS POWER AMPLIFIER PA 20KM to 35KM 4800N BPS PCKT POWER AMPLIFIER PA 15KM to 25KM 9600N BPS POWER AMPLIFIER PA 10KM to 25KM Ranges shown are for planning purposes only They are based upon line of sight and are average for normal conditions Ranges depend upon location sighting weather and surrounding noise level among other factors Use of the OE 254 antenna will increase ranges for both voice and data transmissions Enemy jamming and mutual interference conditions will degrade ranges In data transmissions use of lower baud rate increases the range EDM Data rates are available on SIP ASIP radios only Change 1 2 31 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 6 SINGLE RADIO MOUNT SRM RADIO 2 6a Components of Short Range SR Radio in Single Radio Mount AN VRC 87C LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO SINGLE RADIO MOUNT CONNECTOR J3 Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 A B Mounting Base Electrical Equipment MT 6576 SRM part of installation kit Power Supply Adapter PSA MX 10862 Vehicular Antenna 5 3900 3916 part of installation kit Handset H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Battery Tray CY 8664 selected configurations only part of installation kit
103. 3499 5995 01 521 2941 Cable DAGR to RA 2 13499 5 Meters P N 987 4640 001 10 Meters P N 987 5016 001 P N 013 1981 020 10 Meters P N 987 5015 001 Loudspeaker 5965 01 222 1420 LS 671 VRC 80058 Used on radio set 5965 01 295 1125 LS 685 U 80058 Used on RCU only Change1 C 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST Continued 1 2 National Stock Description Number CAGEC and Part Number Net Control Device 5895 01 026 9619 KYX 15 98230 0 190303 5810 01 095 1312 KYX 15A 98230 0N274276 5810 01 026 9620 Reader Tape General Purpose KOI 18 TSEC 98230 0N190315 5340 01 461 4741 Strap Assembly Hand 80063 A3274735 1 4 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 APPENDIX D REFERENCE DATA Nomenclature Cross Reference List Abbreviations and Glossary NOMENCLATURE CROSS REFERENCE LIST COMMON NAME Battery HUB Battery main power Battery box Battery tray Cable set FHMUX CDU Control monitor Dismount radio FHMUX Field pack Fill device Handset HRCRD Loudspeaker Manpack antenna Manpack radio Mounting base Mounting base FHMUX Power amplifier Power amplifier mount Radio Remote control unit Single radio mount SLPA Vehicular amplifier adapter Vehicular antenna Vehicular radio VIC system Wire line adapter OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE Battery Non rechargeable BA 5372 U Battery BA 5590 U Lithium Battery Box CY 8523 A B C PRC Tray Bat
104. 3683 PRC 80063 A3147901 2 Battery Box CY 8523A PRC 80063 A3148167 1 CY 8523B PRC 80063 A3132600 Required for MP SIP RT as RCU CY 8523C PRC 80063 A3249648 1 Required for MP RT using HRCRD Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 RT to VAA 80063 A3013735 8 ICOM 80063 A3255571 SIP ASIP Handset HRCRD H 250 U 80058 C 12493 U 80063 A3249865 1 HRCRD MP requires use of Battery Box CY 8523C PRC Carrying Case Radio 80063 A3142076 1 ICOM SIP 80063 A3142076 2 ASIP TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF THE END ITEM Continued 2 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 535 3667 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 5820 01 267 9479 5820 01 420 6619 5820 01 451 8247 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 5995 01 304 2026 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 535 3667 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 3 Description and Part Number RADIO SET AN VRC 88A D F continued Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 ICOM RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 or A3137500 ICOM RT 1523B C U 80063
105. 4 14 7 25 3 27 1 10 0 10 7 A d 25 8 27 1 8 7 6 2 10 0 10 7 3 4 13 7 2 33 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 6c Performance Data for Single Radio Mount SRM Radio Table 2 11 Performance Data Single Radio Mount Radios VOICE LOW LO 200 to 400 M VOICE MEDIUM M 400 M to 5 KM DATA 600 4800 BPS HIGH HI 16000 BPS Ranges shown are for planning purposes only They are based upon line of sight and are average for normal conditions Ranges depend upon location sighting weather and surrounding noise level among other factors Use of the OE 254 antenna will increase ranges for both voice and data transmissions Enemy jamming and mutual interference conditions will degrade ranges In data transmissions use of lower baud rate increases the range 2 34 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 7 CONTROL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RCU C 11561 C U 2 7a RCU Components MODE SWITCH DISPLAY RF PWR SWITCH SYSTEMS CONNECTOR SPKR SWITCH SPKR CONNECTOR 42 SWITCH DIM CONTROL AUD FILL CONNECTOR J3 KEYBOARD COMSEC AUD DATA SWITCH ONTRGL CONNECTOR 44 LS 685 U NOTE LOUDSPEAKER CRYSTAL Handset Battery Box and LS 685 Loudspeaker are issued with the RCU Control Receiver Transmitter RCU C 11561 C U Battery Box CY 8523A B Handset H 250 Loudspeaker LS 685 This is the only loudspeaker that can be used with the RCU speaker connector Figure 2 21 Components of Control R
106. 4 5 27 and 5 28 None 5 29 and 5 30 5 53 and 5 54 5 57 and 5 58 5 63 through 5 66 5 69 and 5 70 6 15 through 6 18 6 23 and 6 24 7 1 and 7 2 7 17 and 7 18 8 1 and 8 2 8 13 and 8 14 8 19 through 8 24 None 8 25 and 8 26 A 1 through A 4 B 1 through B 12 C 1 and C 2 E 1 through E 9 E 10 blank Index 1 through Index 8 Front Cover Front Cover 2 46 blank 3 16 blank 2 File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes Approved For Public Release Distribution Is Unlimited By Order of the Secretary of the Army GEORGE W CASEY JR General United States Army Official Chief of Staff JOYCE E MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 0733701 DISTRIBUTION To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number IDN 369784 requirements for TM 11 5820 890 10 8 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES NOTE The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a vertical line in the outer margins of the page Changes to illustrations are indicated by miniature pointing hands or a vertical bar at the end of the title Dates of issue for original and changed pages are Original 01 December 1998 Change 1 01 December 2007 TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR THIS MANUAL IS 348 PAGES CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING Page Page Page No No No Cover blank Chapter 6 athru d 6
107. 5b Summary of Special Operator Tasks SPECIAL TASK 1 SPECIAL TASK 2 SPECIAL TASK 3 SPECIAL TASK 4 SPECIAL TASK 5 SPECIAL TASK 6 Transfer COMSEC FH Data Sync Time ANCD to ANCD This task is used when individual operators are required to load their own ANCD with COMSEC keys FH data and sync time from one being passed around the unit Many unit SOPs call for communications specialists or designated NCOs to perform this task for operators This task is performed prior to net openings and during periodic ANCD data updates Transfer QREF SOI Information ANCD to ANCD This task is similar to Special Task 1 but differs in the procedure followed It is performed prior to net openings and during periodic ANCD data updates Unit SOP determines whether operators communications specialists or designated NCOs are responsible for the function Perform Cold Start Net Opening If an NCS finds it necessary to use the Cold Start method of net opening it is essential that operators be trained in this task This task is special in that it is unlikely the Cold Start net opening procedure will be used frequently Receive Net Update ERF from NCS This task is performed when an NCS needs to update some element of FH data including sync time using electronic transfer means The normal method of FH data updating is by physical connection of one ANCD to another ERF update provides a back up procedure for those occasions when elect
108. 80058 Battery Non rechargeable Lithium MNO2 BA 5390 U 80058 manpack primary power w o SOC indicator Battery Non rechargeable Lithium MNO2 BA 5390A U 80058 manpack primary power w SOC indicator Battery Rechargeable Lithium Ion BB 2590 U 80063 80058 manpack primary power for RT 1523 RT 1523B RT 1523C RT 1523E Note This battery cannot be used for RT 1523A or RT 1523D Battery Rechargeable Ni Metal Hydride BB 390B U 80058 manpack primary power Charger Battery PP 8498 U 80058 Multi station Soldier Portable Charger SPC Charger Battery PP 8481B U 80058 Vehicle Mounted Charger VMC Case Battery Assembly A3272554 2 0GVJ8 HUB Insert Cable Assembly Special Purpose CX 13292 VRC 80058 508 VAA to LS 671 CX 13292 VRC 80058 1008 VAA to LS 671 CX 13298 VRC 80058 A3014033 1 5 in CX 13298 VRC 80058 A3014033 2 15ft CX 13308 VRC 80058 AN PSG 2 2A 5 Adapter Cable CX 13310 VRC 80058 HYX 57 Adapter Cable CX 13312 VRC 80058 AN PSC 3 Adapter Cable CX 13402 VRC 80058 TACFIRE Magic Cable CX 13404 VRC 80058 KY 90 Adapter Cable 13417 80058 Splitter Cable CX 13465 VRC 80058 Digital Adapter Cable CX 13467 V RC 80058 ANCD Fill Cable 18 in CX 13490 VRC A3210567 8 ft FA Extender Cable CX 13532 VRC 80058 A3257894 1 6 ft RS 232 Cable SIP ASIP RT to PC A3014073 2 80063 MST 20 Adapter Cable A3272739 1 80063 GPS Fill Cable W20
109. 95 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 5975 01 235 1962 5995 01 222 4209 5995 01 219 7025 5995 01 304 2026 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 5995 01 300 9324 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 535 3667 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 5875 00 111 3208 Change 1 3 Description CAGEC and Part Number LONG LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO SET RADIO SET AN VRC 92A ICOM RADIO SET AN VRC 92D SIP RADIO SET AN VRC 92F ASIP Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 ICOM AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 ICOM AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 or A3148136 2 ICOM AM 7239C V RC 80063 A3245066 1 SIP AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 SIP AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3256600 1 ASIP Amplifier Radio Frequency RFPA AM 7238 VRC 80063 A3013357 1 or A3191000 1 AM 7238A VRC 80063 132135 1 or A3251212 AM 7238B VRC 80063 A3210919 1 or A3256646 1 Mounting Base Electrical Equipment MT 6353 VRC 80063 A3014053 1 Cable Assembly Special Purpose VAA to MT 6353 CX 13291 VRC 80063 A3014037 1 Cable Assembly RF RTB to Aux RFPA CG 3856 VRC 80063 A3014032 3 Cable Assembly Radio Frequency W2 RTA to RFPA 80063 A3013824 3 Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 RTA RTB to VAA 80063 A3013735 8 ICOM 80063 A3255571 SIP ASIP Cable Assembly Power
110. A OFST or CMSC keys this button Change causes the display to scroll through available data or options LOUT This key is used only by NCS personnel and is rarely needed with current Lock Out operating procedures Operators may ignore this key TIME Press TIME once to see the Julian Date press it a second time to see sync time hours and minutes press a third time to see sync time in running minutes and seconds Used in conjunction with the CLR and STO keys the TIME button allows entry of sync time via the RT keypad CLR Used in conjunction with other keys the CLR button enables the operator to Clear delete entries or stored data LOAD Used to load data into holding memory and to retrieve data from permanent memory Also used to load radio STO Press the STO key to place data into permanent memory of the RT Use of the Store STO key is the last step in various operator procedures 5 12 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 KEYPAD BUTTON PURPOSE BATT Used to check and set battery life condition in the manpack radio When this key is pressed the RT display shows battery life indication Battery on same key as CALL CALL This key is used to communicate between the radio and an attached RCU With on same key as set to REM and RT connected to the RCU pressing CALL and PTT at the same time causes the RCU display to show CALL and an alarm is heard in the RT and RCU handsets 5 3b Technical
111. AA 80063 A3013735 8 ICOM 80063 A3255571 SIP ASIP Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523 C U 80063 A3018860 1 RT 1523A C U 80063 A3131300 or A3137500 ICOM RT 1523B C U 80063 A3018860 2 or A3018860 4 ICOM RT 1523C C U 80063 A3249545 1 SIP RT 1523D C U 80063 A3137700 SIP RT 1523E C U 80063 A3266100 1 ASIP RT 1523F C U 80063 A3307000 1 ASIP Lever Locking Locking Bar 80063 A3256492 ICOM SIP 80063 A3256669 3 ASIP LONG SHORT RANGE DISMOUNT VEHICULAR RADIO SE RADIO SET AN VRC 91A ICOM RADIO SET AN VRC 91D SIP RADIO SET AN VRC 91F ASIP Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 ICOM AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 ICOM AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 or A3148136 2 ICOM AM 7239C VRC 80063 A3245066 1 SIP AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 SIP AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3256600 1 ASIP TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF THE END ITEM Continued 2 2 National Stock Number 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 5995 01 304 2026 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 5985 01 235 9189 6160 01 284 4200 6160 01 304 2034 6160 01 424 8514 5965 00 043 3463 5895 01 432 8370 5820 01 322 3477 5895 01 461 4505 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 535 3667 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 3 Description CAGEC and Part
112. ANCD VIA STU SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Coordinate SOI transfer 1 Contact receiver oy Sru 2 Coordinate STU Proper STU keys 2400 BPS transfer preparations PT CT voice checked b Prepare ANCD for STU 1 Turn ANCD ON select transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive Enter SEND Scroll MV amp press ENTR to select Set 7 14 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS C Select SOI data to send 1 Scroll to identify set Set name number Edn name time period 2 Press ENTR to select set Do you want transfer QREF Y N Enter YES or NO Do you want to specify groups to send Y N kkkk 3 4 Enter YES or NO Do you want to specify a time pd to send Y N 5 Enter YES or NO Include Suffix amp Smoke Pyro data Y N 6 Enter YES or NO send to Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 7 Enter STU Connect to STU and press SEND WAIT 1 Ensure receiving Both STUs must be placed in secure data STU transfer station is ready for you mode to send d Send SOI information by Press SEND Processing Please wait shows 96 of bytes sent Sending of SOI data is completed V Set is selected only as an example Either full or selected data can be sent by STU transfer but they must be sent one at a time Any SOI item may be selected for STU transfer
113. ANCD can store as many as 20 loadsets COMSEC and FH data and two or more division wide editions 10 days each The number of smaller unit SOI editions that can be stored in an ANCD depends entirely on the size of the SOI extract An ANCD will also store as many as 120 COMSEC keys traffic encryption key TEK or key encryption key KEK or 280 transmission security keys TSKs BLACK AND WHITE VIDEO DISPLAY TWO LINES BY 24 CHARACTERS gt 35 KEYS FRONT VIEW gt FULL KEYPAD REMOVABLE CRYPTO IGNITION KEY CIK REAR VIEW gt cover open 6 PIN FILL PORT Figure 3 1 Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 3 2 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 TRADE OFFS When an ANCD is used for special data storage purposes trade offs between the above COMSEC FH data and SOI capacities allow the ANCD storage capability to be tailored to specific unit requirements MEMO The ANCD has the ability to receive store and transfer up to four short memos each six lines in length with 22 characters per line OTAR Over The Air Rekey OTAR operations both Automatic Keying AK and Manual Keying MK Keying methods are fully supported by the ANCD BROADCAST The method of transmitting SOI information from one location to another electronically known as broadcast is also fully supported by the ANCD SECURE PHONE COMSEC keys FH data SOI information can be sent from one location t
114. AR procedure are that the TEK in the operational channel of receiving stations is replaced electronically by the new TEK when the AK OTAR is sent Also the KEK in all receiving stations is automatically updated changed at the time the AK OTAR is sent 4 8b Sending FH Data by Electronic remote Fill ERF Process 4 26 ERF UPDATE FH DATA UPDATE SENDING ERF UPDATE Where the Cold Start ERF was sent on the MAN channel an update is sent over the operational channel To replace the FH data being used in the operational channel the sending NCS alerts net operations to standby tells them in which channel to store the ERF and sends it The new FH data can be loaded in the operational channel only or through sequential actions into all channels The procedure for sending an update is as shown in Figure 4 also see Special NCS Task 1 Transmit Updated FH Data Via Net Update ERF Load new FH data into RT Alert net operators for ERF where to store it and its effective DTG Net operators set FCTN to LD and standby for ERF NCS sets FCTN to LD presses LOAD on RT enters channel where new FH data is stored NCS presses ERF on RT and returns FCTN switch to SQON Net operators standby note activation of sig display press STO and channel number for storage NCS confirms net members receipt of the ERF At the time the new FH data is effective NCS makes a communications check using new FH data
115. ARM 80063 A3307222 1 Battery Adapter Charger 5940 01 501 3312 Adapter Battery Terminal J 6358B P 80058 5940 01 501 6714 Adapter Battery Terminal J 6362A U 80058 24 VDC power cable for PP 8498 or PP 8444 older charger for BB 390 s 5940 01 504 3218 Adapter Battery Terminal J 6633 U 80058 ASIP adapter interface for BA 8180 5940 01 504 5597 Adapter Battery Terminal J 6634 U 80058 non ASIP adapter interface for BA 8180 6135 01 214 6441 Battery Non rechargeable Lithium MNO2 BA 5372 U 80058 hold up power Change 1 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST Continued 1 National Stock Number 6135 01 523 3037 6135 01 438 9450 6135 01 500 0572 6135 01 501 0833 6135 01 517 6060 6140 01 490 4316 6140 01 490 4317 6130 01 495 2839 6130 01 527 2726 6160 01 492 5650 5995 01 358 1078 5995 01 382 6869 5995 01 244 0016 5995 01 286 2701 5995 01 303 0308 5995 01 312 7932 5995 01 365 2519 5995 01 323 9033 5995 01 335 7878 5995 01 348 2264 5995 01 387 4422 5995 01 379 9689 TBD 5995 01 454 3543 5995 01 492 6089 5995 01 542 8966 C 2 Change 1 2 Description CAGEC and Part Number Battery Non rechargeable Lithium SO2 BA 5590A U 80058 manpack primary power w state of charge SOC indicator Battery Non rechargeable Lithium SO2 BA 5590B U 80058 manpack primary power w o SOC indicator Battery Non rechargeable Zinc Air BA 8180 U
116. B 11 5820 890 10 4 TB 11 5820 890 10 5 TB 11 5820 890 10 6 TB 11 5820 890 10 7 TB 11 5820 890 10 8 TB 11 5820 890 10 9 TB 11 5820 890 10 10 TB 11 5820 890 10 11 TB 11 5820 890 10 12 TB 11 5820 890 10 13 TB 11 5820 890 10 14 TB 11 5820 890 10 15 TB 11 5820 890 10 16 TB 11 5820 890 10 17 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 APPENDIX A REFERENCES This appendix lists all forms field manuals technical manuals and miscellaneous publications referenced in this manual Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms Transportation Discrepancy Report TDR Report of Discrepancy Product Quality Deficiency Report First Aid For Soldiers Combat Net Radio Operations Tactical Single Channel Radio Communication Techniques Operator and Unit Maintenance for AN CYZ 10 Automated Net Control Device ANCD with the Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio Systems SINCGARS Wireline Adapter Interconnect Cable CX 13310 VRC Variable Format Message Entry Device AN GSC 21 Tactical Fire Direction System AN GSC 10 Lightweight Digital Fax AN UXC 7 Secure Net Radio Interface Unit KY 90 Battery Computer System AN GYK 29 Digital Message Device AN PSG 2A FIST V Digital Message Device AN PSG 5 Maneuver Control System MCS Lightweight TACFIRE Mortar Ballistic Computer M23 MBC Loudspeaker LS 671 Operation of AN TPQ 36 Firefinder Operation of Battery Computer System to Gun Display Unit Operation of AN PSC 3 Radio Set Change 1 1 T
117. C APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIMITED HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 1 DECEMBER 1998 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 a oe SAFETY STEPS TO FOLLOW IF SOMEONE IS THE VICTIM OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT TRY TO PULL OR GRAB THE INDIVIDUAL IF POSSIBLE TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER IF YOU CANNOT TURN OFF THE ELECTRICAL POWER PULL PUSH OR LIFT THE PERSON TO SAFETY USING A DRY WOODEN POLE OR A DRY ROPE OR SOME OTHER INSULATING MATERIAL SEND FOR HELP AS SOON AS POSSIBLE AFTER THE INJURED PERSON IS FREE OF CONTACT WITH THE SOURCE OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK MOVE THE PERSON A SHORT DISTANCE AWAY AND IMMEDIATELY START ARTIFICIAL RESUSCITATION Change1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 LITHIUM NON RECHARGEABLE BATTERIES Lithium Non Rechargeable Batteries contain a great deal of energy They must never be charged or abused Attempting to do so could result in leakage fire or even an explosion Lithium Sulfur Dioxide Li SO batteries such as BA 5590 contain a toxic pressurized and liquefied gas It has a strong pungent odor Lithium Manganese Dioxide Li MnO batteries such as 5372 HUB or Hold Up battery and BA 5390 contain a flammable electrolyte Both types of batteries contain pure Lithium which reacts violently with water DO NOT heat incinerate short circuit puncture mutilate or attempt to disassemble any battery DO NOT USE any battery which shows signs of damage such as bulging swelling disfigu
118. CABLE AND CONNECTOR CONNECTOR SECOND POWER r SECOND POWER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY USED I ASSEMBLY USED ONLY FOR LR LR ONLY FOR LR LR I I 1 me la Q TT amp USED ONLY FOR DASHED CABLES USED LL LR LR ONLY FOR LR LR m 2 A COLOR CODED COLOR CODED A CABLE AND CABLE P CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Bl J Ser oe A A 9 d RT 1523E F 2 Receiver Transmitters RT RT 1523 A B C D E F Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E 2 Vehicular Antennas AS 3900A or AS 3916 part of installation kit 2 Handsets HS H 250 part of installation kit 2 Loudspeakers LS LS 671 part of installation kit 2 Power Amplifier PA AM 7238 A B Power Amplifier Mount PA MT MT 6353 Cable W2 connects RT ANT to PA 2 Cables W4 connect RTs to VAA 3 Cables CG 3856 1 connects PA to antenna 5 2 part of installation kit Cable CX 13291 connects RT B PA MT to VAA Cable CX 13298 connects RT A to RT B for RXMT Cable CX 13303 connects RT B PA MT to MB 2 Loudspeaker Cables CX 13292 part of installation kit Figure 2 17 Long Range Long Range LR LR Radio Components 2 24 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5h VAA Connectors A B models RT B SYSTEM CONNECTOR J7 RT A SYSTEM ONNECTOR J8 AUD DATA B CONNECTOR J2 AUD DATA CONNE
119. CE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SINCGARS REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RCU Control Receiver Transmitter C 11561 C U Item to Check Operator Equipment Not Ready Service Procedure Available If 8 14 CONTROLS SPKR RF PWR CHAN MODE FCTN DIM COMSEC VOL CABLES Audio Data W4 Field Wire WD1 POWER Manpack Vehicular RCU SELF TEST Connect RCU to RT and set RT FCTN to REM Check for cracked or broken controls Check for loose controls Check for frozen controls Check for missing control knobs Check for missing cable or field wire Check for proper installation of cable and field wire Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cable or field wire Check for presence of RCU main battery Check vehicle power availability Move COMSEC from Z to PT properly adjust DIM move FCTN from OFF to Z FH and check that RCU display lights With RCU FCTN in Z FH check that RCU display shows GOOD Move RCU COMSEC to CT and check that alarm will clear Move RCU FCTN to TST and check that RCU display shows GOOD at end Broken control does not function Loose control does not function Frozen control does not function Knob missing and control does not function Cable or field wire is missing Cable or field wire is damaged and cannot be used Main battery is missing cannot be replaced No vehicle power cannot be corrected RCU display does not lig
120. CLATURE CROSS REFERENCE LIST Refer to Appendix D ffor a cross reference between official nomenclature and common names used in this manual 1 10 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS Refer td Appendix D for the definition of abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual 1 11 GLOSSARY Refer td Appendix D for the definition of special terms used in this manual 12 EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS CAPABILITES AND FEATURES 1 128 EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS SINCGARS is a family of VHF FM combat net radios which provides the primary means of tactical command and control for Infantry Armor and Artillery units SINCGARS can transmit and receive voice tactical data and record traffic messages and is consistent with NATO interoperability requirements SINCGARS includes Manpack Vehicular and Airborne platform configurations The SINCGARS configuration concept is to provide basic building block Line Replaceable Units LRUs which make up the radio system configurations required by the soldier for specific missions Configuration information for Manpack and Vehicular systems is provided in Chapter 2 The SINCGARS family of radios has been developed with these goals Higher reliability Lighter weight Less power consumption Easier and less costly to sustain 1 12b EQUIPMENT CAPABILITIES SINCGARS operates on any of 2320 channels between 30 88 MHz Communications Security COMSEC is integrated within the radio SINCGARS operates in a hosti
121. CS is responsible for announcing the date time of net opening ensuring net members have all required COMSEC key and FH data and for sending the net opening ERF LOADING THE RT Net operators are required to load COMSEC key and FH data into their radios in preparation for the Cold Start ERF Each receiving radio must have a TSK loaded in order to receive other required FH data by ERF SENDING THE ERF At the prescribed time the NCS calls the net and announces that the net opening ERF will now be sent To do so the NCS merely retrieves appropriate data from the channel where it was stored and presses ERF on the RT keypad Sep Figure 4 9 below or NCS Primary Task 4 for detailed procedures RECEIVING THE ERF Receiving operators standby at the announced time with FCTN set to LD and MAN channel selected When the is received operators will note the signal display jump and the RT display will show HF XXX The operator then presses STO followed by the channel number in which the ERF data is to be stored ICOM FILL MINUS If operators use ICOM fill procedures for their Cold Start net opening preparations but omit sync time their radios will be fully operational once the ERF loads sync time into the base clock Load SC frequency in MAN channel Load COMSEC key and FH data into RT Prepare radio to receive ERF FCTN to LD COMSEC to CT CHAN to MAN MODE to FH Standby for NCS to send When ERF is sent note sig display
122. CTOR J3 DATA B CONNECTOR J4 A et DATAA CONNECTOR J5 SPKR CONNECTOR J6 PA CONNECTOR J1 THUMBSCREW AND CLAMP REMOTE LOCAL INJECT EJECT LEVER SHORTING BAR y ON OFF SWITCH CB1 LIGHT DS1 REMOTE CONTROL BINDING POSTS E1A E2A E1B E2B PA B CONTROL CONNECTOR J11 Figure 2 18 VAA Connectors A B Models 2 25 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 J1 RF PA Control RT A provides control lines and power supply for the RF Power amplifier PA J2 AUD DATA B provides for connection of handset or data device for RT B J3 AUD DATA A provides for connection of handset or data device for RT A J4 DATA B 6 pin connector used to couple VAA J4 to RT B AUD DATA port using a W 4 cable W 4 cable must be connected for use of J2 connector J5 DATA A 6 pin connector used to couple VAA J5 to RT A AUD DATA port using a W 4 cable W 4 cable must be connected for use of J3 connector J6 SPKR 6 pin connector used to connect LS 454 loudspeaker J7 RT B System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT B J8 RT A System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT A J9 Control Monitor 6 pin connector for use of a control monitor C 11291 J10 SNAP not used J11 jn Control RT B 14 pin connector for control of external RT B power amplifier E1 2A B Two wire binding posts used for remote control of RT A RT B via C 11561 RCU or SIP RTs used as RCUs P1 Power connector couples veh
123. ECIAL PURPOSE RADIO RT CONTROL ELECTRICAL W4 RT 1523E F C U MONITOR C 11291 VRC 11 13 12 Figure 2 13 Vehicular Radio Components Illustrated 2 20 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5b Short Range SR Radio Components AN VRC 87A D F DATA A J5 CG 3855 VRC CB1 LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 AUD DATA RT 1523E F DATA A J5 CG 3855 VRC LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 CB1 ANT AUD DATA Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 A B C D E F Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E Vehicular Antenna AS 3900A or AS 3916 part of installation kit Handset HS H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Cable W4 connects RT to VAA Antenna Cable CG 3856 part of installation kit Loudspeaker Cable CX 13292 part of installation kit Power Cable part of installation kit Figure 2 14 Short Range SR Radio Components Change1 2 21 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5c Short Range Radio with Dismount SR D Components AN VRC 88A D F Same as Short Range Radio plus Dismount Manpa
124. ED 5 42 There are eight tasks categorized as special for the SINCGARS ANCD operator They are special in that they may be performed by specially trained operators or they may be the responsibility of communications specialists NCSs or designated NCOs These eight tasks are normally not required of the SINCGARS ANCD SKL operator to meet routine communications requirements when the unit is in an operational situation Some operators may be required to perform some of these special tasks while other unit operators will not be These special tasks involve functions that are required only occasionally by selected stations An example is the commander s driver who may be called upon to transfer data from one ANCD to another The commander s driver might also be required to change net IDs Also unit scouts may be required to perform retransmission operations In addition to the eight special operator tasks there are two Special SIP ASIP Operator Tasks These special SIP ASIP tasks are use the SIP ASIP RT as an RCU and send data from one computer to another over a SINCGARS secure frequency hopping net using the RS 232 enhanced data feature All unit NCS personnel should be able to perform these special as well as primary operator tasks Training in special operator tasks is an inherent part of unit sustainment training and is conducted on a small group or individual basis related to unit mission requirements TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5
125. END ITEM MOUNTING ADAPTER POWER SUPPLY ADAPTER SRM CARRYING CASE RECEIVER TRANSMITTER B 2 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF END ITEM Continued CONTROL CABLE RF CABLE CX 13291 CG 3856 10 W2 CABLE W4 CABLE 1 1 sx MOUNTING BASE MT 6353 POWER CABLE BETWEEN MOUNTS CX 13303 lt LEVER LOCKING CX 13314 DN A WE 46 gt TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION COMPONENTS OF END ITEM Continued HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROL RADIO DEVICE 12493 W4 CABLE Oe BATTERY BOX CY 8523C PRC RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RADIO RT 1523E F C U LEVER LOCKING ASIP elt B 4 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF THE END ITEM Continued 2 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 267 9482 5820 01 421 0801 5820 01 451 8252 5985 01 235 9189 6160 01 284 4200 6160 01 304 2034 6160 01 424 8514 5965 00 043 3463 5895 01 432 8370 5820 01 322 3477 5895 01 461 4505 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 535 3667 5820 01 267 9480 5820 01 351 5259 5820 01 451 8248 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 3 Description and Part Number MANPACK MP RADIO SET RADIO SET AN PRC 119A ICOM RADIO
126. F The HRCRD enables the manpack operator to control the following functions of the radio using the HRCRD Channel RF Power Mode and COMSEC For control of these functions access to the manpack HT is not required The operator can control the volume level of audio at the HRCRD by use of the thumb wheel located on the side of the device Also the operator can turn the HRCRD back light on and off by pressing the round light button Battery Box CY 8523C is required for use of the HRCRD with RT 1523 A B C D to provide power from the main manpack battery to the remote control handset The HRCRD Y cable P1 connects to the RT AUD DATA or AUD FILL port and P2 to the battery box For RT 1523E F P2 connects to the AUX connector J6 Although the HRCRD is primarily used with manpack radios it can be used with vehicular configurations to control the radio only by connecting P2 of the Y cable to the J9 port of the VAA Figure 3 7 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD 3 12 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 6b HRCRD Operation CABLING ICOM SIP RT For RT 1523 A B C D connect the HRCRD Y cable P1 straight connector to the RT AUD FILL or AUD DATA port and P2 right angle connector to the 6 pin connector on Battery Box CY 8523C Battery Box CY 8523C is required to use the HRCRD with these RTs ASIP RT For RT 1523E F connect the HRCRD Y cable P1 to the RT AUX connector of the RT 1523E F CONTROLS To control radio fun
127. GARS radio offers the operator the ability to move TEKs from channel to channel The process is called scrolling and it is easy to perform For detailed procedures seg Figure 4 1 below Set CHAN switch to 1 5 cannot scroll in channel 6 where different TEK is needed Press CMSC button display shows TEK 1 TEK 2 etc Press CHG button until TEK desired appears in display Different TEK is now ready for use in channel selected To return to original TEK repeat steps 2 and 3 or move the CHAN switch out of and back into the operational channel Figure 4 1 HOW TO SCROLL TEK 4 1c Cipher Text Operations PURPOSE The purpose of using secure CT communications is to prevent the enemy from intercepting friendly traffic POLICY Army policy calls for the use of CT mode whenever the capability is available EASE OF USE With the built in COMSEC feature of SINCGARS ICOM radios ease with which all RT channels can be loaded with TEKs and the practice of using a common TEK throughout a division area makes secure communication quite easy to perform 4 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 2 SINGLE CHANNEL SC COMMUNICATIONS 4 2a Capabilities DEFINITION SINCGARS is a single channel radio in that it can transmit or receive on only one channel at a time Single channel or the SC mode of operation refers to the fact that only one frequency is being used for communications FREQUENCIES The SINCGARS radio will operate on 232
128. GH HI 3 KM to 5KM 16000 BPS 1 KM to 3 KM DATA LR RADIO 600 2400 BPS POWER AMPLIFIER PA 5 KM to 25 KM 4800 BPS 5 KM to 22 KM 16000 BPS 3 KM to 10 KM EDM DATA SR RADIO 1200N 2400N BPS HIGH HI 5 KM to 10 KM 4800N BPS 5 KM to 10 KM 9600N BPS 5 KM to 10 KM EDM DATA LR RADIO 1200N 2400N BPS POWER AMPLIFIER PA 20 KM to 35 KM 4800N BPS 15 KM to 25 KM 9600N BPS 10 KM to 25 KM Ranges shown are for planning purposes only They are based upon line of sight and are average for normal conditions Ranges depend upon location sighting weather and surrounding noise level among other factors Use of the OE 254 antenna will increase ranges for both voice and data transmissions Enemy jamming and mutual interference conditions will degrade ranges In data transmissions use of lower baud rate increases the range 2 44 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 10e SARM Controls and Connectors CB1 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 LCL RMT ON OFF Switch RT System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT GPS interface between GPS and RT GPS ANT interface for GPS antenna RF PA Control 14 pin connector for control of external RF power amplifier Provides for connection of LS 671 loudspeaker or vehicular intercom Provides raw and switched power to RF PA Mt Provides for connection of vehicular DC power source GPS In 6 pin and coax rectangular connector interface for GPS receivers Used for sele
129. HEIGHT WEIGHT LS 671 4 2 4 9 5 8 2 6 Cable CX 13292 Length of 3 to 100 feet Cable ends are marked RADIO and SPEAKER They can be reversed physically but the radio LS 671 will not operate Be sure LS 671 cable is properly installed 2 39 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 9c LS 671 Performance Data PURPOSE POWER SWITCH POWER INDICATOR HANDSET CONNECTOR VOLUME CONTROL J1 CONNECTOR Used to transmit and receive voice communications in vehicular radio configurations Used to turn the loudspeaker on and off May also be used to turn radio power on and off when VAA or SARM 1 is set to ON and LCL RMT switch on VAA or SARM is set to RMT Lamp lights when power switch is set to ON Provides for connection of handset Adjusts volume level of loudspeaker or handset To adjust loudspeaker volume pull control out and turn To adjust handset volume push control in and turn Enables loudspeaker to be connected to mounting base single radio mount SRM or single ASIP radio mount SARM using loudspeaker cable CX 13292 CAUTION TURN RADIO OFF WHEN NOT IN USE Turn Loudspeaker power switch OFF when radio is not in use to prevent drain on vehicle batteries 2 40 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 10 SINGLE ASIP RADIO MOUNT SARM RADIO PURPOSE Provides for the installation of a single ASIP RT in vehicular SR and LR radio configurations 2 10a Components of Short Range SR Radio in
130. HICULAR RADIO SET USING SINGLE ASIP RADIO MOUNT RADIO SET AN VRC 87G ASIP Adapter Power Supply PSA SARM MX 12275 VRC 80063 A3307213 1 Receiver Transmitter Radio RT 1523E C U 80063 A3266100 1 ASIP RT 1523F C U 80063 A3307000 1 LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO SET USING SINGLE ASIP RADIO MOUNT RADIO SET AN VRC 90G ASIP Adapter Power Supply PSA SARM MX 12275 VRC 80063 A3307213 1 Amplifier Radio Frequency RFPA AM 7238 VRC 80063 A3013357 1 A3168116 1 or A3191000 1 AM 7238A VRC 80063 A3132135 0r 251212 AM 7238B VRC 80063 A3210919 1 or A3256646 1 Mounting Base Electrical Equipment MT 6353 VRC 80063 A3014053 1 Cable Assembly Special Purpose SARM to MT 6353 CX 13291 VRC 80063 A3014037 1 Change 1 B 11 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF THE END ITEM Continued 2 3 National Stock Description Number and Part Number RADIO SET AN VRC 90G ASIP Continued Cable Assembly RF RT to Aux RFPA 5995 01 219 7025 CG 3856 VRC 80063 A3014032 3 Cable Assembly Power MT 6353 to SARM 5995 01 219 4697 CX 13303 VRC 80063 A3014040 1 Receiver Transmitter Radio 5820 01 444 1219 RT 1523E C U 80063 A3266100 1 ASIP 5820 01 535 3667 RT 1523F C U 80063 A3307000 1 ASIP 5875 00 111 3208 Strap Tiedown Electrical 81343 MS3367 5 9 B 12 Change TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Ill BASIC ISSUE ITEMS There are no BII items associated with SINCGAR
131. INCGARS NCS or operator to determine Julian Date and GPS Zulu time directly from the PLGR OBTAIN DATE AND GPS ZULU TIME FROM PLGR SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Observe PLGR perform No action required of NCS or s test operator a Place PLGR into operation Select proper screen and TFOM Read date and time from PLGR screen 1 Atend of self test note this screen 2 Press down arrow on PLGR note this screen 1 Read date as 25 12 94 2 Read time as 2124 hours and 43 sec Zulu FIX 18T WK 82223e EL 00027m 2124 43Z TFOM 4 25 12 94 SUN Speed too slow GS lt 1 mph V P N A PLGR Task 1 is completed n this section PLGR screens are shown in double lined boxes while ANCD screens continue to be shown as dark bordered rectangles A battery powered PLGR will automatically go to standby as soon as satellites have been acquired Time Figure of Merit TFOM of 8 or less indicates that PLGR is tracking at least one satellite and PLGR time is GPS accurate For TFOM 9 wait for PLGR to acquire satellites at which time TFOM will change from 9 to 8 or less When first turned on the PLGR may take as long as 15 minutes to acquire satellites When the date read from the PLGR is entered into the ANCD it is automatically converted to the two digit Julian Date needed for SINCGARS sync time 7 4 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 24 Manually Load PLGR Date and Zulu Time Into ANCD PLGR Task 2 DE
132. IP radio Packet data mode can be used only with the FBCB2 system FH mode provides added security in addition to COMSEC security If you use an RT 1523E F in Enhanced Operating Mode EOM security is further improved Use of FH technique to significantly reduce the impacts of enemy jamming and avoid enemy direction finding capabilities TERM Electronic remote fill ERF External used with GRM 122 FBCB2 Hardware FBCB2 Software Frequency hopping FH data FH Master Holding memory Hot start net opening TM 11 5820 890 10 8 DEFINITION Method by which an NCS electronically updates FH data of net members and transmits sync time for cold start net openings EXT an option found under the RCU key of the SIP radio represents a future capability of the radio and is not currently used ASIP Radio is in EXT mode automatically when proper interface and software is detected When the radio is set to this mode the front panel controls of the RT are disabled allowing control to be performed from the peripheral device Ensure you do not accidentally select EXT mode ICOM Radio VERSIONS OF THE SINCGARS RADIO HAVING INTEGRATED COMSEC BUT NOT EQUIPPED WITH SIP FEATURES Components are identified as RT 1523 RT 1523A RT 1523B and AM 7239 AM 7239A AM 7239B A term that refers to the various forms of computers used in vehicular radio configurations for data communications during army digitization experiments FBCB2 computers r
133. M 11 5820 890 10 8 A 5 TB 380 41 TB 43 0129 TECHNICAL MANUALS TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P TM 11 5810 394 13 amp P TM 11 5810 410 13 amp P TM 11 5820 890 10 6 TM 11 5820 890 10 7 TM 11 5820 890 23P TM 11 5825 291 13 TM 11 5830 263 10 TM 750 244 2 Procedures for Safeguarding Accounting and Supply Control of COMSEC Material Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance for General Purpose Tape Reader KOI 18 Electronic Transfer Device KYK 13 NET Control Device KYX 15 15A Operator And Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts And Special Tools List RPSTL For AN CYZ 10 V3 NSN 5810 01 393 1973 Data Transfer Device Using V3 2 User Application Software And Fill 5 7 User Application Software Operators and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Transfer Unit Cryptographic Key AN PYQ 10 C Simple Key Loader SKL SKL UAS Version 4 0 SINCGARS ICOM Ground Radio Operator s Pocket Guide SINCGARS ICOM Ground Radio NCS Pocket Guide Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for FHMUX TD 1456 VRC MOUNT MT 6845 VRC Operations and Maintenance Manual Satellite Signal Navigation Set AN PSN 1 1 Operators Manual Intercommunications Set Vehicular AN VIC 3 Procedure for Destruction of Electronics Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use A 6 MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS A 2 DA Pam 25 30
134. MARY TASK 3 5 27 2 blank 5 28 Change 1 Select RT Preparation Settings from MENU Required to set the ASIP radio to proper settings for other tasks MENU selections are Volume Channel Power Mode and COMSEC These settings will need to change as operationally necessary Load Single Channel Frequencies into RT Required for use of single channel communications participation in Cold Start net opening use of CUE and ERF method of late net entry and single channel frequency updates Load COMSEC FH Data and Sync Time into RT Using ICOM Fill Required for secure frequency hopping communications participation in Hot Start net opening COMSEC FH data updates and without sync time participation in Cold Start net opening Perform Hot Start Net Opening Required when the net has been down for any reason and for any period of time and is now to become operational at a prescribed time Operators load their RT s with all required COMSEC keys FH data and sync time At the prescribed time they call the NCS and enter the net The Hot Start procedure may also be used when an individual operator has been out of the net for any reason and wishes to re enter without resort to the CUE and ERF method of late net entry TM 11 5820 890 10 8 PRIMARY TASK 4 Perform Passive Late Net Entry This is required when an operator s radio sync time becomes greater than plus or minus 4 seconds but not more than one minute This is different from ne
135. ME Net discipline is especially critical to the maintenance of exact sync time Nets are opened using precise GPS time and NCS transmissions pull the operating sync time of net member radios to that of the NCS radio Also the SINCGARS radio offers the operator the means for reading the sync time in the radio The ANCD SKL EGR and PLGR offer the means for reloading sync time into the radio But when SINCGARS operators misuse their TIME control they can be effectively taken out of the FH net An important aspect of operator net discipline is to leave the TIME control alone unless there is a specific need to make a change LOADING CUE FREQ Most net operators require a CUE frequency only when they need to perform a CUE and ERF method of late net entry If a CUE frequency is loaded routinely that operator will see a CUE message in the radio display every time any station sends a CUE signal Only the NCS and alternate NCSs should routinely load a CUE frequency Net operators can obtain the required CUE frequency from their ANCD or SKL when one is needed 4 46 4 12b Role of the NCS DATA NET OPENING NET STATUS SYNC TIME CUE CALLS ACCESS CONTROL USE OF RXMT HELP ADMIN TRAFFIC ALT NCS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 It is the NCS who is responsible for SINCGARS net discipline NCS responsibilities include Ensuring all net members have the correct COMSEC key FH data and sync time for net operations Opening the net at the prescri
136. MENTS General ucro tete 8 25 Manpack Radio RCU Main sse ene 25 Manpack Radio RCU Hold Up Battery 8 26 8 1 SINCGARS RADIO MAINTENANCE 8 1a General BY DESIGN Your SINCGARS radio was designed to be highly reliable and as free as possible of maintenance requirements especially for the operator Your SINCGARS radio requires no periodic maintenance services Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services are required of the operator before during and after operations DEFINITION Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS means systematic caring inspecting and servicing of equipment to keep it in good condition and prevent breakdowns Change 1 8 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2 STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS The purpose of PMCS is to ensure that your SINCGARS radios and associated items of equipment meet Army maintenance standards which are summarized here as Equipment is fully mission capable or Corrective actions are being or have been taken and Required repairs are being made or have been requested of the proper maintenance level and Required supplies and repair parts are on hand or have been requisitioned As a SINCGARS radio operator you are expected to do the following Perform prescribed PMCS Before Operations steps each time you place the radio into operation Periodi
137. MM SS eg 22 45 15 2 Press TIME on RT keypad RT display shows two times HH MM 3 Press CLR on RT keypad RT display shows 4 Enter HH from ANCD RT display shows HH 5 Enter MM minute ahead of RT display shows HH MM Do ANCD time NOT press STO yet 6 Press STO on RT When ANCD and RT time at same MM zero seconds 7 Compare RT time with ANCD Manual loading of JD and sync time time is completed Time stored in the radio should be within one second of that in the ANCD or other time standard if not repeat time loading Press TIME three times 5 35 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 4g Perform Passive Late Net Entry Primary Operator Task 4 DESCRIPTION This task is required when the sync time in your radio becomes more than 4 seconds plus or minus but less than one minute different from net sync time Passive late net entry enables an individual operator to re enter the net without action on the part of the NCS or other net operators This task makes use of a feature built into the SINCGARS radio and involves but two steps placing the RT in passive late net entry mode and waiting for the radio to adjust its sync time to that of the net When this method of late net entry does not work the Hot Start procedure or CUE and ERF method of late net entry should be used PERFORM PASSIVE LATE NET ENTRY SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Note that no traffic is being Try to c
138. Monitor C M C 11291 is a part of selected installation kits See SB 11 131 2 for listings of individual kits PURPOSE The purpose of the control monitor is to enable vehicle crews to operate their radios from positions other than directly at the radios FUNCTIONS One control monitor can provide for control of up to three radios one atatime Most functions of the radio are included Filling the radio with COMSEC FH data and sync time are exceptions CONTROLS Figure 4 31 below for a view of C M controls The function each major control performs is described below OMSEC gt 5 FRONT PANEL C 11291A VRC Figure 4 29 CONTROL MONITOR 4 42 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 e Switch Run self test TEST e Switch Used with the INIT switch to Set RF Power RF Set RT MODE RT MODE to include turning power off Change channels CHAN Select COMSEC key VAR Select CT or PT COMSEC Control status Should read M e INIT Switch Used in conjunction with the switch to make the changes cited above Moving the INIT UP causes FCTN markers to move to the right moving it DOWN moves markers to the left e RADIO Switch Selects the radio to be controlled Position 1 controls the RT in the A position of the VAA Position 2 controls the RT in the B position of the VAA and Position 3 is for an RT in the A positio
139. NCD to RT and Set FCTN switch to LD on RT press down arrow V 7 Ensure FCTN is at LD and Do you want to include press down arrow time Y N 8 1 8 Enter YES Press LOAD on RT c Perform ICOM fill on RT 1 Press LOAD button on RT Transfer in progress keypad and observe 2 Note completion of ICOM fill ICOM transfer successful data transfer V 3 Load sync time manually if RT cannot accept time from required to do so ANCD DATA control is found on the same key as the numeral 4 Select to fill a Remote Control Unit with COMSEC keys The procedure is the same as that shown for ICOM radio fill but only COMSEC is loaded not FH data RCU does not require FH data Sync time is normally included for net opening only not for net updates Consult your NCS or unit SOP for exact policy to follow If the RT being used will not accept sync time as a part of the ICOM fill this message will appear When it does the operator must then manually load Julian Date and sync time into the radio 5 33 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 41 Perform Hot Start Net Opening Primary Operator Task 3 DESCRIPTION This task is required when the net has been down for any reason and is now to become operational at a prescribed time This procedure may also be used when an individual operator has been out of the net for any reason and wishes to re enter the net without resort to the CUE and ERF method of late net
140. NCDs and press Press SEND to send down arrow WAIT b Prepare Target ANCD to 1 Turn ANCD ON select full SOI transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 5 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCD Press down arrow Press RCV to receive WAIT c Transfer full SOI from 1 Press SEND on Source ANCD Processing Please wait ANCD to ANCD shows of bytes sent 2 Press RCV on Target ANCD shows number of bytes sent These screens appear only when related data is stored in the ANCD You must respond NO you can transfer either a FULL or QREF but not at the same time Do not press SEND on Source ANCD until you are ready to press RCV on Target ANCD then press RC V within about 20 seconds of pressing SEND 5 50 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5f Perform Cold Start Net Opening Special Operator Task 3 DESCRIPTION Operators will be required to perform this special task only if the NCS elects to use the Cold Start net opening procedure Hot Start is the more commonly used net opening procedure Cold Start procedures require operators to load their radios with COMSEC keys and FH data stand by at the prescribed time communicate with the NCS on the MAN channel set RT FCTN to LD note when ERF is received and press STO and channel number to retain data Any failure
141. NG AND REPLACE THEM MAINTAINING PROPER POLARITY INSERT THE BATTERY HOUSING INTO THE ANCD AGAIN ENSURING PROPER POLARITY INSTALL THE BATTERY COVER AND TIGHTEN SCREWS TO A FIRM SETTING TURN THE ANCD ON AND VERIFY THAT YOUR BATTERY CHANGE WAS SUCCESSFUL Figure 8 1 ANCD Battery Replacement 8 21 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 REQUIREMENT PROTECTING STORED DATA IF STORED DATA IS LOST REFERENCES All ANCD users including operators are required to change ANCD battery batteries whenever change is needed Batteries should be changed as soon as feasible after the LOW BAT message appears in the ANCD display window The ANCD will retain stored data for two minutes after the batteries have been removed This gives you plenty of time to replace the spent batteries with new ones without risk of losing your stored data If you lose your data while replacing batteries you will need to have the internal ANCD software reactivated Should you experience this situation take your ANCD to your unit maintainer for reactivation and reloading TB 11 5820 890 12 Operator and Unit Maintenance for AN CYZ 10 Automated Net Control Device ANCD 8 21 Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR AN PSN 11 8 22 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE REFERENCE Change 1 The replacement of main power and hold up batteries is the is primary operator requirement in PLGR maintenance TM 11 5825 291 13 Operations and Maintenance Manual Satellite Signal
142. NTENNA SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Change1 4 33 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 10c 254 SOURCE The OE 254 antenna is not a part of the SINCGARS radio system and must be requisitioned separately Refer to your MTO amp E or TDA for the number authorized EMPLOYMENT This extended range antenna may be used with any configuration of ground SINCGARS radios including the manpack version By both its height and design the OE 254 helps to increase the operating range of any SINCGARS radio DUAL USE When two or more OE 254 antennas are employed in the same location a command post for example they should be separated by the maximum distance permitted by cabling When two OE 254 antennas are used with the same vehicle as during RXMT operations for example it is essential that they be separated as far possible 4 11 REMOTING CAPABILITES 4 11a Use of RCU GENERAL The Control Receiver Transmitter C 11561 or remote control unit RCU as it is commonly called provides for remote control of SINCGARS radios for ranges up to 4 KM The RCU is connected with the radio by two way field wire and its controls features and operation are quite similar to those of the SINCGARS radio SIP ASIP RT can be used as a RCU LS 685 cannot be used with SIP ASIP RT SOURCE The RCU is a separate issue item similar to a SINCGARS radio configuration RCU details and components battery box handset and 15 685 loudspeaker may be found Appendix to this manua
143. Navigation Set AN PSN 1 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2g Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES PMCS Item to Operator Procedure Equipment Not Check Service Ready Available If Before CONTROLS POWER SWITCH Place the POWER toggle The POWER ON indicator switch to the ON position does not illuminate and stay and verify POWER ON indicator illuminated is illuminated Watch the POWER indicator Any of the four BIT FAULT and the four BIT FAULT indicators do not illuminate indicators The POWER then extinguish after five indicator should illuminate seconds continuously and the four BIT FAULT indicators should illuminate for approximately five seconds after power on and then extinguish upon successful completion of the self test The POWER ON indicator should stay illuminated FHMUX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES STEPS CHECKS ACTIONS 1 Verify Power On Bit 1 Place the POWER toggle YES Continue switch into the ON position NO Contact Maintenance and verify POWER ON indicator is illuminated 2 Verify that the four YES Continue BIT FAULT indicators NO a Make note of the BIT FAULT illuminate for indicators that are illuminated approximately five seconds and then extinguish after power up b Inform unit maintenance of the failure including the status The POWER ON indicator of the BIT FAULT indicators should stay illuminated noted above 8 23 TM
144. ONS RESULTS a Prepare ANCD for transfer 1 Turn ANCD ON select of COMSEC key Soi Radio sUpervisor Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time Enter COMSEC Ld i Enter LD select Tek Enter TEK or KEK as desired Select key qUit name number ENTR Select key and press ENTR Select key key selected Enter QUIT Connect ANCD to RT b Transfer key from ANCD 1 Connect ANCD to RT using Press LOAD on RT to RT fill cable press 2 Press RT LOAD Transfer of COMSEC key is STO X completed Remember that CUE and MAN channels use the TEK in channel 5 Do not change this key unless you are sure the new key is to be used for CUE and MAN channels also Connect ANCD to RT or to KYK 13 or KYX 15 The same procedure may be used for COMSEC devices 6 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3e Designate New Default Loadset NCS Option 1B DESCRIPTION This optional task allows an NCS to change the designation of the default loadset stored in the ANCD This function is useful during periodic updating for example when the current loadset is to be replace by one which was carried in reserve in the ANCD database By changing the default the NCS makes it easy for operators or communications specialists to transfer a new loadset to other ANCDs of the unit or to load the default loadset into radios DESIGNATE NEW DEFAULT LOADSET SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Change default loadset 1 Turn ANCD ON select Soi Rad
145. OTAR follow the steps shown in Figure 4 14 also see Special NCS Task Send to Other NCSs Using MK Method of for detailed procedures Prepare radio to send MK OTAR FCTN to SQ ON MODE to FH M COMSEC to CT and DATA to OFF Load receiving stations KEK into NCS radios channel 6 Prepare ANCD to send MK OTAR turn ANCD ON enter Radio Comsec MK select TEK Connect ANCD to NCS RT using fill cable Direct target NCSs to standby make special NCS task 5preparations and ACK when ready for MK Direct target NCSs to set RT to chan 6 press RCV Set NCS RT to channel 6 and press SEND Return to operational channel After 30 seconds announce OTAR complete TEK ID is effective DTG is xxxx and obtain Reload KEK in NCS radio MK OTAR is complete Figure 4 14 SENDING MK OTAR USING ANCD TM 11 5820 890 10 8 also see Special NCS Task 5 Receive and Store TEK Sent by MK RECEIVING MK OTAR Target NCSs with an ANCD perform the steps shown in Method of for detailed procedures Prepare radio to receive MK OTAR FCTN to SQ ON COMSEC to CT and DATA to OFF Prepare ANCD to receive MK OTAR Turn ANCD ON enter Radio COMSEC RV Connect ANCD to RT ACK to NCS when ready for MK When directed set RT to Chan 6 press RCV on ANCD Return to operational channel Enter Text ID skip tag sequence New is now stored in target NCS ANCD ready for distributio
146. PA for short is a part of selected vehicular radio installation kits Refer to SB 11 131 2 for listings of individual kits EMPLOYMENT The SLPA is designed to reduce antenna visibility and it withstands tree limb strikes better than the regular antenna There is a slight reduction in operating range of the radio when the SLPA is employed Both regular and SLPA antennas are provided for selected combat vehicles tanks for example SAFETY Safety precautions pertaining to the employment of vehicle antennas are repeated here for sake of emphasis WARNING DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR IF YOUR ANTENNA COMES INTO CONTACT WITH OVERHEAD POWER LINES Do not stop your vehicle under power lines When mobile never pass under power lines if there is any doubt about overhead clearance If you are not sure that an antenna on your vehicle will clear a power line stop before you get close to the power line and either carefully tie down the antenna or if necessary remove the antenna to make sure that you can safely drive under the power line During cross country operations do not allow anyone to stick an arm leg or weapon over the sides of the vehicle If your antenna accidentally touches a power line individuals who are in contact with vegetation or the ground could suffer death or severe injury For additional safety information refer to TB 43 0129 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment Figure 4 22 VEHICULAR A
147. R of OTAR return to chan 1 d Send TEK by MK 1 Say Go to chan 6 now N A OTAR press RCV now Go to chan 6 and press Transfer in Progress SEND now 1 Keys Transferred Return to chan 1 Prepares Source NCS radio for comm with Target NCSs 4 Wait 30 sec after sending Informs Target NCSs of TEK ID and say OTAR completed effective time advises Source NCS TEK ID is XXXXX which stations did and did not effective at DTG ACK receive OTAR using the MK procedure there is considerable advantage if an Alternate NCS takes the primary role in sending the OTAR For example an Alternate NCS can load the new TEK into a second SINCGARS radio or into a TEK position other than that be used for the operational net This means that once the OTAR has been sent the Alternate NCS can monitor communications using both new and old TEKs thus making it easier to bring in any stations that missed receiving the initial OTAR Do not press SEND until Target NCSs are ready to press RCV Then press SEND within 20 seconds of directing them to press RCV If distance or obstacles between NCS stations requires it an RXMT station may be used in transmitting an MK OTAR Transmitting and receiving stations must have the same KEK loaded in channel 6 The fact that the RXMT link requires use of two net IDs does not change the requirement to use the same KEK The Alternate NCS notes which stations still need the OTAR keeps o
148. Receiver Transmitter RT SIP ASIP Enhanced Data The SIP ASIP RT offers enhanced data rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS where the N indicates new or enhanced rates The advantages of these enhanced data rates are better accuracy greater speed longer range and improved forward error correction New Data Modes Two new data modes are also provided Packet PCKT which supports operations involving FBCB2 hardware and software and RS 232 by which data messages can be sent from SIP ASIP RT to SIP ASIP RT using computers and commercial communications software a widely used file transfer protocol Enhanced The ASIP RT offers Enhanced Operating Mode EOM EOM Operating Mode provides added security in addition to COMSEC security RCU Function The SIP ASIP RT can be used as a remote control unit by merely selecting the RCU option under the RCU key of the SIP ASIP RT keypad The RCU C 11561 can still be used to remotely control a SIP ASIP radio for voice and SINCGARS data modes but it cannot be used for enhanced data modes GPS Time Loading An attractive feature of the SIP ASIP RT is the ability to load GPS time from an EGR ASIP RT only or attached PLGR using very simple procedures Internal FSK Detector The SIP ASIP RT contains an internal FSK detector circuit for us with the AD1 and TF data rates Use of a special CX 13808 U DMD interface cable is no longer necessary In addition TACFIRE devices must
149. Reconnect cont 3 Does ICOM fill now load RT YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 5 5 SINCGARS Radio 1 Does RT pass all checks and YES Continue PMCS tests NO See Unit Maintenance 2 Does ICOM fill now load RT YES Problem is solved NO See Unit Maintenance Where ACTION is to replace ANCD and fill cable it is anticipated that the operator will borrow such item for the purpose of troubleshooting If borrowing is not feasible it will be necessary for the operator to contact Unit Maintenance to obtain a substitute item or get assistance with the problem 8 8 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2 Operator is Unable to Contact the Net NCS STEPS 1 Verify Correct RT Control Settings Verify Correct COMSEC Key is Loaded Verify Correct Net ID is Used Verify Correct GPS Sync Time is Used SINCGARS Radio PMCS CHECKS 1 Is FCTN switch set to SQ ON 2 Is CHAN switch set to net operational channel 3 13 COMSEC set to CT or PT if in use 4 Is MODE set to FH or SC if in use 5 Is RF PWR set properly for NCS location 6 Is VOL set to hear NCS or net traffic 1 Is TEK loaded in operational channel 2 Can NCS now be contacted 1 Is correct Net ID loaded in operational channel 2 Can NCS now be contacted 1 Are ANCD and times within 2 seconds 2 Can NCS now be contacted 1 Does RT pass all checks an
150. S a Prepare radio for receipt 1 Set FCTN to SQ ON of MK OTAR 2 Set COMSEC to CT b Prepare ANCD to Turn ANCD ON select receive MK OTAR Soi Radio sUpervisor Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time Enter COMSEC in Enter RV Connect to RT Press RCV WAIT Connect ANCD to RT AUD FILL port ACK to Source NCS when Responds to Source NCS s ready to receive OTAR MK OTAR instructions 6 29 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS 1 When NCS directs go to Load in Progress chan 6 and press RCV c Receive and store TEK sent by MK OTAR Enter Text ID 2 Enter Text ID provided by Do you want to skip Tag sequence Source NCS 3 Enter YES 1 Keys Received Do not press RC V until directed to do so by the Source NCS The Tag Sequence involves many questions to which you will probably not know the answer Use Tag Sequence only when specifically directed to do so by the Source NCS who will then provide answers to the many questions involved Otherwise respond YES to skip the Tag Sequence 6 30 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CHAPTER 7 SINCGARS ASSOCIATED TASKS GENERAL M 7 2 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER Definition of PLGR 0 2 1 10 0 00 00 Summary of PLGR
151. S KOI 18 lt more gt P DATA XFR SV SEL DOP CALC ALERTS SINCGARS KOI 18 lt more gt P SINCGARS Start time fill ACTIVATE QUIT SINCGARS Start time fill ACTIVATE QUIT 7 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS b Prepare RT for time 1 Connect PLGR to RT N A transfer from PLGR AUD FILL port c Perform date time 1 Press PLGR down arrow to SINCGARS transfer from PLGR to RT select ACTIVATE Press LOAD key on radio QUIT 2 Press LOAD on RT SINCGARS time fill successful 3 Press PLGR down arrow to Date time transfer is select QUIT completed 7 8 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 21 Load Key From ANCD Into PLGR Task 4 DESCRIPTION This procedure enables an NCS or PLGR operator to transfer a PLGR key from the ANCD to the PLGR when required LOAD PLGR KEY FROM ANCD INTO PLGR SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare PLGR for loading Turn PLGR ON 2 Observe PLGR perform its self test 3 Note when this screen FIX FOM 5 appears 18Y MGRS New WK 82223e 63528n EL 00027m V P 4 Connect W4 to PLGR but N A not to ANCD yet b Prepare ANCD for loading 1 Turn ANCD ON select PLGR key Soi Radio sUpervisor Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time Enter COMSEC vG Ld Rv Ak Mk vU 4 Enter LD Tek Kek Enter TEK press PgDN Select key and ENTR to select name number Press PgUP PgDN to view Select key ENTR to select PLGR key ae Enter QUIT Conn
152. S Radio Configurations Change 1 B 13 B 14 blank TM 11 5820 890 10 8 APPENDIX C ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST SECTION INTRODUCTION C 1 SCOPE This appendix lists additional items you are authorized for the support of Radio Sets AN PRC 119A D F and AN VRC 87A D F through AN VRC 92A D F AN VRC 87C AN VRC 87G and AN VRC 90G C 2 GENERAL This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the radio set and that do not have to be turned in with it These items are all authorized to you by CTA MTOE TDA or JTA C 3 OF COLUMNS National stock numbers descriptions and quantities are provided to help you identify and request the additional items you require to support this equipment The items are listed in name and grouped into equipment types SECTION ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST 1 2 National Stock Description Number CAGEC and Part Number Adapter 5810 01 026 9622 Adapter Wire Line HYX 57 TSEC 98230 0N241760 5935 01 463 8290 Adapter 2 Wire A3272557 2 80063 ASIP RCU 6130 01 540 5244 Adapter Power Supply MX 12275 VRC 80063 A3307213 1 Single ASIP Radio Mount Antenna Manpack 5985 01 340 1043 AS 4266 PRC 80063 A3167657 1 extended range 5985 01 425 7305 AS 4266A PRC 80063 A3256531 1 Bar Latch Locking Lever 5340 01 430 4723 Bar Latch ICOM SIP 80063 A3256492 5340 01 456 7985 Bar Latch ASIP 80063 A3256669 3 5340 01 541 6723 Bar Locking S
153. SCRIPTION This procedure enables an NCS or SINCGARS operator to manually load the date and time obtained from the PLGR into the ANCD GPS date and Zulu time can then be transferred to other ANCDs and loaded into SINCGARS radios using the ICOM fill procedure MANUALLY LOAD PLGR DATE AND ZULU TIME INTO ANCD SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULTS a Determine GPS date 1 Perform PLGR Task 1 and Zulu time as shown above 2 Read date and time from PLGR with TFOM of 8 or less 2124 43Z 25 12 94 Speed too slow GS 1 mph b Prepare ANCD for 1 ANCD ON select loading date and time Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SUPERVISOR Are you authorized to use this feature Y N 3 Respond YES WARNING This could cause data loss V 4 Press down arrow Vv Are you sure you want to continue Y N b Respond YES Appl Date Time Setup Util Bit MAIN 7 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASK ACTIONS RESULTS Load new date and time Enter DATE Date is Sat 12 24 1994 New mm dd yy 1 2 Enter new date in Date is Sat 12 24 1994 form of mm dd yy New mm dd yy 12 25 9 ENTR 3 Press ENTR Appl Date Time Setup Util Bit MAIN 4 Enter TIME Time is 14 53 27 New hh mm ss b Enter new time in Time is 14 53 27 form of hh mm ss New hh mm ss 21 25 00 ENTR 6 Press ENTR when Appl Date Time Setup PLGR reads 25 00 Util Bit 7 Enter APPL SOI RADIO RDS 8 Enter RDS sele
154. SIP RT used as Remote TD Control Unit RCU TDR receive variable radio wire integration TF TEK retransmission Situational Awareness Selective Availability Anti Spoofing Module Single ASIP Radio Mount single channel SINCGARS Data Mode Set Data Rate signal signal officer single channel ground and airborne radio system System Improvement Program Simple Key Loader steerable null antenna processor survivable low profile antenna signal operating instructions standing operating procedure squelch speaker short range short range radio with D 4 Change 1 dismount kit short range long range short range long range radio with dismount kit single radio mount stand by store secure telephone unit suffix synchronize technical bulletin Transmission Control Protocol time delay transportation discrepancy report TacFire or Task Force traffic encryption key TM TMPD TRANS TSK TST UD UTIL VAA VAR VEH VHF VIC VOL WHSP WP technical manual XMIT time period transmission YY transmission security key test Z update utility vehicular amplifier adapter variable vehicular very high frequency vehicular intercom set volume whisper way point transmit years zero TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Change 1 D 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 GLOSSARY TERM Alternate net control station Automated net control device Battery life indicator Broadcast Channel Cold start net ope
155. SOI as appropriate 2 Load new FH data into Perform ICOM fill or change Eset in NCS radio one channel Prepare net operators for 1 Alert net that an update Wait until the net is clear of net update ERF ERF is to be sent operational traffic Tell operators what Facilitates channel change when channel to store ERF data is effective 3 Advise operators when May be immediate or at a later new FH data is effective specified time 2 3 Send net update ERF 1 Set FCTN to LD If NCS RT is not in FH M set it there for sending ERF 2 3 Set i Press LOAD on RT RT display show _ 3 Enter channel where ERF RT display shows HF blinks data is stored and beeps 4 Press ERF on RT keypad RT display shows SEND beeps and shows HF XXX 5 Change FCTN from LD N A back to SQ ON 6 19 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS d Confirm receipt of ERF 1 Allow operators time to 20 30 seconds should be adequate store net update ERF 2 Have operators ACK N A receipt of ERF 3 Have Alt NCS repeat ERF Allows NCS to control net and if required by operators continue net operations e Make communications 1 At proper time change to N A check update ERF data 2 Check communications N A using update ERF data 3 Have Alt NCS follow up Net update ERF is completed for non responsive operators Store data to be sent by ERF in a channel other than your operational channel Net upda
156. Single ASIP Radio Mount AN VRC 87G L JG LOUDSPEAKER oooo NE CONNECTED TO SINGLE ASIP Em RADIO MOUNT CONNECTOR 45 0000 202990 iij Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523E F Power Supply Adapter PSA SARM MX 12275 Vehicular Antenna AS 3900A or AS 3916 part of installation kit Handset H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Antenna Cable CG 3855 part of installation kit Loudspeaker Cable CX 13292 part of installation kit Power Cable part of installation kit Figure 2 24 Components of Short Range Radio in Single ASIP Radio Mount SARM Change1 2 41 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 10b Components of Long Range LR Radio in Single ASIP Radio Mount AN VRC 90G E CALC LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO SINGLE ASIP RADIO MOUNT CONNECTOR J5 Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523E F Power Supply Adapter PSA SARM MX 12275 Vehicular Antenna 5 3900 3916 part of installation kit Handset H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part
157. T when placed in REM mode RCU RT SELECTION The of the RCU RT is set to SQ ON The feature of the SIP ASIP radio is selected by pressing RCU on the RT keypad and then pressing CHG until RCU appears in the display ORDERWIRE By placing the RCU RT FCTN switch in the REM position the RCU RT operator can talk with the remoted radio operator over the non secure two wire connection This two wire connection is also called an orderwire COMSEC As with the C 11561 RCU orderwire voice communications over the two wire connection between RCU and remoted RT are plain text not encrypted APPLICATION The SIP ASIP RT can be used as an RCU in all data modes SINCGARS SDM and Enhanced EDM E1A E2A OR E1B E2B X ZSZ 6 SS Figure 4 27 1 SIP VEHICULAR MOUNTED REMOTE OPERATION 4 40 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 E1A E2A OR E1B E2B ELLE TWO WIRE ADAPTER OR E1B E2B E1A E2A 1 2 1 2 4 40 1 4 40 2 blank Change 1 TWO WIRE gt ADAPTER Figure 4 27 2 ASIP REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 11c Use of LS 671 SOURCE Loudspeaker LS 671 is a part of selected installation kits See SB 11 131 2 for a listing of individual k
158. TAL TUNING Quick silent precise digital tuning VISUAL DISPLAY Electronic visual displays provide for quick checks and prompts SELF TEST BIT Built in test BIT provides self test for fast checking of equipment condition VOICE DATA Voice or digital data communication Provides data rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 bits per second bps Provides analog data interfaces AD1 and TACFIRE RT 1523C D E F only provide enhanced data rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N 9600N and PCKT packet data mode with Internet Controller INC FREQUENCIES 2320 SC frequencies COMSEC Provides cipher text CT communications with integrated COMSEC ICOM feature GPS OPERATION Global Positioning System GPS operation allows you to load accurate GPS time determine your position or the position of another transmitting RT 2 2 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 MODE DISPLAY CHAN SWITCH RF PWR SWITCH SWITCH DISPLAY Aus DIM CONTROL VOLWHSP FCTN p did KEYBOARD CONTROL SWITCH COMSEC KEYBOARD SWITCH RT 1523 A B C D RT 1523E F Figure 2 1 RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RT RT 1523 Series 2 1b Transmitter Characteristics TYPICAL DUTY CYCLE Typical duty cycle TDC is defined as nine minutes of receiving or monitoring for each one minute of transmission time expressed as 9 1 duty cycle MANPACK BATTERY With a 9 1 duty cycle at 70 F a new manpack main power battery 5590 has a service life o
159. TM 11 5820 890 10 8 TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR S MANUAL SINCGARS GROUND ICOM COMBAT NET RADIOS AN PRC 119A AN PRC 119D AN PRC 119F AN VRC 87A AN VRC 87C AN VRC 87D AN VRC 87F AN VRC 87G AN VRC 88A AN VRC 88D AN VRC 88F AN VRC 89A AN VRC 89D AN VRC 89F AN VRC 90A AN VRC 90D AN VRC 90F AN VRC 90G AN VRC 91A AN VRC 91D AN VRC 91F AN VRC 92A AN VRC 92D AN VRC 92F NSN 5820 01 267 9482 EIC NSN 5820 01 421 0801 EIC NSN 5820 01 451 8252 EIC NSN 5820 01 267 9480 EIC NSN 5820 01 304 2045 EIC NSN 5820 01 351 5259 EIC NSN 5820 01 451 8248 EIC NSN 5820 01 555 7674 EIC NSN 5820 01 267 9481 EIC NSN 5820 01 352 1694 EIC NSN 5820 01 452 8435 EIC NSN 5820 01 267 9479 EIC NSN 5820 01 420 6619 EIC NSN 5820 01 451 8247 EIC NSN 5820 01 268 5105 EIC NSN 5820 01 420 6618 EIC NSN 5820 01 451 8246 EIC NSN 5820 01 555 7371 EIC NSN 5820 01 267 9478 EIC NSN 5820 01 420 6621 EIC NSN 5820 01 451 8249 EIC NSN 5820 01 267 9477 EIC NSN 5820 01 421 2605 EIC NSN 5820 01 451 8250 EIC USED WITH L2Q GC9 GA4 L22 GDC GAR 123 GAS GA3 L24 GD8 GAY L25 GD9 GA2 N A L26 GDG GAS L27 GDH GM2 AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 SIMPLE KEY LOADER SKL AN PYQ 10 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR AN PSN 11 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TD 1456 VR
160. U CONTROLS AND USES CONTROLS PURPOSE ARROW KEYS These keys are used to step through displays and menus or to modify a highlighted setting This key is used to store a setting or enter a selected mode This key is used to return to a previous menu condition This key is used to turn on off menu backlighting 5 27 1 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 4 PRIMARY OPERATOR PREPARATION TASKS 5 4a Definition of Primary Operator Preparation Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED There are five tasks categorized as primary for the SINCGARS radio operator manpack or vehicular and one preparation task for the ASIP radio These tasks enable the operator to meet all normal communications requirements when the unit is in an operational situation These five primary tasks involve loading the radio with required single channel frequencies COMSEC keys FH data and sync time Additionally they include the use of passive late net entry and the ANCD or SKL as the primary source of SOI information All SINCGARS radio operators are expected to be able to perform these five primary tasks without assistance other than reference to TM 11 5820 890 10 6 Operator s Pocket Guide Operator Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS see Chapter 8 are to be performed prior to performing these tasks 5 4b Summary of Primary Operator Preparation Tasks PREPARATION TASK 1 PRIMARY TASK 1 PRIMARY TASK 2 PRI
161. X X X LE gr oque Handset H 250 cannot be connected to the AUD DATA port when the Packet mode is in use Connecting a PLGR to the GPS port J5 J12 of the RT or VAA requires a special cable A W 4 Cable is used to connect RT A to VAA J5 and or RT B to VAA J4 for Packet data only Change 2 13 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 9 MP RADIOS AN PRC 119A D F 2 3a Manpack Radios General NOMENCLATURE The term manpack is the common name for the soldier carried AN PRC 119A D F DISMOUNT Dismount capability is given to vehicular radio sets by addition of manpack radio components including the carrying case a manpack antenna and a battery box RT 1523 A B C D only 2 3b Manpack Radio Components 2 14 Change 1 Antenna manpack radio AS 3683 PRC or AS 4266 PRC long antenna Receiver Transmitter RT any RT 1523 series RT Handset H 250 U or Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD C 12493 U Battery Box CY 8523A B C CY 8523C PRC required for use of HRCRD Battery box not required for ASIP RT Battery main power Carrying case Figure 2 11 Manpack Radio Components TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 3c Manpack Radio Physical Data Table 2 3 Manpack Radio Physical Data Length Width Height Weight Component p in kg Ib max max max approx Batter
162. a Battery Box CY 8523A B installed in Battery Tray b Battery BA 5590 installed in Battery Box Cable CX 13314 connects RT to PSA Antenna Cable CG 3856 part of installation kit Loudspeaker Cable CX 13292 part of installation kit RT 1523A versions with serial numbers below 20200 cannot be used with SRM configurations if either a VIC or LS 671 is used with that SRM radio Figure 2 20 Components of Short Range Radio in Single Radio Mount SRM 2 32 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 6b Physical Data for Single Radio Mount SRM Radio NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 10 Physical Data Single Radio Mount Radios ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT Mounting Base Electrical Equipment MT 6576 SRM Power Supply Adapter PSA MX 10862 High Voltage Center Fed Antenna AS 3900 SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna SLPA AS 3916 Handset H 250 Loudspeaker LS LS 671 Battery Tray CY 8664 Selected configurations only Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523A Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523B 32 4 29 2 12 3 5 3 12 8 11 5 4 8 11 5 29 8 27 4 12 6 11 7 10 8 5 0 in 286 6 5 3 112 8 209 9 82 6 n a n a 42 12 6 16 0 4 9 6 3 25 3 27 1 8 7 6 7 10 0 10 7 3
163. a rates as outstations Only SIP ASIP radios can be used at the RXMT site and outstations COMSEC SETTINGS If using SINCGARS versions RT 1523 A B C D E F either PT or CT COMSEC setting may be used as desired With a RT 1523 RXMT station FH SC only the RT in SC must be in PT These requirements in no way preclude the use of CT communications between RADIO A and RADIO B When the RXMT station must be in PT it will be necessary for RADIO A or RADIO B to change to PT if contact with the RXMT team is desired FH TO FH PROCEDURE Procedures for establishing RXMT communications between and RADIO B are as shown in Figure 4 20 below NCS recognizes contact with RADIO B is lost or soon will be alerts RXMT crew for mission RXMT crew LOADS RADIOS WITH PROPER FH DATA INCLUDING RXMT NET ID RXMT crew moves to RXMT location sets up OE 254 antennas establishes RADIO C to RADIO A and RADIO D to RADIO B communications When ready installs an RXMT cable between RADIO C and RADIO D sets RADIO C and RADIO D to RXMT sets RADIO D to FH M and RADIO C to FH and sets COMSEC of both radios to CT for monitoring RXMT communications between RADIO A and RADIO B are now established Figure 4 20 FH NET TO FH NET RXMT 4 30 Change 1 FH TO SC PROCEDURE SC TO SC PROCEDURE SC DISADVANTAGE EDM RXMT MIXED MODE TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The procedures for FH net to SC net RXMT communications are the same except that RADIO D uses RADIO B
164. act of periodic updating on operational units With an update requirement only every 30 days and a thirty day period in which to accomplish the update there should be little or no impact on mission operations Change1 4 23 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 8 ELECTRONIC UPDATING 4 8a Sending TEK by Over The Air Rekey OTAR Procedures RESTRICTION TWO WAYS MANUAL KEYING MK AUTOMATIC KEYING AK SENDING MK OTAR 4 24 Change 1 Only TEK may be transmitted over the air using the OTAR procedure KEK may be distributed by physical means only There are two procedures by which a TEK may be sent over the air One is called Automatic Keying AK the other is Manual Keying Mk The MK OTAR procedure allows an NCS to transmit a TEK from a source ANCD through the SINCGARS radios to one or more target ANCDs This is a useful form of OTAR in that the receiving NCS can then distribute the new TEK to net operators by passing the ANCD through the unit The AK OTAR method transmits the new TEK from the NCS radio directly into the target operators radios An advantage of the AK method is that the receiving operator is required to take no action at all A disadvantage is that the TEK and KEK in the receiving radios are changed immediately while the sending NCS must reload that radio with the new TEK and an updated KEK This procedure involves some risk of losing communications at least in secure mode To send a new TEK to other NCSs by
165. activate and display show HF XXX Press STO and channel number for storage Set FCTN to SQ ON Call NCS and enter the net or wait for NCS call When all operators have entered the net the Cold Start net opening is complete Figure 4 9 COLD START NET OPENING SELECTIVE USE The Cold Start method of net opening is more demanding than the Hot Start procedure but it can be useful in situations where the NCS desires to bring all operators into the net at the exact same time Change1 4 17 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 6 LATE NET ENTRY 4 6a General DEFINITION The term Late Net Entry means that the operator missed the announced net opening time and wishes to enter the net now the operator left the net for some reason and now wants to re enter or sync time in the operator s radio now differs by more than 4 seconds from that of the net METHODS There are fours ways in which an operator can perform a late net entry each described below 1 Passive method of late net entry 2 The Hot Start option 3 Reloading sync time option and 4 The CUE and ERF method PREFERENCE All four methods are effective The one to use is the one which best fits your situation 4 6b Passive Method EASIEST When your situation will permit use of the Passive method it is the easiest to use requires minimum action on the part of the operator BUILT IN CAPABILITY The SINCGARS radio has a built in capability to bring itself back into the
166. ak Operator has option of using CUE and ERF method of late net entry in lieu of the Hot Start procedure if desired The possibility that there is no traffic on the net must be considered so try to contact your NCS to check serviceability of your radio 8 11 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 4 Radio Presents Strange Message or Noise That Will Not Clear STEPS CHECKS ACTIONS 1 Set FCTN to STBY then back Does message noise clear YES Problem is solved to SQ ON NO Go to Step 2 2 Set FCTN to Z FH Does display show GOOD YES Go to Step 3 NO See Unit Maintenance 3 Set to OFF wait 10 sec Does display now show GOOD YES Go to Step 4 then back to Z FH NO See Unit Maintenance 4 Run RT Self Test Does self test result in display YES Go to Step 5 showing GOOD NO See Unit Maintenance 5 Perform ICOM Fill and Re enter Has message noise cleared YES Problem is solved Net NO See Unit Maintenance Do not perform Steps 2 thru 5 unless the nature of your mission will permit you to be out of the net for a short period Steps 2 thru 5 are the equivalent of re booting your radio In that the SINCGARS radio is basically a computer this procedure frequently works when other efforts to clear a strange message or noise do not 8 12 8 2 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT SCOPE TM 11 5820 890 10 8 This paragraph of your SINCGARS Operator s Manual briefly addresses the maintenance requ
167. ange from commercial off the shelve items to fully militarized computers The interface from the FBCB2 computers to the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio system is via an RS 232 port of the computer to the SIP ASIP VAA J6 connector UNIX based software developed especially for support of Task Force XXI operations and used in FBCB2 hardware FBCB2 software when employed with the SIP ASIP RT and SIP ASIP VAA provides situational awareness reporting internet operations and SINCGARS to EPLRS automatic interface The host interface to the SINCGARS SIP ASIP radio system uses the commercial TCP IP family of communications protocols specified in the Army Technical Architecture ATA Hopset lockouts if used TSK net ID and sync time required for FH communications Mode position used by the NCS in which the NCS RT helps maintain sync time in all net radios RT temporary memory used for loading retrieving and sending fill data Method of opening a FH net in which net operators load all required COMSEC FH data and sync time from their ANCD and merely call the NCS to check into the net Change 1 0 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 TERM Internet Intranet relay Line of sight LOS Loadset Lockouts Manual channel frequency Manpack radio Net control station NCS Net identification ID D 8 Change 1 DEFINITION The term used to indicate the capability of data messages to pass automatically from one SINCGARS net to another and
168. ansfer a TEK not a KEK electronically over the air rekey OTAR to other NCSs This capability is useful when the tactical situation or terrain makes it impossible or impractical to pass new TEK by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD Receiving NCSs store the new TEK in their ANCDs or SKLs The new TEK can then be passed to operators by physical transfer Special NCS Tasks 3 and 5 are performed together by Source and Target NCSs respectively SEND TEK TO OTHER NCSs USING MK METHOD OF OTAR SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare Source NCS 1 Set FCTN to SQ ON N A radio to send MK OTAR 2 Set MODE to FH M N A 3 b Prepare Source 1 Turn ANCD ON select to send MK OTAR Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter COMSEC Vg Ld Rv Ak Mk vU 4 Enter MK Select key qUit name number S Press PgDN to display and Connect to RT and press SEND ENTR to select WAIT 6 Connect Source ANCD to N A RT using fill cable 6 24 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Prepare Target NCSs to 1 Say Standby for MK OTAR Target NCSs are alerted CT contact receive MK OTAR ACK is confirmed 2 After ACK say Make Readies Target NCSs to receive MK Special NCS Task 5 OTAR preparations ACK when ready to receive MK OTAR 3 After say OTAR will Provides final coordination guidance now be sent after receipt for MK OTA
169. are for RT A and RT B in first VAA position 3 is for RT A in second VAA FCTN This control is used for selecting test RF power RT mode channel COMSEC Function variable COMSEC mode and main or standby status TEST Used to run C M self test Results are shown in displays Self test will continue until FCTN switch is moved out of TEST position RF This control position is used to set the RF power output of the radio The INIT Radio Frequency Switch is used for adjusting power RT MODE Used to set RT mode including power off INIT switch is used to make changes RT mode display shows operating mode CHAN Used to select RT channel including CUE and MAN Channel display shows Channel channel selected with 0 for MAN and C for CUE VAR Used to select COMSEC keys Variable COMSEC Used to select COMSEC mode plain text or cipher text COMSEC display shows PT or CT CONTROL Used to change C M from standby S to main M INIT switch is used to make changes Control display shows operating condition INIT Used with FCTN switch to change functions of RT and C M Moving INIT switch Initiate up moves FCTN display to right or increases channel number Moving INIT switch down moves FCTN display to left or decreases the channel number This control adjusts brightness of displays Turning it clockwise brightens displays counterclockwise dims displays DIM control is turned fully counterclockwise for use of night vision goggles
170. ation where an operator would select this option is when the cause of being out of the net is uncertain In short the problem could be with data fill as well as with sync time PROCEDURE The procedure is to select the proper menu items on the ANCD or SKL connect the ANCD or SKL to the RT and press LOAD on the RT keypad Sync time must be loaded manually if other than RT 1523A B C D E F is being used Having repeated the ICOM fill the operator merely follows Hot Start procedure and re enters the net Sed Figure 4 9 See Primary Operator Task 3 Perform Hot Start Net Opening for detailed procedures f possible check ANCD or SKL sync time against or EGR GPS time If it has been more than 24 hours since GPS time was loaded into the ANCD or SKL time difference may exceed 4 seconds In the worst case load ANCD or SKL time and use passive late net entry Change1 4 19 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 6d Reloading Sync Time ALSO EASY SITUATION PROCEDURE 4 20 Change 1 This method calls for reloading of sync time whether as a part of an ICOM fill by electronic transfer from a PLGR or EGR or through manually loading new sync time via the RT keypad The typical situation in which to use this method is again where the operator is reasonably certain that sync time is the problem Another factor is that the operator may not be willing to wait for traffic to be heard passive method and elects this method to re enter
171. ators continue to use receipt of ERF MAN in CT for ACK e Make communications 1 Direct operators to go to Net shifts to the FH mode of check SQ ON operational chan communications 2 Set NCS radio to SQ ON N A and operational chan 3 Check communications Note which operators do not respond with net operators 4 Direct Alt NCS to bring all Cold Start is complete when all other operators into net operators have entered net Sync time may be loaded into the radio from an ANCD SKL EGR or PLGR via ERF or by use of the RT keypad The preferred method is to load exact GPS time and Julian Date directly from an ANCD SKL EGR or PLGR Depending upon operational conditions and state of operator training you may wish to have operators acknowledge this announcement Ensure that operators understand that if they fail for any reason to enter the net at the time the ERF is sent they are to standby on MAN and wait for you to contact them there 6 16 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3j Respond to CUE Calls Primary NCS Task 5 DESCRIPTION An important feature of the SINCGARS radio is its ability to be contacted by a non frequency hopping radio or an FH radio lacking data or sync time through a process known as CUEing All that is required is for the calling radio to be on the prescribed CUE frequency press the push to talk switch and wait for a response This action causes a CUE message to appear in the RT di
172. be paid for these advantages Each radio in a net must have the same COMSEC keys FH data and sync time in order to communicate It is the Net Control Station that provides the required degree of control NCS tasks are divided into two groups primary and special Primary tasks are those that NCS personnel may be called upon to perform at any time The second category special includes tasks that may or may not be performed depending upon command policy tactical situation and state of training As with the job of the SINCGARS operator the job of the NCS has also been simplified by the statement of task procedures in clear easy to follow steps And like the operator the NCS is provided a small pocket guide containing abbreviated task procedures for all operator requirements plus primary NCS tasks This pocket guide serves as a memory jogger for the trained NCS operator precluding any need to memorize any aspect of SINCGARS radio operation 6 2 NCS RESPONSIBISLITE NET OPENING ANCD ASSEMBLY TM 11 5820 890 10 8 It is the NCS who is responsible for opening the secure frequency hopping SINCGARS net Net opening time is announced in advance to enable operators to make proper preparations The NCS ensures that the net is up and fully operational in time to support unit mission communications requirements As the principal supervisor of the net the NCS ensures that all net operators have ready access to a fully loaded ANCD con
173. bed time to support unit mission requirements Knowing which net operators have and have not entered the net Transmitting or at least pressing PTT often enough to ensure that net sync time is maintained Ensuring that CUE calls are answered Controlling access to the net Employing RXMT capabilities when required Verbally assisting operators having trouble with task performance Ensuring that administrative communications requirements do not interfere with unit mission control communications Making full use of alternate NCS operators to preclude distraction from primary NCS requirements 4 12c Role of the Alternate NCS NET OPENING UPDATES CUE CALLS DISPLACEMENT NUMBER While the NCS sets the time of opening and logs stations into the net itis the Alternate NCS who follows up and brings all late entry operators into the net When net data is updated whether electronically or by physical distribution it is the Alternate NCS who maintains a radio on old data and ensures that all net operators make the transition successfully It is the Alternate NCS who responds to all CUE calls leaving the primary NCS free to control the net Also it is the Alternate NCS who physically changes positions shortly following each use of SC communications to prevent enemy location by direction finding There is no limit other than operational on the number of Alternate NCSs that may be employed The important point is that
174. cally perform PMCS During Operations steps while the radio is being operated Perform prescribed PMCS After Operations steps once your use of the radio has been completed If authorized and able to do so correct all faults deficiencies or problems you find while performing PMCS If unable to correct a problem identified by PMCS report it to your unit maintenance personnel Maintain a DA Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet on your radio as required by your unit SOP or applicable Army Regulations regarding The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS You do not need to record problems that you fix 8 1b PMCS Guidance ITEM NUMBER INTERVAL ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE NOT MISSION CAPABLE IF OPERATOR S MANUAL TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The numerical sequence of those parts components or functions of your radio configuration that the PMCS direct be checked Cables is one example of a PMCS item This column indicates when each check is to be made For SINCGARS radio configurations only Before During and After Operations apply The parts components or functions of your radio that the PMCS table tells you to check Self Test is an example Items are shown in the order they are to be performed and may be referred to be Item Number or Name as desired The Procedure column advises you of the checks to be made and steps to be taken These are to be performed in the order
175. cantly increased with the fielding of the SINCGARS system Some of the SINCGARS related specific functions performed by Signal Officers and NCOs are Development and distribution of loadsets including those required to support task organization changes Distribution of new data in timely manner and maintenance of data reserves Advising and assisting NCS personnel and unit operators as required Ensuring operator and NCS job proficiency to include conducting training if required Developing and implementing unit sustainment training programs including periodic COMM EXs Advising commander on COMSEC requirements including compromise recovery procedures Advising and assisting commanders and SINCGARS users in equipment and system interfaces to include AFATDS ASAS CSSCS FAADC2 IFSAS IVIS MCS MSE and TACFIRE LIGHT TACFIRE as required See appropriate technical bulletin TB 11 5820 890 10 series 4 49 4 50 blank TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CHAPTER 5 OPERATOR TASKS Remote Control Unit Controls sese Control Monitor 5 22 Loudspeaker 16 671 2 4 100 enne nennen enne 5 24 Vehicular Intercommunications Set edere 5 25 o ooncocp i PRIMARY OPERATOR PREPARATION TASKS a Definition of Primary Operator Preparation
176. cations at SINCGARS Data Rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 BPS and at Enhanced Data Rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS The RS 232 interface allows transmission of data via SINCGARS ASIP radios using computers and commercial Xmodem software If not using Packet PCKT data mode or the internet controller INC feature of the ASIP radio all data devices must be connected to the AUD DATA port not to the ASIP VAA Also serves as the RXMT connector J2 AUD FILL Handsets used with the ASIP RT may be connected to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL connector NOTE Handsets will not function if connected to the front of the ASIP VAA JI Antenna RF Input Output 5 16 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Figure 5 14 ASIP RT FCTN SWITCH FUNCTION CONTROL POSITIONS AND USES POSITION PURPOSE All power is shut off all stored data COMSEC FH sync time and manpack battery life indicator are deleted after 5 seconds radio is completely inoperative position is used when radio is not in use and for storage 2 Clears COMSEC after 5 seconds clears all FH data operator pauses in this Zero position for 5 seconds when setting switch to OFF STBY Makes radio inoperative but all stored data is retained sync time is lost after 200 Stand By hours setting FCTN to SQ ON returns radio to fully operational status In STBY power is drawn from main source TST This position causes self test of RT data and circuit
177. channel CHG change CID Combat Identification CIK cryptographic ignition key CKT circuit CLR clear CLSGN call sign CM control monitor centimeter CMSC communications security COEI component of end item COMM EX communications exercise COMSEC communications security C S sign countersign CT cipher text combat vehicle crew D 2 Change 1 DA DF DN DTD ECCM EDM EGR EIR ENTR EOM EPLRS ER ERF ESET EXT FCTN FH FH M FHMUX FIST V FM FOM FQMER Department of the Army direction finding down data transfer device electronic counter counter measures Enhanced Data Mode Embedded GPS Receiver equipment improvement recommendation enter enhanced operating mode Enhanced Position Location Reporting System error electronic remote fill FH data for one channel external function frequency hopping frequency hopping master frequency hopping multiplexer fire support vehicle frequency modulation figure of merit frequency management error FR FREQ FSK GD GOTST GPS GRP HUB HZ HH HI HR HRCRD HS JD KEK KG KHZ LB LCD LD LDE LNE LO LOS LOUT LR LR LR response failure frequency Frequency Shift Keying good Go to Test global positioning system group hold up battery hertz hours high hand receipt Handheld Remote Control Radio Device handset intercomm integrated COMSEC identification intermediate frequency Internet Controller Intercom in
178. ck components 2 54 Long Range LR Radio Components AN VRC 90A D F J1 POWER AMPLIFIER J2 POWER AMPLIFIER w2 S DATA A J5 ANT AUD DATA RT 1523E F J1 POWER w4 AMPLIFIER J2 POWER AMPLIFIER DATA A J5 AUD DATA Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 A B C D E F Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E Handset HS H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Power Amplifier PA AM 7238 A B Cable W2 connects RT ANT to PA Cable W4 connects RT to VAA Antenna Cable CG 3856 part of installation kit Loudspeaker Cable CX 13292 part of installation kit Power Cable part of installation kit ONSE IU SEE Figure 2 15 Long Range LR Radio Components 2 22 Change 1 Vehicular Antenna AS 3900A AS 3916 part of installation kit LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 LOUDSPEAKER CONNECTED TO MOUNTING BASE CONNECTOR J3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5e Short Range Long Range Radio Components AN VRC 89A D F CG 3855 VRC J1 POWER AMPLIFIER AUD DATA RT 1523E F J2 POWER AMPLIFIER
179. crews and others who cross unit boundaries frequently have the need to be able to enter any net quickly and with minimum time and effort If the net required is loaded in a channel of one of the operating radios only the channel switch needs to be changed If the net required is not loaded in one of the operating radios and if all nets use common COMSEC FH data and sync time only the net ID needs to be changed for secure FH communications to begin Monitoring or eavesdropping as it is some times called across all unit nets is essential to command and control on the modern battlefield SINCGARS provides the capability to monitor or enter any net in the division so long as common COMSEC key FH data Julian Date and GPS Zulu time are properly used 4 5 NET OPENING 4 5a General NCS ROLE NET OPERATION MINIMUM RT REQUIREMENTS 4 5b Loadsets DEFINITION UNIT SPECIFIC TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The NCS of each net is responsible for opening the net at the time required to support unit operations NCS net opening responsibilities include e Announcing the date time of opening Ensuring operators are provided the required COMSEC key and FH data loads e Sending an ERF if required and Logging members into the net during opening A SINCGARS secure FH net will be opened prior to the start of an operation while the unit is still at home station or in an assembly area It is highly unlikely the net once operational
180. ct Soi Radio sUpervisor Enter one minute beyond PLGR time and wait until PLGR seconds reads 00 to press ENTR on ANCD Because the ANCD requires time to load you may find that pressing ENTR on the ANCD when PLGR reads 59 gives you a more accurate entry To check the accuracy of your ANCD time entry enter RADIUO then TIME You an then read ANCD time in running format and compare it with running PLGR time If the two times are more than one second different reload PLGR time into your ANCD 7 6 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 2 Electronically Load PLGR date and Zulu Time Into RT PLGR Task 3 a DESCRIPTION This procedure allows an NCS or SINCGARS operator to transfer date and time directly from a PLGR into a SINCGARS radio It represents a better method of loading sync time into an RT when a PLGR is available especially for NCS personnel ELECTRONICALLY LOAD PLGR DATE AND GPS ZULU TIME INTO RT SUBTASKS Prepare PLGR to perform transfer task ACTIONS Turn PLGR ON Observe PLGR perform its self test Note this PLGR screen appear Press PLGR MENU key two times note this screen Press PLGR right arrow four times to highlight SINCGARS Press PLGR down arrow to select SINCGARS Press PLGR left arrow to highlight ACTIVATE Do NOT press down arrow yet RESULTS N A N A FIX FOM 5 18T MGRS New WK 82223e 63528n EL 00027m DATA XFR SV SEL DOP CALC ALERTS SINCGAR
181. ction of Local or Remote operation Change1 2 45 2 46 blank TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CHAPTER 3 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE ANCD AN CYZ 10 a ANCD 0 4 0000000 eene b qoare ete shop aue 3 3 ANGD Physical orante 3 3 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR AN PSN 11 3 4 b PLGR Characteristics PLGR Physical Data See TM 11 5825 291 13 for detailed operating instructions FREQUENCY HOPPING MULTIPLEXER FHMUX TD 1456 VRC FHMUX 3 5 b FHMUX Physical uiri erac rette hh e evened ea as c FHMUX Performance SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU a STU Gapabilill8S b STU Characteristics ene ertt Pendet c STU Physical Data eo Goin teed See manufacturer s user manual for detailed operating instructions VEHICULAR INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SET VIC AN VIC 1 VIC Comporehls 3t eain eti RE RU eevee VIC Capabilities ede rr ee Oi bees E e EORR Reni Een ria uda NA B mM cT 3 11 See TM 11 583
182. ctions press SEL until the required function is highlighted CHAN COMSEC RF PWR MODE Then press the DOWN ARROW until the specific item you need appears in the display RT FCTN switch must be in REM for HRCRD to be functional LIGHT To turn the backlight on press the light button To turn the light off press the light button a second time VOLUME To change the level of audio volume rotate the volume control knob on the side of the HRCRD to reach the level desired RADIO CONTROLS For control of the other radio functions make all the required selections and changes using the RT keypad and front panel controls TRANSMIT Press the Push To Talk PTT switch on the side of the HRCRD RECEIVE Place handset near one ear and adjust volume to required level for reception Change 1 3 13 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Figure 3 9 HRCRD Front and Rear Views TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 7 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT CDU 3 7a CDU Capabilities The CDU can be used on an ASIP RT with or without an EGR or an external PLGR It provides full RT control local GPS position display situational awareness and provides navigational capability 99 waypoints The CDU does not provide audio capability an H 250 U handset is also needed A CDU vehicular adapter cable part of the vehicular EGR kit is used to connect the CDU to AM 7239E Figure 3 10 Control Display Unit CDU 3 7b CDU Operation CABLING Connect the CDU to the AUX c
183. ctive as long as you press a key 5 11 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RT KEYPAD BUTTONS AND USES KEYPAD BUTTON PURPOSE 1 THRU 0 These keys enable the operator to enter numbers Most frequent use is for entry of SC frequencies They are also used for loading sync time via the RT keypad and for changing net IDs CMSC Press this key to determine the COMSEC key position being used RT display will COMSEC show TEK 1 thru 5 or KEK Channel 6 a Ignore this key unless specifically directed by your SigO or NCS to use it Star It serves no purpose during normal operation of SINCGARS radios This is present on some models and not on others SYNC Press this key to activate the passive late net entry feature of the SINCGARS radio FREQ This key is used to check load clear and offset SC frequencies and to check Frequency and change net IDs DATA Press this key to determine data status which can read 600 1200 2400 16000 AD1 Analog Data 1 TF TACFIRE or OFF ERF NCS operators press this key when sending a Cold Start or net update ERF to net Electronic Remote Fill operators It is not used by operators same key as OFST OFST Used in conjunction with the FREQ and CHG buttons this key enables the Offset operator to offset SC frequencies by plus or minus 5 or 10 KHz The offset feature on same key 9 the SINCGARS radio can be used only in the SC mode CHG When used in conjunction with the DAT
184. d each net is assigned its own Net ID 4 3c Sync Time OTHER VARIABLE RADIO CLOCKS LOADING TIME CHANNEL TIME CHANGING TIME DANGER TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The remaining variable required for two or more frequency hopping radios to communicate is called Sync Time In addition to the FH Data elements discussed above communicating radios must also have the same sync time within plus or minus 4 seconds In order to maintain proper sync time the SINCGARS radio uses seven internal clocks a base clock plus one for each of the six FH channels MAN and CUE settings will display the base clock time For purposes of net opening sync time can be loaded into the radio four ways electronically from an ANCD SKL PLGR or EGR manually through the RT keypad or by receipt of a cold start net opening ERF All four procedures set all seven clocks to the same sync time The plus or minus 4 seconds sync time requirement applies to each net individually For example if you are operating on Channel 1 and have proper sync time for that net you cannot communicate on Channel 2 unless you also have the proper sync time for that net With a separate clock for each channel the radio allows for time differences greater than 4 seconds among nets Once your radio is operational in the FH mode sync time can be changed in all seven clocks by the four methods discussed above Sync time can be changed in a single channel leaving other chan
185. d tests 2 Can NCS now be contacted ACTIONS YES Continue NO Go to SQ ON cont YES Continue NO Change CHAN cont YES Continue NO Reset COMSEC cont YES Continue NO Change MODE cont YES Continue NO Change RF PWR cont YES Go to Step 2 NO Reset VOL go to Step 2 YES Continue NO Reload scroll TEK cont YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 3 YES Continue NO Reload FH data cont YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 4 YES Continue NO Use passive LNE cont YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 5 YES Continue NO See Unit Maintenance YES Problem is solved NO See Unit Maintenance If other traffic can be heard on the net problem is assumed to rest with the NCS station ANCD time may not be valid if it has been more than 24 hours since ICOM fill of radio Passive late net entry LNE 8 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 3 Operator Hears No Traffic on the Net STEPS CHECKS ACTIONS 1 Perform Passive Late Net 1 Does RT display show LF YES Wait for traffic on net cont Entry LNE XXX NO Adjust DIM switch cont 2 Is traffic heard and L dropped YES Problem is solved from RT display NO Go to Step 2 2 Check VOL Control Setting 1 Is VOL set high enough to hear YES Go to Step 3 traffic NO Adjust VOL cont 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 3 3 Ensure That Handset Headset 1 Is hands
186. d move to the RXMT site and maintain RXMT communications with the distant station It is the NCS who will also make use of RXMT capabilities to communicate between a frequency hopping and single channel net ALTERNATE NCS The NCS has a full time job maintaining net discipline and controlling the net An important NCS requirement is to make proper use of Alternate NCS stations for critical functions such as responding to CUE calls entering late members into the net and continuing to use old data until all net members have changed over to updated data UPDATES For periodic updates the NCS assists the unit Signal Officer in the task of getting some ANCDs reloaded and new data manually distributed to net operators On those special occasions when it is impossible or impractical to physically disseminate new data it falls to the NCS to transmit TEKs FH data or SOI information by electronic transfer means Depending upon the state of training and extent of experience it may be necessary for the unit Signal Officer and communications specialists to assist NCSs in the use of electronic transfer procedures SUMMARY OF TRANSFER METHODS TYPE OF DATA FH COM DATA SEC MODE OF NET SYNC LOCK HOP TSK TEK SOI DISTRIBUTION ID TIME OUT SET EXT es ves ves ves ves wo wo o wo wo no wo wo wo wo ves omm wo no no no wo ves Figure 6 1 Summary of Transfer Methods
187. d or broken controls Check for loose controls Check for frozen controls Check for missing control knobs Check for presence Check for proper installation of cable Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage Perform C M self test Test should result in Gd Check control of RF PWR Check control of RT Mode Check control of Channel Check control of COMSEC 8 17 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2c Vehicular Intercommunication Set VIC AN VIC 1 8 18 OPERATOR UNIT MAINTENANCE VIC PMCS NMC STATUS Operator level preventive maintenance requirements and 5 for the VIC are covered in Chapter 3 TM 11 5830 340 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual Intercommunication Set AN VIC 1 Unit level preventive maintenance requirements and PMCS for the VIC are covered in Chapter 5 TM 11 5830 340 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual Intercommunication Set AN VIC 1 Unit level maintenance procedures for the VIC are also addressed in TM 11 5820 890 20 2 Unit Maintenance Manual SINCGARS Ground ICOM Radio Sets Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for the VIC system are shown below for the convenience of the SINCGARS operator using a VIC intercomm For answers to technical questions concerning the VIC system see the VIC manual cited above TM 11 5830 340 12 Radios in VIC 1 equipped vehicles can be operated directly by passing the VIC system if nece
188. d sync time Manual loading of GPS sync time is complete Figure 4 11 CHANGING RT SYNC TIME TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 6e CUE and ERF Method NOT SO EASY The CUE and ERF method of late net entry does work but it requires much more of the operator than the other methods described It also requires action on the part of the NCS or alternate NCS and it involves the use of SC transmissions with probable displacements following each SITUATION A situation in which an operator may find it necessary to use the CUE and ERF method is when no net traffic is heard data or sync time are believed to be at fault and neither an ANCD SKL PLGR nor a EGR is available for reloading PROCEDURE For the procedure to perform CUE and ERF method of late net entry seq Figures 4 12 4 13 below or Special Operator Task 5 Perform CUE and ERF Late Net Entry Load CUE and MAN frequencies into RT Set CHAN to CUE COMSEC to PT Press PTT for 5 seconds no need to talk Set COMSEC to CT immediately Wait for NCS to respond repeat steps 2 4 every 15 seconds until a response is received Figure 4 12 OPERATOR S CUE amp ERF PROCEDURE To respond to the operators CUE and request the NCS or alternate NCS follows the procedure shown in Figure 4 13 also see Primary NCS Task 5 Respond to CUE Calls Note CUE message in RT display Switch from operational channel to CUE Respond on CUE channel in CT mode Direct caller t
189. dios but the wire line connection is not Secure Figure 4 34 below shows a typical set up using local and remote control units terminating as illustrated in a TACFIRE device Various devices can be used including a handset LOCAL CONTROL C 2329 GRA 39 x RADIO CONNECTOR TO AUD DATA A J3 USE J2 FOR RADIO B OPERATION 43 FOR RADIO A OPERATION REMOTE CONTROL C 2328 GRA 39 TACFIRE DEVICE AN GSC 21 AN PSG 2 AN GSQ 122 AN GYK 29 Figure 4 32 GRA 39 SET UP 4 45 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 12 NET MANAGEMENT 4 12 Net Discipline IMPORTANCE Net discipline is important for all combat net radios but it is especially so for SINCGARS For the members of the net to communicate each radio must have the same COMSEC key FH data and sync time While the NCS radio set to the FH M position automatically maintains sync time in all net radios within the required 4 second window use of the FH M position by other than the NCS can cause the net to lose common sync time and divide into two or more nets unable to communicate among them UPDATES COMSEC keys TSKs and SOI information must be replaced at prescribed intervals Changeover from one set of data to another demands net discipline Changeover must take place at the time prescribed and the new data being introduced must be the correct data for that time SYNC TI
190. e operator needs to make NET ENTRY At the prescribed time for net opening each net operator calls the NCS and enters the secure FH net The Hot Start net opening procedure is completed once all members have entered the net An alternative procedure is for the NCS to call net members at opening time but requirements remain the same Se Figure 4 8 below or Primary Operator Task 3 Perform Hot Start Net Opening for detailed procedures Load RT using ICOM fill procedure Load sync time manually if required Call NCS and enter CT FH net When all operators have entered the net the Hot Start net opening is complete Figure 4 8 HOT START NET OPENING PREFERRED METHOD Because it is simple and easy to execute the Hot Start method is generally preferred for net openings A major advantage of the Hot Start procedure is that coordination requirements are minimized and operators have maximum latitude regarding RT loading and net entry SPECIAL MEMBERS The Hot Start procedure also recognizes that some operators the commander s driver for example may not be available at the announced net opening time Such special operators can enter the net at whatever time they are available when Hot Start procedures are used 4 16 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 5e Cold Start Procedure FORMER PRIMARY Prior to the fielding of ANCDs SKLs EGRs and PLGRs the Cold Start procedure was the primary method of net opening NCS RESPONSIBILITIES The N
191. e the CDU Also your position SA is transmitted to the net as follows OFF GPS turned off AUTO GPS turned on Sends your position with each message PER GPS turned on Sends your position with each message or periodically if a transmission has not occurred MOV GPS turned on Sends your position with each message or if the RT has moved a minimum distance since the last transmission Also used to enable loading of GPS time and EGR key SA 6 Displays the current SA receive selection ON or OFF Changed using the CHG 7 key When ON the RT will look for SA data on received messages CID 8 Displays CID status CID or NO CID The CID which is entered using the keypad identifies your RT to the net A CID must be present in the RT to enable GPS and SA functions MENU CLR MENU appears on SINCGARS ASIP when key is pressed Multiple presses will scroll MENU FREQ BACKLIGHT ASIP radio must be in SQ ON Press FREQ key then CHG 7 to change intensity GPs SA ERF 4 5 orst Figure 2 8 SIP ASIP Keypads 2 2c SIP ASIP VAA Memory The SIP ASIP VAA contains a small microprocessor which allows data in the form of routing tables to be stored in the VAA Internet When used in conjunction with FBCB2 hardware and software the SIP ASIP VAA supports internet communications among SINCGARS FH nets and between SINCGARS and EPLRS nets The SIP ASIP RT must be set to the Packet mode Change 1
192. e 1 B 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF THE END ITEM Continued 2 National Stock Number 5820 01 267 9481 5820 01 420 6618 5820 01 451 8246 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 5895 01 195 4844 5895 01 306 8093 5895 01 407 2627 5995 01 304 2026 5995 01 310 0335 5995 01 426 6728 5820 01 234 8093 5820 01 318 7990 5820 01 365 2725 5820 01 363 6929 5820 01 410 8981 5820 01 444 1219 5820 01 535 3667 5340 01 430 4723 5340 01 456 7985 5820 01 267 9478 5820 01 420 6621 5820 01 451 8249 5895 01 188 8819 5895 01 304 8389 5895 01 334 3164 5895 01 421 0093 5895 01 422 8781 5895 01 444 1218 B 8 Change 1 3 Description CAGEC and Part Number LONG RANGE VEHICULAR RADIO SET RADIO SET AN VRC 90A ICOM RADIO SET AN VRC 90D SIP RADIO SET AN VRC 90F ASIP Amplifier Adapter Vehicular VAA AM 7239 VRC 80063 A3013365 1 ICOM AM 7239A VRC 80063 A3132035 1 ICOM AM 7239B VRC 80063 A3148136 1 or A3148136 2 ICOM AM 7239C VRC 80063 A3245066 1 SIP AM 7239D VRC 80063 A3163600 SIP AM 7239E VRC 80063 A3256600 1 ASIP Amplifier Radio Frequency RFPA AM 7238 VRC 80063 A3013357 1 or A3191000 1 AM 7238A VRC 80063 A3132135 1 or A3251212 AM 7238B VRC 80063 A3210919 1 or A3256646 1 Cable Assembly Radio Frequency W2 RT to RFPA 80063 A3013824 3 Cable Assembly Special Purpose W4 RT to V
193. e Hold Up Battery HUB becomes weak a diamond shaped light at the right side of the RT display will flash if the HUB is dead or missing this light will remain on This light appears only while the RT display is active Some versions of the SINCGARS radio display an M near the right side of the RT display indicating that traffic is being sent over the net Examples of some of the information the operator will receive from the RT are 53550 SC frequency TEK 1 COMSEC key STO Store where F123 net ID FAIL 5 Need to go to CT RT 1523 only RT KEYPAD TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The RT keypad also referred to as a keyboard provides one of the primary means the operator has for entering information into the radio It also allows the operator to obtain information from the radio The function of each of the 20 keypad buttons is briefly described below Very specific procedures and messages are found in the operator and NCS tasks covered i and 6 5 6 aaae 7 9 LOAD BATT 0 CALL Figure 5 10 RT KEYPAD When entering data into the radio through the RT keypad keep in mind that the display will go blank about 7 seconds after your latest entry For example if you load 4 numbers of a SC frequency and then pause for more than 7 seconds the display will go blank and you will have to start over If you need to pause during data entry continue to hold down the last button used The display will remain a
194. e RCU FCTN is set to STBY the radio FCTN will change to that position after about 15 seconds Radio battery life condition cannot be set from the RCU only at the radio ICOM fill of the radio cannot be done remotely only at the radio If vehicular radio uses a Control Monitor it must be disconnected before the RCU can be employed The normal operating position of RCU FCTN switch is SQ ON A FAIL 9 message resulting from self testing the RCU normally indicates that the test was run in PT change COMSEC to CT and re run the test If FAIL 9 appears after running test in CT see unit maintenance 4 39 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 11b Use of RT as RCU DESCRIPTION The SIP ASIP RT can be used as a Remote Control Unit RCU replacing the C 11561 RCU When used as an RCU the SIP ASIP RT accommodates both Enhanced and SINCGARS Data Modes If the C 11561 RCU is used with the SIP radio only the SINCGARS Data Modes SDM may be used Otherwise operation of the SIP RT when used as an RCU is identical to procedures used with RCU 11561 CONFIGURATIONS Figure 4 28 for use of vehicular SIP RT as RCU For dismounted SIP RTs se Figures 4 24 and 4 25 For ASIP RTs see A 2 Wire Adapter is required to connect the 2 wire cable to the ASIP RT REMOTED RADIO The FCTN switch of the remoted radio is set to REM which disables the front panel of that RT because control is exercised from the RCU RT The remoted radio defaults to C
195. e shown as ANCD displays dark bordered boxes or as displays in the form of RT display shows Where appropriate results are expressed as explanations of occurrences SUBTASKS ACTIONS 1 Turn Source ANCD ON RESULTS select Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter SEND send to Radio Ancd Stu Pc 4 Enter ANCD Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter DATABASE Do you want to include time Y N 6 Respond YES Connect to ANCD and press SEND WAIT b Prepare Target ANCD for 1 Turn Target ANCD ON select COMSEC FH transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter RECEIVE receive Ancd Stu Pc Mx a Prepare Source ANCD for COMSEC FH transfer 5 45 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS 4 Enter ANCD Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter DATABASE Do you want to delete FH and COMSEC data Y N 6 6 Respond YES Connect to ANCD and press RCV WAIT c Transfer COMSEC FH Data 1 Press SEND on Source ANCD Transfer in progress Sync Time Transfer successful 2 Within 20 seconds press Transfer in progress RCV on Target ANCD Transfer successful You must enter DATABASE in order to proceed MWOD Multiple Word Of Day is a term used in the loading procedure for the Have Quick radio found in selec
196. e switch is set to FH M position to change net ID Sync time is loaded into RT manually via the keypad or by electronic remote fill ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of FAIL 5 Changing to CT clears message RT will accept if sync time is less than one hour different from net sync time Figure 2 2 RT 1523 Features 2 4 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RT 1523A Control knobs are affixed with top positioned Phillips screws RT cover is affixed with Phillips screws All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode switch may remain in FH position to change net ID Sync time is loaded into RT manually via the keypad or by electronic remote fill ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of GO CT Changing to CT clears message RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time Figure 2 3 RT 1523A Features RT 1523B Control knobs are affixed with side positioned Allen screws RT cover is affixed with slot headed screws All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode switch may remain in FH position to change net ID Sync time is loaded into RT manually via the keypad or by electronic remote fill ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of GO CT Changing to CT clears message RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from ne
197. each configuration are listed with the radio description Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523 A B C D Mounting Base MB MT 6352 A part of installation kit Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA AM 7239 A B C D E Vehicular Antenna AS 3900 part of installation kit SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna SLPA AS 3916 part of installation kit Handset HS H 250 part of installation kit Loudspeaker LS LS 671 part of installation kit Power Amplifier PA AM 7238 A B Power Amplifier Mount PA MT MT 6353 Cable W2 Cable W4 Control Monitor C M C 1 12914 part of installation kit Receiver Transmitter RT RT 1523E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 2 12 Vehicular Radio Components Listed Change1 2 19 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RADIO RT RT 1523 C U Series MOUNTING BASE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MB AMPLIFIER ADAPTER MT 6352 VRC VEHICULAR VAA AM 7239 VRC Series MTE6352A VRC 3 2 FREQUENCY PA AM 7238 VRC Series MOUNTING BASE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 8 PA MOUNT MT 6353 VRC C HANDSET 9 H 250 U e 6 CABLE ASSEMBLY ANTENNA RADIO FREQUENCY VEHICULAR W2 AS 3916 VRC CONTROL UNIT 46 VEHICULAR VEHICULAR 5 5 3900 AS 3900A VRC 4 CABLE ASSEMBLY RECEIVER TRANSMITTER SP
198. eceiver Transmitter RCU 2 35 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 7b RCU Physical Data NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 12 RCU Physical Data ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT Control Receiver Transmitter RCU C 11561 Battery Box CY 8523A B Loudspeaker LS 685 2 7C RCU Performance Data DISTANCE The RCU is connected to a SINCGARS radio by two wire linkage typically WD 1 field wire The RCU may be located up to 4 kilometers away from the radio being remotely controlled CAPABILITIES The RCU sends to and receives from its companion SINCGARS radio voice and data messages in either single channel or frequency hopping mode and in plain or cipher text INTERCOM A voice intercom capability is provided between the RCU and radio operators RANGE Operating ranges of SINCGARS radios that are remotely controlled by an RCU are the same as the ranges shown for various radio configurations in paragraphs 2 3d and 2 5 2 36 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 8 CONTROL MONITOR C M C 11291 11291 2 8a C M Components FRONT PANEL C 11291A VRC E 1 Control Monitor C 11291 2 Cable CX 13290 connects C M to VAA Figure 2 22 Components of Control Monitor C 11291 2 37 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 8b C M Physical Data NOTE Weights are in
199. ect ANCD to RT WAIT o D 7 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Transfer PLGR key from 1 Press Do not connect Press LOAD on RT ANCD to PLGR ANCD to RT 2 Now connect W4 to ANCD Key loaded not connect W4 to ANCD until directed to do so by the ACTIONS column Sequence of task requires that you connect W4 to PLGR then select key to be transferred and then connect W4 to ANCD When you connect to W4 to the ANCD the PLGR key is immediately transferred gnore this reference to the RT only the ANCD and PLGR are involved in this task 7 10 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 3 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU TASKS 73a Definition of STU Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED 7 3b Summary of STU Tasks STU TASK 1 STU TASK 2 STU TASK 3 STU TASK 4 There are four STU tasks which enable an NCS or communications specialist to transfer classified data over unlimited distances via commercial or military telephone circuits COMSEC keys FH data hopsets TSK and net IDs and SOI information can be sent from ANCD to ANCD via a STU transfer It is assumed that the NCS or communications specialist performing these tasks is fully qualified in the employment of the STU for sending and receiving classified information Only the four tasks shown below involving use of the ANCD with the STU represent required training Send COMSEC Keys FH Data Fr
200. ed The UP A and DOWN V arrow keys are used to scroll to a new alpha or numeric character while the LEFT 4 and RIGHT gt arrow keys are used to select the other characters in the field Once a selected data field is edited pressing the ENT key stores the data in that field and selects the next field Pressing ENT while DONE is boxed stores all edits When COPY EDIT is selected a previously copied position Local or SA is displayed Press ENT to further edit the waypoint as in step 7 Pressing ENT when DONE is boxed stores all edits and returns to the new navigational solution Pressing ESC at any time during waypoint copy edit returns to the previous condition and or restores the original waypoint data Change 1 7 29 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 61 Situational Awareness Display and Copy CDU Task 6 DESCRIPTION This task allows the operator to view the CID and position of the originator of the last transmission received The position may be copied for pasting into a waypoint If GPS information is not available from the ASIP RT the display will show NOT AVAILABLE DETAILED PROCEDURE 1 Verify that SA is not OFF See EGR Task 3 2 Observe CDU display 3 Using UP A and DOWN keys select the SA field The selected field has a highlighted border NOTE If this display is not shown use ESC key as needed to return to main display 4 Press ENT to enter Situational Awareness SA display 5
201. ek Enter TEK press PgDN and Select key ENTR to select name number Press PgUP PgDN to view Select key ENTR to select GPS key Enter QUIT Connect ANCD to RT 7 22 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Transfer EGR key from Sending TEK ANCD to EGR GPS key name Press LOAD on RT Press LOAD on RT on RT 2 Connect GPS Fill Cable W20 to ANCD 3 On RT press GPS LOAD 1 Keys Transferred CHG then LOAD RT display shows EGR FILL WAIT and DONE The RT will display WAIT for several seconds ANCD may go directly to next display Do not connect W20 to ANCD until directed to do so by the ACTIONS column 7 59 Obtain date and GPS Zulu Time from EGR EGR Task 5 DESCRIPTION This task allows the NCS or operator to determine Julian Date and GPS Zulu time directly from the EGR After acquiring GPS time the RT will attempt to reload once per hour GPS TIME LOAD SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Set RT to receive load RT to Set RT to receive load load Set RT FCTN switch to LD PNA Select GPS Press GPS 5 key on RT keypad RT display shows AUTO PER or MOV d Store time in RT Press STO key on RT keypad RT display shows GPS date e g 33G f display shows PER or MOV GPS time may not be available Change 1 7 23 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 6 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT CDU TASKS 7 Definit
202. emove the antenna to make sure that you can safely pass under the power line When mission permits use the short antenna during operations on the move If you must use the long antenna on the move never pass under power lines if there is any doubt about overhead clearance For additional safety information refer to TB 43 0129 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment Change1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 VEHICULAR ANTENNA SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA COMES INTO CONTACT WITH OVERHEAD POWER LINES Do not stop your vehicle under power lines When mobile never pass under power lines if there is any doubt about overhead clearance If you are not sure that an antenna on your vehicle will clear a power line stop before you get close to the power line and either carefully tie down the antenna or if necessary remove the antenna to make sure that you can safely drive under the power line During cross country operations do not allow anyone to stick an arm leg or weapon over the sides of the vehicle If your antenna accidentally touches a power line individuals who are in contact with vegetation or the ground could suffer death or sever injury For additional safety information refer to TB 43 0129 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment CAUTION SINCGARS HUB and ANCD batteries look similar and can be physically interchanged The HUB battery is 6 5 Volts
203. ence QREF SOI information from ANCD to ANOD task 5 47 Transfer selected SOI information from ANCD to ANOD 6 12 Transmit SOI information using Broadcast mode 6 21 Transmit updated FH data via net update Electronic Remote Fill task 6 19 Transmitter ehiaracterislies todo ioter Pretorio e iai dep nbl 2 3 Two digit Julian a pus te Base Ed m py 4 10 Use SIP ASIPHI asa RGU s 5 62 VAA Connectors MOdelS oobis 2 25 VAA Connectors G D E models ete tete 2 27 Vehicular Intercom set VIG eei t etd 3 10 LT U 3 10 COITpoHSs e 3 10 Operator controls ML 5 25 Operator maitena NGE ereen enar eee eei D rae tme PR res 8 18 PhiysICal dala iet qu tu 3 11 Vehicular Veh Rete Ft X tent 2 19 Performance dala C Hcc ERE 2 31 PHYS Call dala sectio tatit 2 30 AU 4 11 Index 8 PIN 073599 001 RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND Use Part Il reverse
204. equired STU equipment is provided primarily for peacetime non battlefield use but it can be used whenever commercial or military telephone circuits are available It is anticipated that STU transfer of SINCGARS related key and data will be especially useful during mobilization as well as peacetime management of widely dispersed Reserve Component forces Secure telephone units require use of proper COMSEC key Synchronous data modes are at 2400 4800 and 9600 BPS Interoperable Cryptographic Ignition Key CIK allows the use of seven terminals STU is compatible with US commercial DDN and international telephone systems STU meets requirements of NACSIM 5100A and is in compliance with MIL STD 461B RS03 The STU is a commercial off the shelf item and is not designed for outdoor all weather use TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 4c STU Physical Data MEASUREMENTS Height is 6 4 CM 2 5 IN Width is 22 9 CM 9 0 IN Depth is 25 4 CM 10 0 IN POWER Uses 115 or 230 Vac 50 60 Hz at 20 W nominal consumption BACK UP POWER Uses a lithium industry standard BR2325 battery to prevent loss of fill from power outage WEIGHT 3 6 KG 8 0 LB TEMPERATURE Operating temperature ranges are 0 to 70 C 32 to 122 F 3 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 5 VEHICULAR INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SET VIC AN VIC 1 3 5a VIC Components CONTROL CONTROL AMPLIFIER INTERCOMMUNICATION INTERCOMMUNICATION AUDIO FREQUENCY SET C 2298 VRC SET C 2297 VRC AM 178
205. er LS 671 sse Components of Short Range Radio in Single ASIP Radio Mount Components of Long Range Radio in Single ASIP Radio Mount SARM ER Oo o N 2 17 Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD Cables and Controls ccccccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeecaaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeaeeeeneesaas Front and Rear eene nennen ens Control Display Unit CDU Example of Company Example of Platoon Loadset How to Perform an nnns Hot Start Net Opening a Cold Start Net Opening Passive Late Net Entry Ete kt Changing RT Sync Time rennen nenne nnn nennen nennen Operator s CUE and Procedure NCS CUE amp ERF PrOCOQUt6 Sending Using ANOD sse nnne Receiving MK Using 0400 40 0 000 Sending Usin
206. er RECEIVE receive from Ancd Cfd Stu Pc Mx 4 Enter ANCD Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter LOADSET Connect to ANCD and press RCV WAIT c Perform data transfer 1 Press SEND on Source Transfer successful ANCD 2 Press RCV on Target select Replace iNsert ANCD data item name 3 Enter REPLACE Transfer successful Task is completed When replacing or overwriting keys new COMSEC and FH data must be named the same as those to be replaced or overwritten You may select Loadset Eset Key or Time The item selected for transfer to the Target ANCD must be the same as that selected for the Source ANCD MWOD multiple word of day is a term used in loading procedure for Have Quick radios found in selected aircraft radios Do not press SEND until ready to press RCV Then press RCV within 20 seconds of pressing SEND This screen will appear only if the data item name exists in the Target ANCD 6 8 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3d Transfer COMSEC Key From ANCD to RT NCS Option 1A DESCRIPTION This optional task enables an NCS to transfer COMSEC keys from an ANCD to a SINCGARS radio It is a variation of Primary NCS Task 1 Although the flowchart below shows the detailed procedure for transfer of a COMSEC key to an RT this procedure can also be used to transfer COMSEC keys from an ANCD to a KYK 13 or KYX 15 if desired TRANSFER COMSEC KEY FROM ANCD TO RT SUBTASK ACTI
207. er at division corps or higher headquarters ensures best overall usage of frequencies when developing hopsets SINCGARS radios will communicate with VRC 12 Series radios and similar radios of our Allies in the SC mode Also the retransmission RXMT feature can be used as the interface between FH and SC nets when appropriate Loadsets containing TEKs and TSKs are good to use for 30 days ANCDS provide an additional 30 days of reserve data In short there is no requirement to update data for 30 days and then the unit has another 30 days to get their ANCDs reloaded with new data 4 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 4 USE OF JULIAN DATE AND GPS ZULU TIME 4 4a Two Digit Julian Date DEFINITION TWO DIGIT DATE 1 JANUARY CHANGE CONVERSION APPENDIX IMPORTANCE 4 10 Change 1 Julian calendar days are normally numbered 1 through 365 or 366 with the year appended as a fourth digit The SINCGARS radio uses a special two digit form of Julian Date as a part of sync time The two digit Julian Date begins with 01 for 1 January and continues through to 00 repeating as necessary to cover the entire year In that the two digit Julian year ends on 65 or 66 for leap year every 1 January the Julian Date must be changed to 01 This can be done by 1 The NCS sending an ERF 2 Operators reloading time directly from an ANCD EGR or PLGR or 8 Operators manually changing the date in the radio by using the RT keypad
208. erator to adjust the audio level Turning knob clockwise increases level and counterclockwise decreases it The whisper feature is activated by pulling out on the VOL knob In the WHSP position the operator can speak softly whisper and the message will be heard at a normal audio level Figure 5 7 VOL WHSP TM 11 5820 890 10 8 COMSEC SWITCH The COMSEC switch provides five settings for control of RT COMSEC mode Only the CT COMSEC position is normally used in field operations Two of the positions require the operator to pull RV out on the knob to move into out of these settings Figure 5 8 COMSEC Switch COMSEC SWITCH POSITIONS AND USES POSITION PURPOSE PT This setting places the radio in plain text not secure mode To prevent accidental Plain Text selection of this position the operator must pull out on the knob to enter or leave the setting The radio must be set to the PT position when using the CUE feature CT This is the primary COMSEC setting for nets operating in the secure mode To Cipher Text make use of this setting RT must have been loaded with required COMSEC key or keys Use of the CT function essentially prevents the enemy from intercepting your communications TD This setting also provides for secure mode communications and is used when Time Delay needed to compensate for transmission delays Seek the help of a communications specialist if you think you need to use this feature
209. ertaining to the equipment Change 1 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 1 3 MAINTENANCE FORMS RECORDS AND REPORTs 1 3a REPORTS OF MAINTENANCE AND UNSATISFACTORY EQUIPMENT Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by DA Pam 750 8 as contained in Maintenance Management Update 1 3b TRANSPORTATION DISCREPANCY REPORT TDR DD 361 Fill out and forward Transportation Discrepancy Report TDR DD Form 361 as prescribed by Federal Property Management Regulation FPMR Code of Federal Regulations Title 41 Chapter 101 Public Contracts and T E lt D 2 D D 3 2 1 4 REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS EIR lt 3 D 2 2 o 7 3 o lt 3 2 c o 2 5 5 o 2 20 lt c c 2 c o ct 2 lt 2 5 2 gt us what don t like about your equipment Let us know why you don t like the design or performance Put it on an SF 368 Product Quality Deficiency Report Mail it to Commander U S Army Communications Electronics Life Cycle Management Command CE LCMC and Fort Monmouth ATTN AMSEL LC LEO S Fort Monmouth New Jersey 07703 5006 We ll send you a reply 1 5 HAND RECEIPT HR MANUALS This manual has a companion document with a TM number followed by
210. ess than 100 days different from net sync time New keypad with SIP features GPS connector AUX connector for HRCRD 2 wire adapter CDU or expansion module Figure 2 7 1 RT 1523F Features Change1 2 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 2 TECHNICAL 2 2a SIP ASIP Receiver Transmitter RT Enhanced Data Rates New Data Modes Enhanced Operating Mode RCU Function GPS Time Loading Internal FSK Detector 2 2b SIP ASIP RT Keypad General RCU 2 2 8 Change 1 The SIP ASIP RT offers enhanced data rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS where the N indicates new or enhanced rates The advantages of these enhanced data rates are better accuracy greater speed longer range and improved forward error correction Two new data modes are also provided Packet PCKT mode supports operations involving FBCB2 hardware and software RS 232 mode allows data messages to be sent from SIP ASIP RT to SIP ASIP RT using computers and commercial Xmodem communications software The ASIP RT offers Enhanced Operating Mode EOM EOM provides added security in addition to COMSEC security The SIP ASIP RT can be used as a remote control unit by selecting the RCU mode with the RCU key of the SIP RT keypad The RCU C 11561 can remotely control a SIP radio for voice and SINCGARS data modes but not for enhanced data modes SIP ASIP RTs can load GPS time from a PLGR or ASIP RT only EGR The SIP ASIP RT contains an interna
211. et headset LS YES Go to Step 4 LS is Working operational NO Replace item cont 2 i Is handset 2 Is now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 4 4 Verify Sync Time 1 Are ANCD and RT times within YES Go to Step 5 2 seconds NO Reload sync time cont 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 5 5 Verify FH Data 1 Is there FH data loaded in the YES Continue operational channel NO Reload cont 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Continue 3 Is correct Net ID loaded in YES Go to Step 6 operational channel NO Change net ID cont 4 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 6 6 Manpack Only Check Main 1 Does main battery need to be YES Replace battery cont Battery changed NO Go to Step 7 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 7 8 10 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 STEPS CHECKS ACTIONS 7 Perform Hot Start Net Entry 1 Do COMSEC FH data load in YES Continue RT NO Go to TS Guide 1 2 Is traffic now heard YES Problem is solved NO Continue 3 Can NCS be contacted YES Problem is solved NO See Unit Maintenance ANCD time may not be valid if it has been more than 24 hours since ICOM fill of radio For vehicular radios skip this step and continue with Step 7 Battery power can be checked by placing RF PWR in HI and pressing PTT Signal display of 2 of less indicates your battery is we
212. f a loadset plus sync time from an ANCD or SKL into a SINCGARS RT RT 1523A B C D E F With RT 1523 sync time is loaded via the RT keypad As a result of an ICOM fill all six channels of the radio are loaded with COMSEC key FH data and sync time After an ICOM fill is performed the operator needs only to call the NCS to enter the net PROCEDURE Performing an ICOM fill is one of the basic tasks required of all SINCGARS operators The procedure is simple Se Figure 4 7 below for the steps when using an ANCD Also see Primary Operator Task 2 Load COMSEC FH Data Sync Time into Radio Using ICOM Fill Turn radio and ANCD ON On ANCD select Radio Send Radio and ICOM from the ANCD menu Connect ANCD to the RT with proper fill cable Set RT FCTN to LD and COMSEC to CT Press LOAD button on RT All six RT channels are now loaded with COMSEC key FH data and sync time if loading RT 1523A B C D E F Figure 4 7 HOW TO PERFORM AN ICOM FILL Change1 4 15 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 5d Hot Start Procedure NCS REQUIREMENTS NCS requirements regarding the Hot Start net opening procedure are limited to setting the time of opening and ensuring that all net members receive the loadset to be used and correct sync time LOADING THE RT The operator participating in a Hot Start net opening performs an ICOM fill COMSEC key FH data and sync time prior to the announced time of net opening That is the only preparation th
213. f approximately 10 30 hours depending upon RT version and level of usage See Chapter 8 for additional data regarding service life expectancy of manpack batteries POWER DRAIN Manpack transmission maximum power draw is 3 25 A vehicular radio is 6 25 A CARRIER DEVIATION Carrier deviation voice is 6 5 kHz with audio input of 1 4 to 140 mV Change1 2 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 MICROPHONE Microphone input impedance is 150 ohms AUDIO Audio input minimum is 1 4 millivolts normal and 0 4 millivolts for whisper WHSP SQUELCH Squelch tone signal of 150 Hertz Hz is a part of all transmissions except when FCTN is set to SQ OFF 2 1c Receiver Characteristics SENSITIVITY Radio frequency RF signal sensitivity is 0 35 microvolt CHANNEL SPACING 25 KHz AUDIO Audio output impedance is 600 ohms with handset at AUD DATA or AUD FILL SQUELCH Receiver responds to 150 Hz tone with FCTN switch set to squelch on SQ ON or load LD when operating in SC mode POWER DRAIN Manpack receiver power draw is 225 milliamperes Vehicular receivers draw 0 762 amp for short range radio 1 094 amp for short range long range radio 0 942 amp for long range radio and 1 524 amp for long range long range radio 2 1d RT Model Differences Distinguishing Features RT 1523 Control knobs are affixed with side positioned Allen screws RT cover is affixed with slot headed screws Last two digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mod
214. function selector switch and a volume control INT CDR ACCENT CREW Ve CDR 207 ONLY LISTENING SILENCE INT ONLY _ pe RETRANS Q INSTALLATION POWER G Q Q SwiTen AUDIO INPUT LINE j AMPLIFIER AUDIO FREQUENCY AM 1780 VRC OR AM 7046 VRC VOLUME CONTROL INTER CONTROL INTER COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION SET C 2297 VRC SET C 2298 VRC Figure 5 20 VIC CONTROLS 5 25 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 AM 1780 CONTROLS AND USES CONTROLS PURPOSE POWER CKT BKR A two position ON OFF switch allows the user to initiate and terminate power to Circuit Breaker the VIC system ON OFF Supplies power to and removes power from crew boxes C 2297 and C 2298 MAIN PWR This switch provides three power settings normal intercom only and OFF Main Power 00 0F Removes all power from the VIC and radio system INT ONLY Allows communications among crewmembers but does not allow use of radios Intercom Only NORM Supplies power to intercom and radios and is the normal position used for VIC Normal INT ACCENT When ON this switch reduces the volume level of radio traffic intercom volume Intercom Accent level remains unchanged RADIO TRANS This switch allows selection of transmit capabilities or listening silence Radio Transmission CDR CREW Allows all crewmembers to transmit on radios CDR ONLY Allows commander only to tra
215. g Sending Net Update by 422402 100 0 Sending SOI by Broadcast Using ANOD 2 Retransmission Situation esee enne nnns nnne FH Net to FH Net Manpack Long Antenna Safety Precautions 2 Vehicular Antenna Safety Dismounted to Manpack Dismounted to a Vehicular Radio essen TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Figure Page Loddepeakdr 4 41 4 29 al eee 4 30 Control Monitor eene nnne ennt nnne nene 4 31 Wire Line Adapter Set nennen enne nnn snnt 4 32 GRA 39 Set P PM 5 1 SINCGARS RT Front 5 2 FCTN Function Switch x 5 3 MODE SWI E aa 5 4 ease 5 5 RF PWR SWIHGM is 5 6 DIM CONTON Ea 5 7 els P ETE 5 8 COMSEG SWIHGH 5 9 LABIUM M 5 10 PUT cn 5 11 SIP ASIP RT
216. g either HUB or ANCD batteries 8 26 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 3d Automated Net Control Device ANCD Main Power ANCD MAIN POWER Batteries used are 3 Duracel 3 Volt BA 5123 U BATTERY LIFE ANCD MAIN POWER Requires 3 Batteries BA 5123 Approximate Length of Expected Service TYPE OF USE NORMAL primarily SOI references HEAVY NCS frequent data transfers LOADED in OFF position 2 Mo Use of Alkaline batteries in the ANCD may cause damage to the equipment and is strongly discouraged 8 27 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 3e Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR Main Power HUB PLGR BATTERIES Batteries used are e Lithium Non rechargeable BA 5800 U e Nickel Cadmium Rechargeable e Rockwell 221 0134 010 Alkaline 8 Non rechargeable WB101 AA Lithium 8 Non rechargeable L 91 e Lithium Non rechargeable LS6 BA HUB MAIN HUB BATTERIES PLGR MAIN POWER AND HUB BATTERIES Approximate Length of Expected Service Syne Time only Automatic Standby Continuous This is the HUB battery PLGR is used as a source of SINCGARS sync time to include electronic loading of RT when required PLGR is not used for navigation in this computation 8 28 A 2 A 3 A 4 E COPE i DA Form 2028 DD Form 361 SF 364 SF 368 F S IELD MANUAL FM 4 25 11 FM 11 32 FM 24 18 TECHNICAL BULLETINS TB 11 5820 890 12 TB 11 5820 890 10 3 T
217. ge the radio s function It may be necessary to wait until Item 8 Communications Check to determine for sure that some controls do or do not function properly Damaged and cannot be used means that after visual inspection or operational check you determine that a piece of equipment for whatever reason is faulty and will not support your mission requirements or presents a safety hazard Use of the ICOM fill procedure is appropriate here but separate checks of COMSEC keys FH data and sync time elements are required Operators having special requirements NCSs for example should check those functions that are important to mission operations ERF for example Skip this step if unit SOP or the tactical situation prohibits transmitting Unless your mission is likely to require use of data mode or retransmission operations you do not need to perform these two checks 8 6 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 1d Operator Troubleshooting Guides RELIABILITY PROBLEMS CAUSES TS GUIDES UNIT MAINTENANCE While the reliability of the SINCGARS radio has been thoroughly proven in tests and troop unit experience an operator can expect to encounter some problems especially when the radio and associated equipment are used together for various reasons Four problems are experienced most often They are e Loading RT with COMSEC and FH data from ANCD fails e Operator is unable to contact the net NCS Operator hear
218. ghlighted border Either local position POS or a Waypoint WP display is displayed Use the ENT and arrow keys to select WP NOTE If necessary use ESC key as needed to return to main display 7 26 Change 1 7 61 Keypad Display CDU Task 4 DESCRIPTION DETAILED PROCEDURE 1 2 NOTES 1 Set the RT FCTN switch to REM Observe CDU main display Using UP A and DOWN keys select the MENU display field The selected field is boxed Press the ENT key to go to menu NOTE If necessary use ESC key as needed to return to main display The selected menu item is boxed Using UP 4 and DOWN V keys select KEYPAD Press ENT key The keypad is displayed Use the arrow keys and the ENT key to select the keypad controls The ESC key will always return you to the previous condition The selected control is highlighted in reverse video To activate the selected control press ENT The display will time out in a few seconds if the keypad is inactive If that happens when performing a key procedure you must begin again You cannot change to an Enhanced Operating Mode EOM using the CDU Instead set the RT FCTN switch to SQ ON set RT Mode using Preparation Task 1 in Chapter 5 then set the RT FCTN switch back to REM TM 11 5820 890 10 8 This task allows the operator to access all ASIP RT control functions from the CDU Change 1 7 27 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 6g Navigation Dis
219. gment the short antenna in situations where additional range is required and your situation permits use of a long antenna WARNING Before employing the long antenna during operations or training be sure you understand the safety precautions WARNING DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA COMES INTO CONTACT WITH OVERHEAD POWER LINES Never fully extend the long antenna directly under power lines If you must fully extend the long antenna near power lines power line poles or towers or buildings with overhead power line connections never come closer than two times the antenna height from the base of the power line pole tower or building Stop before you get close to the power line and check for clearance before passing needed either carefully tie down the antenna or remove the antenna to make sure that you can safely pass under the power line When mission permits use the short manpack antenna during operations on the move If you must use the long antenna on the move never pass under power lines if there is any doubt about overhear clearance For additional safety information refer to TB 43 0129 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment CAUTION Do not carry radio by holding the antenna Figure 4 21 MANPACK LONG ANTENNA SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 4 32 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 10b Survivable Low Profile Antenna SLPA AS 3916 SOURCE The Survivable Low Profile Antenna or SL
220. hannel is to be used for storing the net update ERF If the update is effective immediately the ERF will be stored in the operational channel If the update is to be made effective at a later time a channel other than the operational channel will be used for storage of the ERF update data It is assumed that the operator has the same COMSEC key TEK loaded in all operational channels of the radio Otherwise the operator would have to scroll the proper TEK to the new operational channel to have secure communications 5 54 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5h Perform CUE and Late Net Entry Special Operator Task 5 DESCRIPTION This task may be required when a radio has been out of the net for some period or has lost its sync time The preferred action is to try Passive Late Net Entry first See Primary Operator Task 4 This method requires the operator to load CUE and MAN frequencies cue the NCS in PT repeat the cue until a response is received switch COMSEC to CT to receive the NCS response use single channel mode and receive and store an ERF when it is sent A simpler method of re entering the net when the passive method does not work is the Hot Start procedure See Primary Operator Task 3 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Prepare radio to perform 1 Load CUE and MAN freqs See Primary Operator Task 1 CUE and ERF method into RT 2 Set CHAN to CUE and CUE signal goes through only when COMSEC to PT is set to PT
221. he operator is provided a small pocket guide containing abbreviated task procedures covering all operator requirements This pocket guide serves as a memory jogger for the trained operator precluding any need to memorize any aspect of SINCGARS radio operation TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 2 OPERATOR START UP PROCEDURE DRAW EQUIPMENT In a typical peacetime situation the operator will obtain required communications gear from a communications or supply facility Manpack operator s equipment will include a main power battery in addition to all radio components Vehicular radio operator s equipment may include a dismount radio including main power battery in addition to all of the vehicular radio components ANCD or SKL Depending upon unit policy selected operators will probably draw ASSEMBLY SKLs or ANCDs already loaded with proper COMSEC keys FH data and sync time for current unit operations When unit SOP calls for centralized control of SKLs or ANCDs the operator is advised when and where to obtain SKL or ANCD support Operators are expected to properly assemble manpack radios and install required vehicular radio components in preparation for net opening This includes connecting cables antennas handsets loudspeakers and any other components that are to be used CAUTION YOUR RT CAN BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER ATTACHMENT OF MANPACK ANTENNAS 1 To avoid damage turn the sleeve only not the antenna 2 Turning the antenna can
222. he back of the SIP RT the GPS J5 connector provides an interface to the VAA GPS connector or PLGR connection 44 AUD DATA The J4 AUD DATA connector supports general data communications at SINCGARS Data Rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 and 16 000 BPS and at Enhanced Data Rates of 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS The RS 232 interface allows transmission of data via SINCGARS SIP radios using computers and commercial Xmodem software If not using Packet PCKT data mode or the internet controller INC feature of the SIP radio all data devices must be connected to the AUD DATA port not to the SIP VAA J3 AUD FILL Handsets used with the SIP RT may be connected to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL connector NOTE Handsets will not function if connected to the front of the SIP VAA Change 1 5 15 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Connectors ASIP RT P1 System This connector provides RT power and signaling interfaces GPS CONNECTOR 45 2553 AYN p 5 5 5 NE SS CONNECTOR 5524 1 AUXILIARY lt AUD FILL CONNECTOR Figure 5 13 ASIP RT Connectors J6 Auxiliary Used to connect HRCRD handset two wire adapter or CDU On the RT 1523F is also used to connect an expansion module J5 GPS Enables a PLGR GPS fill cable or GPS antenna via GPS adapter connector in manpack configuration to be connected to the ASIP RT J3 AUD DATA The J3 AUD DATA connector supports general data communi
223. he various modes and procedures An NCS has lost or is about to lose contact with one of the net stations This could be caused by distance or line of sight obstacles such as mountains between the two stations Whatever the cause the answer is to establish an RXMT station at a site that will enable the NCS requesting station and outstation to continue or resume communications lij Figure 4 19 below note that the requesting NCS uses RADIO A the outstation uses RADIO B and the RXMT team uses RADIO C and RADIO D In RXMT configuration RADIO A communicates with RADIO B by passing traffic through RADIO C the RXMT cable and RADIO D RETRANSMIT CABLE RADIO C RADIO D RETRANSMIT STATION RADIO B OUTSTATION REQUESTING STATION UM HILL S ORHIGHESTPOINT Figure 4 19 RETRANSMISSION SITUATION 4 28 4 9b RXMT Capability Modes FH NET TO FH NET FH NET TO SC NET SC NET TO SC NET DATA SOURCES ANTENNAS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 With extensive fielding of the SINCGARS radio FH net to FH net RXMT links will probably be the normal mode of operation RADIO A and RADIO C use the same FH data including net ID Communications between these two radios is no different than that between any two radios of the same net RADIO B which is normally a member of this net is out of range or has lost line of sight In the FH to FH RXMT operation RADIO B and RADIO
224. how the present position of the ASIP RT according to the military grid reference system MGRS This display is updated every few seconds for real time position tracking If GPS information is not available from the ASIP RT the display will show NOT AVAILABLE DETAILED PROCEDURE 1 Verify that GPS is not OFF See EGR Task 2 2 Observe CDU display EGER FIELD 3 Using UP A and DOWN keys select the local position field The selected field has a highlighted border Either a local position POS or a Waypoint WP display is available in the second field Use the ENT and arrow keys to select POS NOTE If necessary use ESC key as needed to return to main display 4 When the local position display POS is selected the down arrow followed by the ENT key may be used to copy the local position into memory for pasting into a waypoint The entire field will change to reverse video when the down arrow is pressed 7 Waypoint Display CDU Task 3 DESCRIPTION This task is used to show the navigation solution to the last selected waypoint See CDU Task 5 to select and create waypoints If waypoint information is not available from the ASIP RT the display will show NOT AVAILABLE DETAILED PROCEDURE WAYPOINT DISPLAY 1 Verify that GPS is not OFF See EGR Task 2 2 Observe CDU main display 3 Using UP A and DOWN keys select the local position field The selected field has a hi
225. ht RT display does not show GOOD COMSEC alarm will not clear Self test ends with other than GOOD TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Item to Check Lab NN uud Equipment Not Ready Lab NN uud Procedure Available If uis With RCU set to CT SC LD Numbers 0 9 and channel shown a Press FREQ CLR Any test frequency 0 9 and enter cannot be entered CUE 31000 MAN 32000 CHAN 1 43000 CHAN 2 54000 CHAN 3 65000 CHAN 4 76000 CHAN 5 87000 CHAN 6 87975 Press STO for each entry b Any test frequency 0 9 cannot be stored Before DATA LOADING SC Frequencies Load SC frequencies SC frequency will not load in RCU COMSEC Keys Load COMSEC COMSEC key will not load in RCU 8 15 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Item to Operator Check Service Procedure COMM CHECK SC Mode FH Mode Plain Text Cipher Text Voice Data Check for sidetone Check ability to change RT channel from RCU Check voice comm in SC PT and FH CT Check SQ OFF while in SC mode If data comm is mission required check data comm in FH CT using mission related Equipment Not Ready Available If Sidetone is not heard Cannot change RT channel from RCU Cannot communicate in SC PT FH CT voice mode from RCU Cannot communicate in mission required data mode using mission related data data device device Check intercomm capability between RCU and radio Does not function properly means
226. i TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Chapter Para EEE CO OO NI Ooi BEC oo Po Oyo eA aise C1 ESS ee Ee BER CO COUN gt gt gt Change 1 Table of Contents Title Page INTRODUCTION Maintenance Forms Records and Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations EIR Hand receipt HR Manuals sse enne nnne Destruction of Army Electronics Materiel Security Classification and Preparation for Storage or Nomenclature Cross Reference 51 2 de Listo Glossa s IR Equipment Characteristics Capabilities and Features Location and Description of major Components sss Differences Between 2 nn PARTIE TRAD PEE E SINCGARS RADIOS AND COMPONENTS Manpack MP Radios essent nnne nennen Battery eene nennen Vehicular Veh Radios 2 440 Single Radio Mount SRM Radio 87 Control Receiver Transmitter 1156 C
227. ications is to load the required COMSEC key COMSEC ALARM The RT 1523 A B COMSEC alarm beeping sound must be cleared by pressing PTT twice in order to load COMSEC keys or continue normal operations The RT 1523C D E F will generate a constant tone and display PLAIN TEXT CALLS When a station operating in CT receives a call from a station using plain text PT the radio inserts a soft beeping alarm over the message to let the receiving operator know that the incoming message is not secure 4 2 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 1b Traffic Encryption Key TEK KEY A traffic encryption key TEK enables the SINCGARS radio to operate in a secure cipher text CT mode of communications The is loaded into the SINCGARS from an ANCD or other COMSEC fill device if desired CHANNELS A TEK may be loaded into all six channels of the RT or channel 6 may be reserved for OTAR use covered below Normally the same TEK is loaded into all five or six channels but any TEK may be loaded into any channel If for example it is necessary to communicate with elements of a different division you would load their TEK into the channel you intend to use for that purpose COMPATIBILITY In order to communicate in secure CT mode both the transmitting and receiving radios must be using the same TEK When using more than one TEK in your radio it is important to record which channel each TEK is stored in SCROLLING The SINC
228. icle 27 5 VDC power to the intercom CB1 ON OFF Switch DS1 Power indicator lamp 2 26 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 VAA Connectors C D E models 2 5i MODEL J10 REAR VIEW E1A C D MODEL REAR VIEW J10 Figure 2 19 SIP ASIP VAA Connectors 2 27 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 J1 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 E1 2A B P1 2 28 Change 1 RF PA Control RT A provides control lines and power supply for the RF power amplifier PA RS 422 RS 423 19 pin connector for full duplex connections Data B 6 pin connector used to couple VAA J4 to RT B AUD DATA port using a W 4 cable The W 4 cable is used only for Packet data mode operations Data A 6 pin connector used to couple VAA J5 to RT A AUD DATA port using a W 4 cable The W 4 cable is used only for Packet data mode operations RS 232 RS 423 19 pin connector that couples data transfer equipment to the VAA used for FBCB2 connection RT B System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT B RT A System Connector 27 pin system connector for RT A Provides for connection of Control Monitor Frequency Information Connector 12 pin connector for frequency information interface from RT A and RT B Dual SNAP connection for FHMUX RF PA Control RT B 14 pin connector for control of external RT B power amplifier GPS In 6 pin and coax rectangular connector interface for GPS receiver
229. in the ERF process prevents the operator concerned from communicating in the frequency hopping mode Because the Cold Start procedure is more demanding in coordination and operator requirements units normally use the Hot Start procedure SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare radio to receive an 1 Load MAN SC frequency See Primary Operator Task 1 ERF into RT 2 Load RT with required See Primary Operator Task 2 COMSEC FH data Ser FCTN 10 LD 4 Set COMSEC to CT 5 Set CHAN to MAN Display shows COLD ready to receive an ERF N A b Receive and store ERF 1 Standby until NCS sends the ERF 2 Note signal display activate Display shows HF XXX 3 Press STO Display shows STO 4 Press X 1 6 Display shows channel entered 5 51 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Make communications 1 Set CHAN to X 1 6 Channel where ERF was stored check 2 Set FCTN to SQ ON N A 3 Call NCS or respond to NCS Cold Start net opening is completed call The net may be opening in PT if communication security is not a consideration but use of CT for net opening is recommended as the best course of action If you are unable to contact your NCS or the NCS fails to contact you switch back to the MAN channel and standby for the NCS to contact you on that channel 5 52 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 50 Receive Net Update from NCS Special Operator Task 4
230. io sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter SETUP select iCom 4 Enter ICOM select Loadset None 5 Enter LOADSET select Loadset name ENTR DI 6 Select loadset and press Select ENTR iCom Nonicom 7 Press ABORT Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time Also use ICOM designation when preparing to fill an RCU Loadsets are identified with a D indicating default loadset followed by an I for ICOM or an N for Non ICOM ICOM fill will now load newly designated loadset 6 10 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3f Change Eset in One Channel of RT NCS Option 1C DESCRIPTION This optional task enables the NCS to change or replace the Eset FH data in one channel of the radio The preferred solution to this change requirement is to load a new loadset When loading a new loadset is infeasible this procedure allows the FH data in one channel of the radio to be changed without interfering with other channel loadings CHANGE ESET IN ONE CHANNEL OF RT SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Change Eset in one 1 Turn ANCD ON select channel of loadset Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter DATABASE select Display Modify Remove Copy bUild Enter MODIFY select Loadset name ENTR Select loadset and press ENTR Replace Delete ESET name ENTR Enter REPLACE select ESET select Eset and press ENTR Enter
231. ion of CDU Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED 7 6b Summary of CDU Tasks CDU TASK 1 CDU TASK 2 CDU TASK 3 CDU TASK 4 CDU TASK 5 CDU TASK 6 7 24 Change 1 These tasks allow the operator to control the ASIP RT locate his position on a map and display the directions to another radio or waypoint The full operation of the CDU requires the ASIP RT to have the Embedded GPS Receiver EGR installed The presence of the EGR may be verified by turning on the ASIP RT and pressing the GPS button on the keypad A display of NOGPS indicates no EGR present The ASIP RT with installed EGR may require up to 5 minutes to acquire GPS signals Operators who have access to a CDU should be familiar with these tasks RT Control This task is used to set the ASIP RT channel RF power output single channel or frequency hopping and plain text or cipher text Local Position Display and Copy This task is used to display the present position of the ASIP RT and copy it for pasting into a waypoint Waypoint Display This task is used to display the navigational solution to the last selected waypoint Keypad Display This task brings up and uses a display which graphically depicts the ASIP RT keypad Navigational Display This task is used to view select and edit waypoints and show the navigational solution to the waypoint Situational Awareness Display and Copy This task is used to display
232. ios operating in the FH mode to communicate it is essential that they contain the same set of frequencies and other variables commonly referred to as FH Data If EOM is used all radios must be using EOM 4 3b Frequency Hopping FH Data HOPSET TSK NET ID FH DATA COMMONALITY 4 6 Change 1 Frequencies made available for a SINCGARS radio to hop on are called a Hopset A typical hopset consists of what remains of the total 2320 frequencies after protected frequencies such as commercial television are removed Protected frequencies are frequently referred to as Lockouts In any case except for technical purposes lockouts are treated as an integral part of the hopset The pattern in which the radio selects frequencies to hop on is pseudo random as determined by the transmission security key TSK Depending upon the number of frequencies available for hopping and the TSK itself the exact sequence of frequencies used during any one second will not be repeated for long periods of time The remaining variable required for two or more frequency hopping radios to communicate is called the Net ID It is a three digit number 000 999 which controls where in the pseudo random sequence the radio begins to hop In short the term FH Data refers to Hopsets with Lockouts integrated TSK and Net ID Typically division sized units use the same Hopset and TSK for all their SINCGARS frequency hopping nets On the other han
233. irements of those items of equipment most often used in conjunction with your radio The intent of this paragraph is to give you a summary of operator maintenance tasks and provide appropriate references from which more detailed information may be obtained The associated items include C 11561 C U Control Receiver Transmitter RCU C 11291 VRC Control Monitor C M 1 Vehicular Intercommunications Set VIS LS 671 Loudspeaker LS AN CYZ 10 Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN PSN 11 Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR TD 1456 Frequency Hopping Multiplexer FHMUX C 12493 U Handheld Remote Control Radio Device HRCRD Control Display Unit CDU AN PYQ 10 Simple Key Loader SKL 8 2a PMCS for Control Receiver Transmitter RCU DIFFERENCES Major differences between the SINCGARS RT and RCU are these RCU does not accept FH data uses that data loaded into the companion RT RCU has speaker connection and switch in lieu of RT RXMT and ANT connectors RCU FCTN switch has an intercom ICM position in lieu of the RT remote REM position RCU SIG display lights when companion RT receives a signal RCU BATT key on first press provides RCU battery life indication on second press provides RT battery life indication If two wire connecting RCU with RT is cut or disconnected or RT FCTN is not set to REM RCU display shows OPEN Change 1 8 13 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 PREVENTIVE MAINTENAN
234. is important to understand that the times presented are the result of computations as well as experience Hours of service will vary depending upon how long the battery was in storage prior to use temperature when being used and other factors which cannot be clearly defined Even so these times offer the using unit a basis for planning battery requirements SCOPE Approximate length of expected service is stated for each item and version of equipment using the proper battery for each item 8 3b Manpack Radio RCU Main Power MAIN POWER Main power batteries used in the manpack radio and RCU are e Battery Non Rechargeable Lithium BA 5590 U Battery Rechargeable BB2590 U e Battery Rechargeable BB390B U Note The BB 2590 U requires the following items for recharging PP8498 U universal portable charger A 24 volt vehicular cable is available for the PP 8498 U See AAL for NSN s Only the Non Rechargeable BA 5590 is used in the following charts MANPACK BATTERY MANPACK RADIO MAIN POWER BA 5590 Approximate Length of Expected Service RF PWR in HI VOICE DATA FH amp CT RT 1523 RT 1523A D RT 1523B C RT 1523E F Normal Heavy NCS Standby STE Operator usage rate is defined as 9 minutes of receiving monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting on average NCS usage rate is defined as 2 minutes of receiving monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting on average Note Battery selection based on Cost
235. itiate intercomm Internet Protocol Julian Date key encryption key kilogram kilohertz pound liquid crystal display load Local Data Entry late net entry low line of sight lockout long range long range long range LTR MAN MB MHZ MK MM MP MSE MSRT MT MX NAV NCS NOGPS NOKEY NRI NUM OFST OPR OTAR PA PAM PC PCKT PLGR PM PMCS POS PSA PT TM 11 5820 890 10 8 letter medium manual mounting base megahertz manual keying minutes manpack mobile subscriber equipment mobile subscriber radio telephone mount fill device New or Enhanced Data Mode navigation net control station GPS Device Not Attached Required Key Missing net radio interface number offset operator over the air rekey power amplifier pamphlet personal computer Packet precision lightweight GPS receiver permanent memory preventive maintenance checks and services position power supply adapter plain text Change 1 D 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 PTRX PTT PWR PYRO QREF RCU RCV REM RF ROD RT RCU RT RV RWI RXMT SA SAASM SARM SC SDM SETDR SIG SIGO SINCGARS SIP SKL SNAP SOI SOP SQ SPKR SR SR D Plain Text Message Being Received SR LR push to talk SR LR D power pyrotechnic SRM STBY quick reference STO STU remote control unit SUFX receive SYNC remote radio frequency TB TCP report of discrepancy receiver transmitter
236. its PURPOSE The primary purpose of the LS 671 is to allow for remote transmitting and receiving of voice communications to the length of the LS 671 cable CX 13292 being used Cables are available in lengths varying from 3 to 100 feet FUNCTIONS At the LS 671 these functions can be performed seg Figure 4 30 below for controls available Radio can be turned ON and OFF by use of the power switch e connecting a handset to the LS 671 J2 the radio can be keyed and messages transmitted e Net traffic can be monitored by proper adjustment of the loudspeaker volume control ON OFF SWITCH CB1 HANDSET CONNECTOR Figure 4 28 LOUDSPEAKER LS 671 LIMITATIONS The remote capabilities of the LS 671 complement rather than replace those of the RCU Where the RCU supports remoting up to 4 KM the LS 671 is limited to 100 feet at most Also the LS 671 provides for only the most basic radio control functions ADVANTAGES The LS 671 is extremely useful for command posts and fire control centers where operations personnel are performing other than radio operator functions The limited remote capability of the LS 671 enables such personnel to operate the radio from their work station with minimum effort or movement Only occasionally is it necessary for a crewmember to move to the radio front panel to make control setting changes 4 41 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 11d Use of Control Monitor SOURCE The Control
237. kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 13 Control Monitor Physical Data ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT Control Monitor C 11291 Cable s CX 2 9 15 22 feet in length 2 8c C M Performance Data RADIOS One Control Monitor C M can control up to three radios mounted in vehicular amplifier adapters VAA A three position switch controls radio selection FUNCTIONS The Control Monitor may be used to control radio RF Power RT Mode Channel COMSEC keys and active standby status of C M SELF TEST A built in self test enables the Control Monitor to check its control functions through proper manipulation of C M controls RADIO CAPABILITIES Capabilities of the radios controlled by a Control Monitor are the same as those for any SINCGARS radio 2 38 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 9 LOUDSPEAKER LS 671 2 9a LS 671 Components INDICATOR LAMP DS1 HANDSET CONNECTOR Loudspeaker LS 671 Cable CX 13292 connects loudspeaker to MB Figure 2 23 Components of Loudspeaker LS 671 2 9b LS 671 Physical Data NOTE Weights are in kilograms measurements are in centimeters The numbers in parentheses show equivalent pounds and inches All weights are approximate all measurements are maximums Table 2 14 LS 671 Physical Data ITEM LENGTH WIDTH
238. l COMSEC Both the RCU and RT use a COMSEC key TEK to provide cipher text capability TEK can be loaded into the RCU from an ANCD using the standard ICOM fill procedure by selecting RCU rather than ICOM on the ANCD FH DATA The RCU does not require FH data When the net is operating in the FH mode FH data in the RT enables frequency hopping capabilities 4 34 FRONT PANEL TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RCU controls are as shown Figure 4 23 below They differ from the RT only in the following ways e front panel contains a speaker connector and control for LS 685 but has no antenna or RXMT connector e For the control the RT REM position is replaced with ICM meaning intercom KEYBOARD JISPLAY OL WHSP AUD DATA VOLUME WHISPER AUDIO DATA Figure 4 23 RCU FRONT PANEL 4 35 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CONFIGURATIONS The RCU may be used in conjunction with a SINCGARS radio in any of the following configurations Dismounted to a manpack radio See Figure 4 24 below BINDING r BINDING 77 POSTS M POSTS ADM TWO WIRE Figure 4 24 DISMOUNTED RCU TO MANPACK RADIO e Dismounted to a vehicular radio Sed Figure 4 25 below E1A E2A E1B E2B
239. l FSK detector circuit for use with the AD1 and TF data rates Use of the CX 13808 U DMD interface cable is no longer necessary In addition TACFIRE devices must be cabled directly to the SIP ASIP RT AUD DATA connector The keypad of the SIP ASIP radio is similar to that of earlier versions except four of the keys have been given new designations RCU GPS SA and CID Each is explained below The RCU key is used to select operating mode options of RT RCU EXT or LDE RT is the normal employment of the RT as a receiver transmitter Selecting RCU allows the SIP ASIP RT to be used as a remote control device EXT is a capability of the SIP ASIP radio that allows the radio to be controlled externally via the system connector The ASIP radio is automatically in EXT when proper interface and software is detected Selecting EXT disables the front panel controls of the RT EXT is used for GRM 122 testing It is important to ensure that RCU is NOT activated unless you want to use that feature and that EXT is not accidentally activated LDE stands for local data entry and represents a future capability of the SIP RT to communicate with its SIP VAA regarding data loads and requirements This feature is not currently used TM 11 5820 890 10 8 GPS 5 If GPS receiver is present EGR installed in ASIP RT pressing this key displays the current GPS setting If not set to OFF the RT is enabled to provide GPS position information to an external devic
240. le environment through use of electronic counter counter measure ECCM 1 12c EQUIPMENT FEATURES Refer to Chapter 2 detailed descriptions of SINCGARS radio system features Change 1 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 1 13 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS Refer to Chapter 2 detailed descriptions of SINCGARS configurations 1 14 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS Receiver Transmitter RT model numbers RT 1523 A B C D E F indicate successive versions of the RT each with increased capabilities and features RTs with identical capabilities are often referred to by Type as shown below System configurations AN PRC 119A D F or AN VRC 87A D F through AN VRC 92A D F are also referred to by their Type but note that the letter designations for RTs and VAAs and system configurations do not correspond to each other RT Type System Nomenclature RT 1523 ICOM Manpack AN PRC 119A RT 1523A Vehicular AN VRC 87A thru AN VRC 92A RT 1523B SRM AN VRC 87C RT 1523C SIP Manpack AN PRC 119D RT 1523D Vehicular AN VRC 87D thru AN VRC 92D RT 1523E ASIP Manpack AN PRC 119F RT 1523F Vehicular AN VRC 87F thru AN VRC 92F SARM AN VRC 87G and AN VRC 92G Differences between RT and VAA models have minor impact on operator tasks and procedures Mixing SIP and ASIP configuration components can affect radio performance and seriously degrade some radio functions The earlier model components typically lack capabi
241. le materials and to keep batteries cool NEVER use a Halon type fire extinguisher on a Lithium battery fire This will only increase the intensity of the fire In the event of a Lithium fire immediately EVACUATE THE AREA and contact the appropriate emergency authorities Class D fire extinguishers are to be used only by professional fire fighters RECHARGEABLE BATTERIES This includes BB 390 U Nickel Metal Hydride Ni MH and BB 2590 U Lithium lon Li lon batteries DO NOT leave batteries in equipment for long term storage more than 30 days Charge batteries in long term storage at least annually and charge them before inserting in equipment Before opening original packaging always examine the package for signs of leakage staining or other indications of battery damage DO NOT use a damaged battery Always charge a rechargeable battery on the appropriate charger according to the dictates of the manufacturer NEVER disassemble heat burn or incinerate these or any batteries CO or Dry Chemical fire extinguishers are suggested for fires involving these batteries Turn in batteries for disposal Dispose of them in accordance with local regulations b Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 NON RECHARGEABLE ZINC AIR BATTERIES This includes BA 8180 U and BA 8140 U Zinc Air Zn Air batteries DO NOT leave batteries in equipment for long term storage more than 30 days Before opening original packaging always examine the package for sign
242. listed in the PMCS table The term Mission Capable means that your radio is on hand and ready to perform its combat mission as pertains to the item being checked Your radio is Not Mission Capable when fault shown in this column is encountered and you are unable to correct the problem Wherever a check does not have an entry in this column problems should be corrected if possible but do not make the radio not mission capable In performing your PMCS it may be necessary or at least helpful to refer to the many graphics task performance procedures and explanations found elsewhere in this operator s manual Proper performance of PMCS steps requires that you have been trained as an operator know how to make best use of your Manual and Pocket Guide and have had at least some experience with the radio Although these PMCS are not difficult to perform they do require an understanding of operator tasks and procedures 8 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 1c PMCS for SINCGARS Radios PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SINCGARS RADIOS Item to Operator Equipment Not Ready Check Service Procedure Available If CONTROLS Check for cracked or Broken control does not RF PWR CHAN MODE FCTN DIM COMSEC VOL CB1 VAA CABLES RF W2 RF CG 3855 RF CG 3856 Audio Data W4 PA Power CX 13303 ANTENNAS AS 3683 AS 3900 AS 3916 AS 4266 broken controls Check for loose controls Check for frozen contr
243. lities and features of the later model components therefore when used together the limitations of the earlier model item may prevent operation at the later model s level of performance ASIP RT is used throughout this manual and is defined as one RT 1523E or one RT 1523F Unless otherwise stated the ASIP capabilities apply to both the RT 1523E and RT 1523F 1 15 AUXILIARY ITEMS The Automated Net Control Device ANCD Simple Key Loader SKL and Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR are to be authorized and employed in conjunction with SINCGARS SIMPLE KEY LOADER Simple Key Loader SKL AN PYQ 10 is replacing the Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 Wherever ANCD is mentioned in this Technical Manual the SKL may be substituted See TM 11 5810 410 13 amp P for detailed operating instructions of the SKL VEHICULAR INTERCOMMUNIATION SYSTEM Vehicular Intercommunications System VIS AN VIC 1 is being replaced by the AN VIC 3 series Refer to TM 11 5830 263 10 and TM 11 5830 340 12 for detailed operating instructions of the VIS 1 4 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CHAPTER 2 SINCGARS RADIOS AND COMPONENTS 231 SINCGARS RECEIVER TRANSMITTERS RT RT 1523 SERIES a RT Capabilities c i a sik Avan esti e a IER FR ER EET HERD hie b Transmitter Characteristics d Receiver Characteristics RT Model Differences Distinguishing 22 SIP ASIP Receiver Transmitter
244. ll retain all stored data while you replace the main battery The ASIP RT does not have a HUB battery it contains circuitry that retains fill for 15 minutes after main power is lost either turning off vehicular power or changing battery A HUB insert has been designed for vehicular applications that will accommodate a BA 5372 or AA batteries The insert will insure that fill will be retained during periods that vehicular power is turned off listening silence or other mission requirements BA 5372 U HUB AA CELL Figure 5 23 HUB Insert Change 1 5 65 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 WORST CASE Remember also that in the absolute worst case where you lose main power and your HUB is dead all you have to do is perform an ICOM fill including sync time using your ANCD or SKL The RT computes the battery condition by measuring time spent in the receive and transmit modes Operating the RT in receive mode for 210 minutes increases the battery condition value by one Transmitting for 24 minutes also increases the value by one The battery should be replaced when the value is 11 The Battery Life Indicator uses 12 to indicate the power exhaustion point not hours For estimated hours of battery life for different uses see Chapter 8 This clock shows that for normal 9 1 duty cycle operations FROM DISPLAY reading of 3 means you have used 4 about 1 4 of your battery a reading of 6 means half the power has been used up
245. loyment of the internet feature requires that the SIP ASIP RT be set to the Packet data mode 5 3c Remote Control Unit RCU Controls FRONT PANEL The front panel of the RCU is quite similar to that of the RT There is one additional control an ON OFF speaker switch The only other difference is that the REM position of the RT FCTN switch becomes ICM intercom used for talking with the radio operator over the connecting field wire RCU operator may call RT operator by setting FCTN to ICM and pressing CALL and PTT at the same time RF PWR RCV SIG COMSEC RF POWER CHAN RECEIVE SIGNAL KEYBOARD HOLD UP AUDI FILL SPEAKER CHANNEL DISPLAY BATTERY COVER MODE KEYBOARD SPKR FCTN OL WHSP UD DAT SPEAKER FUNCTION M OLD UP VOLUME WHISPER AUD O DATA SATTERY LOW Figure 5 15 RCU FRONT PANEL 5 18 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 3d Automated Net Control Device ANCD Controls KEYPAD The ANCD keypad provides the operator a 35 button keypad for communications with the ANCD The function of each key is briefly explained below 1 E Figure 5 16 ANCD Keypad ANCD KEYPAD BUTTONS AND USES BUTTON PURPOSE A thru Z Pressing these keys enters letters of the alphabet when LOCK LTR key is activated 0 Otus Pressing these keys enters numbers when LOCK LTR key is deactivated LAMP This key activates internal ANCD light for use with night vision goggles
246. mbat identification CID enabling GPS and enabling Situation Awareness Receive NCS personnel and operators who have the need to perform GPS and SA operation should become proficient in these tasks Combat Identification CID Load The CID number is entered from the keyboard Enabling GPS The ASIP RT is set to automatically provide your position locally to the CDU and remotely to the net Enabling Situation Awareness The ASIP RT is set to provide the position of the originating RT for each message received Load EGR Key from ANCD into EGR The GPS COMSEC variable is loaded into the EGR Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time from EGR This task allows an NCS or operator having an ASIP RT with EGR installed to obtain Julian Date and exact Zulu time directly from EGR TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 5 Combat Identification CID Load EGR Task 1 DESCRIPTION When the ASIP RT sends your position it must have a Combat Identification CID number with it You must also have a CID loaded to enable situation awareness SA COMBAT IDENTIFICATON CID LOAD SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Set RT to receive load Set RT FCTN switch to LD b Select CID Press CID 8 key on RT keypad RT display shows NO ID or CID c Clear the RT display Press CLR on RT keypad RT displays d Enter the CID number Press five keyboard number buttons RT display shows CID number e g to enter CID 12345 e Store the CID in the RT Press STO on RT key
247. n SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare radio for net ID 1 Set MODE to FH M Do not transmit while in the FH M change RT 1523 only position 2 SetFCTN to LD 3 Set CHAN to 1 6 To channel where net ID to be changed in now stored b Enter new net ID in RT 1 Press FREQ Display shows F XXX 2 Press CLR Display shows F ___ 3 Enter new net ID 3 digits Display shows F XXX 4 Press STO Display blinks new net ID is now stored 5 60 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS c Resume normal 1 Return MODE to FH if set N A communications to FH M 2 Set FCTN to SQ ON 3 Set CHAN to 1 6 as desired New net ID is now ready for use The RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio requires the MODE switch to be set to the FH M position in order to change the net ID of any channel Skip this step unless it is required If you have to switch to FH M be sure to return to FH as soon as the procedure for changing net ID is completed The RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio will allow you to change only the last two digits of the net ID Otherwise the procedure for changing net IDs is the same 5 61 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 6 SPECIAL OPERATOR TASKS SIP ASIP GENERAL In addition to the eight special operator tasks there are two Special SIP ASIP Operator Tasks These special SIP ASIP related tasks use the SIP ASIP RT as an RCU and send data from one computer to another ove
248. n ANCD to ANCD Special Operator Task 2 Alternate DESCRIPTION Although the principal SOI transfer task involves only QREF files there are operators who will require full SOI information Special Operator Task 2 Alternate is a variation of Task 2 allowing transfer of complete SOI files Dissemination within the unit is still accomplished by transferring SOI information for one ANCD to another When this special task is not performed by communications specialists or designated NCOs operators who need the full SOI information file must be trained to perform this task SUBTASKS ACTIONS 1 Turn ANCD ON RESULTS a Prepare Source ANCD for full SOI transfer select Soi Radio sUpervisor Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 2 3 4 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive Enter SEND Scroll 4 and press ENTR to select Set V b Press down arrow and scroll Set name nr to set desired Edn name tp ENTR 6 7 Press to select Do you want to transfer QREF Y N 7 Respond NO Do you want to specify groups to send Y N 8 Respond NO Do you want to specify a time pd to send Y N 9 10 9 Respond NO Include Suffix amp Smoke Pyro data 10 Respond YES send to Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 11 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCD V 5 49 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS 12 Connect A
249. n from the ANCD are ACTION RESULT ABORT Causes ANCD to return to SOI menu Arrow down Vv You must press arrow down to go to the next screen Arrow right arrow left Allows viewing of additional information and return Arrow up arrow down Allows viewing of each item DELETE To delete SOI set enter SOI then Set and press DELE key ENTER shown as ENTR Causes activation of the entry you have selected Hot keys Capital letter of item selected eg sufX allows direct shift from QREF to full SOI file J key for JUMP In Find causes ANCD to continue search for next item K key for KEEP Causes item being viewed to be stored in QREF file MAIN MENU Returns you to SOI RADIO SUPERVISOR menu 5 37 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 ACTION RESULT PgUP PgDN Moves you to top or bottom of the list ZERO red button Used in combat emergency only DO NOT use for deletions 2 Tolook up any of the up to 40 QREF items of SOI information contained in the QREF file perform the following steps ACTION Turn ANCD ON Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Enter QREF Last QREF item viewed appears in ANCD display Entering QREF brings to the display a list of up to 40 specific SOI items selected from NET SUFX PYRO or C S Once the QREF file has been entered scroll up or down to locate the SOI item desired Additionally all SOI information associated with each of these QREF items is available by ret
250. n of a second VAA OPERATING PROCEDURE To place the control monitor in operation and be assured it is performing properly follow the steps shown in Figure 4 30 Set VAA CB1 to ON VIC if used to ON RT FCTN to REM Test C M set C M FCTN to TEST check displays must read Gd and M or S at end of test Set RADIO switch to RT being controlled CONTROL must indicate M if not set FCTN to CONTROL and use INIT Switch to change Check initial displays RF at LO RT MODE at SC CHAN at 0 COMSEC at PT VAR blank If display shows F7 lift INIT and release Ud update should then appear and controls show as above Figure 4 30 CONTROL MONITOR OPERATION 4 43 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 11e Use of Wire Line Adapter HYX 57 COMSEC The Wire Line Adapter HYX 57 when used in conjunction with a KY 57 provides secure radio remoting capability COMPONENTS The Wire Line Adapter consists of local and remote units which are connected by field wire for operation CABLING Figure 4 31 below shows the set up for remoting a SINCGARS radio using an HYX 57 and KY 57 REMOTE HYX 57 CX 13072 13310 Figure 4 31 WIRE LINE ADAPTER SET UP 4 44 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 11f Use of Remote Control Device C 2329 GRA 39 COMSEC SET UP CABLE PART OF C 2329 The Remote Control Device C 2329 GRA 39 also provides for remoting of SINCGARS ra
251. n when required Figure 4 15 RECEIVING MK OTAR WITH ANCD SENDING AK OTAR To use an ANCD to send a new TEK to net members by AK OTAR the NCS will follow the steps shown in Figure 4 16 Blso see Special NCS Task 4 Send TEK to Net Operators Using AK Method of OTAR Prepare NCS radio for AK OTAR FCTN to LD MODE to FH M COMSEC to CT and DATA to OFF Prepare NCS ANCD to send AK OTAR turn ON enter Radio COMSEC and AK select key Alert operators to standby press SEND Load AK OTAR TEK into NCS radio select key and press LOAD STO CHAN on RT Update KEK used for AK OTAR enter VU select KEK and press RCV on ANCD Load updated KEK into NCS radio enter text ID Ld and KEK LOAD STO and 6 Figure 4 16 SENDING AK OTAR WITH ANCD FOLLOW UP ACTIONS The NCS sending an AK OTAR needs to do two things after sending the new TEK to net members First while the new TEK is automatically loaded into receiving station radios it must be loaded from the ANCD into the NCS RT following the AK OTAR Also while the KEK in receiving radios is automatically updated it must be updated by the sending NCS The NCS should always have his primary net s KEK in his RT Change1 4 25 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RECEIVING AK OTAR Although sending an AK OTAR demands several actions on the part of the sending NCS net operators need do nothing except stay off the PTT to receive the new TEK Special features of the AK OT
252. name nr Edn name tp 6 Press ENTR to select SOI Do you want to transfer and edition desired QREF Y N 7 Respond NO Do you want to specify groups to send Y N 8 Respond YES Scroll N amp press ENTR to select groups 9 Press ENTR to select groups 1 groups selected desired Keep selecting Y N 10 Respond NO when through Do you want to specify a time pd to selecting send Y N Respond YES Enter Time Pd gt 11 12 Enter Time Period desired Include Suffix amp Smoke Pyro data 13 Respond YES Send to Ancd Pc Broadcast 6 12 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS 14 Enter ANCD Do you want to save this new SOI set Y N 15 Respond YES New SOI set name 16 Enter SOI set name Connect ANCD to ANCD 17 17 Connect ANCDs and Press SEND to send press down arrow WAIT b Prepare Target ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON select selected SOI transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Pc_ Broadcast 5 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCD V 6 Press down arrow Press RCV to receive WAIT 1 c Perform transfer of 1 Press SEND on Processing Please wait selected SOI Source ANCD shows of bytes sent Sending of SOI data is completed 2 Press RCV on Target Processing Please wait ANCD show
253. ne channel on the old TEK and sends the MK OTAR to remaining Target NCS as contact is re established or at a prescribed time 6 25 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4f Send TEK to Net Operators Using AK Method of OTAR Special NCS Task 4 a b 6 26 DESCRIPTION This procedure enables an NCS to transfer electronically a TEK not a KEK directly from the NCS ANCD to net member radios In the AK method the TEK transferred to net member radios automatically and instantaneously replaces the TEK being used Also the KEK in net member radios is automatically updated changed during the AK procedure After sending a TEK by AK OTAR the Source NCS must load the new While the AK method of OTAR requires no action on the part of receiving net members it is quite demanding of the Source NCS SEND TEK TO NET OPERATORS USING AK METHOD OF OTAR SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS i SA FET OLD Prepare Source NCS radio to send AK OTAR Prepare Source NCS ANCD to sent AK OTAR 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Set COMSEC to CT Set DATA to OFF Turn ANCD ON Enter RADIO Enter COMSEC Enter AK Press PgUP PgDN to KEKs desired then press ENTR Enter QUIT Press PgDN to TEK desired then press ENTR select Soi Radio sUpervisor Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time vG Ld Rv Ak Mk vU Select key qUit name number Select key quit name number Select key name number Connect to RT and
254. nels unchanged only by receipt of an ERF and storing it in the channel to be changed Nothing will take your radio OUT of a FH net quicker than changing sync time unintentionally Normally a SINCGARS operator loads sync time in preparation for net opening and does not touch the TIME button thereafter Change1 4 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 NCS CONTROL OTHER NETS COMMON SYNC TIME DIFFERENCES The NCS radio and only the NCS radio uses the FH M MODE position In this mode the NCS radio automatically brings the time of all net radios back into synchronization every time the NCS transmits In short when an operator is monitoring the operational net there is little or no possibility that your radio will drift out of proper sync time Remember that the SINCGARS radio can transmit or receive on only one channel at a time In order to keep your radio in sync with nets other than your operational net you need to check into or monitor each of the other nets at least once every 24 hours With the fielding of the Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR and Embedded GPS Receiver EGR all units have been provided a ready source of highly accurate GPS time By opening all nets on GPS time and updating NCS RT sync time to GPS time daily all nets of a division corps or larger force are continuously kept within the 4 second window required for FH communications When common sync time is maintained there is no need to enter or monitor a
255. ng d Set RT Mode 1 Press MENU until MODE Display reads SC FH FHM FH2 2 Press CHG for desired MODE FH2M e Set COMSEC 1 Press MENU until CMSC Display reads PT CT TD RV 2 Press CHG for desired CMSC setting f Set Backlight 1 Place RT in SQON Backlight lights 4 settings Low to High 2 Press FREQ Backlight then OFF 3 Press CHG until desired setting Default settings are VOL 5 CHAN 1 PWR LO MODE FH COMSEC CT FH2 and FH2M are used for Enhanced Operating Mode EOM The RT must have FH fill for FH2 mode to be selectable In FH2 mode RT display also shows M2 Radios must use the same FH mode either FH and FHM or FH2 and FH2M to be able to communicate Change 1 5 29 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 44 Load Single Channel Frequencies into RT Primary Operator Task 1 DESCRIPTION The SINCGARS operator is required to perform this task in preparation for the employment of single channel communications participation in Cold Start net openings use of the CUE and ERF method of late net entry and for single channel frequency updates The operator determines the required single channel frequencies from the ANCD or another source These frequencies are then loaded into the radio by use of the RT keyboard DETAILED FLOWCHART Operators perform the actions shown for each subtask in the order shown below Results shown are ANCD display messages dark bordered boxes or RT display messages in the form of Displa
256. nges fast rates work well For longer ranges slower data rates perform better If data is sent through an RXMT site RXMT radios must be set to the same EDM data rate as the outstations Select data rate using PC data transfer software i e Procomm connect PC to RT via data cable Select RS 232 on RT press ENTER on PC PC should indicate the RT connected at xxxx the PC rate you selected If a problem is encountered repeat above steps If voice mode has priority of use in your net it may be necessary to wait for a quiet period to send data messages Pressing PTT will not interrupt data traffic Doing so merely stops the receipt of traffic at your radio 5 63 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 7 OTHER OPERATOR PROCEDURES 5 7a Battery Life Condition Indicator MANPACK RADIOS DURING ASSEMBLY IF USED BATTERY IN COMBAT FOR TRAINING RECORDING USAGE 5 64 Change 1 Manpack and dismount radios are battery powered A Battery Life Indicator built into the SINCGARS RT will give you an estimate of battery usage which you must convert into an estimate of remaining battery life During radio assembly note if the main power battery is new or used If it is used note the number written on the side of the battery If battery is used upon completion of radio assembly load battery life indicator number on side of battery ASIP RT will display a fuel gauge battery life 1 8 increments 8 is full 0 is empty No action
257. ning COMSEC keys CUE channel frequency Enhanced Data Modes Enhanced Operating Mode Electronic counter countermeasures D 6 Change 1 DEFINITION Net member operators designated by the NCS to complete net openings respond to CUE calls displace after using SC mode if appropriate and take over for NCS when requested Hand held device used for loading RT with COMSEC FH data and sync time also replace paper SOI Number read from manpack display providing an estimate of battery power used and remaining Method of transmitting SOI information from one ANCD to another using SINCGARS data mode RT switch positions in which COMSEC keys and FH data or single channel frequencies may be loaded stored and used Method of opening a FH net in which each member loads COMSEC and FH data and stands by for receipt of sync time sent electronically by the NCS Traffic Encryption Key TEK and Key Encryption Key KEK required for cipher text communications and over the air rekey operations SC frequency and designated channel used to contact net NCS when caller has non FH radio or has lost contact with the FH net may also be used as normal SC channel Capabilities of the SINCGARS SIP radio in which forward error correction speed range and accuracy of data transmission are materially improved Four enhanced data rates 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N and two new data modes Packet and RS 232 are provided by the SIP AS
258. nnector connected to AUD DATA or AUD FILL on RT and P2 right angle connector connected to 6 pin connector on battery box CY 8523C Connected to AUX connector J6 on manpack ASIP RT Using the CDU in a vehicular configuration requires the vehicular GPS kit adapter cable Change1 2 29 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5 Vehicular Radio Physical Data Table 2 8 Vehicular Radio Components Physical Data Component Weight kg Ibs approx Mounting Base MB 9 2 MT 6352 Series 16 1 15 9 4 3 4 6 20 3 Vehicular Amplifier Adapter VAA 11 0 AM 7239 Series 15 2 14 4 7 6 24 3 Vehicular Antenna 5 3900 112 8 SINCGARS Low Profile Antenna SLPA 5 3916 82 6 nia Handset HS a H 250 n a n a Loudspeaker LS 12 6 1 1 LS 671 4 2 4 9 6 3 2 4 Power Amplifier PA 3 1 AM 7238 Series 12 1 27 5 3 6 8 Power Amplifier Mount PA Mt MT 6353 13 6 5 8 5 1 RT 1523 10 0 10 7 34 14 7 RT 1523A 10 0 10 7 3 4 15 2 RT 1523B C D 10 0 10 7 34 13 7 RT 1523E F 10 1 5 3 34 8 0 C 11291 4 6 5 9 4 0 3 0 2 30 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5 Vehicular Radio Performance Data Table 2 9 Vehicular Radio Performance Data DATA SR RADIO HIGH HI 600 4800 BPS 3 KM to 5 KM 16000 BPS 1 KM to 3 km DATA LR RADIO POWER AMPLIFIER PA 600 2400 BPS 5 KM to 25 KM 4800 BPS 5 KM to 22 KM 16000 BPS 3 KM to 10 KM EDM DATA SR Radio 1
259. nother net to remain within that net s sync time Any net you need to enter whether a part of your loadset or not is readily available without concern for sync time Operational differences in terms of sync time are shown in below RT VERSION NORMAL COMM PASSIVE LATE NET ENTRY CUE AND ERF Figure 4 4 SYNC TIME OPERATIONAL DIFFERENCES 4 8 Change 1 4 3d Advantages INTERCEPTION JAMMING LOCATING FREQUENCY SHARING COMPATIBILITY UPDATE PERIODS TM 11 5820 890 10 8 In addition to the built in COMSEC capability of the SINCGARS radio it confronts an enemy attempting to monitor friendly traffic with the rapid change of frequencies over a wide range To intercept friendly traffic an enemy must be able to match the FH data and sync time of the friendly net Jamming a SINCGARS FH net can be done but only with extraordinary effort and commitment of equipment on the part of the enemy Tests have shown that even when 30 of the FH channels have been jammed a significant achievement voice messages are still quite understandable Although it is relatively easy for an enemy with direction finding capabilities to accurately locate stations broadcasting in SC mode experience has shown that it is nearly impossible to determine the location of an FH station SINCGARS hopsets because of the rapidity of frequency can include frequencies used by single channel nets and mobile subscriber equipment MSE The frequency manag
260. nsfer 1 Receive initial call from N A sending station 2 Coordinate STU transfer Proper STU keys 2400 BPS preparations PT CT voice checked b Prepare ANCD for 1 Turn ANCD ON select STU transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup Comsec Time 3 Enter RECEIVE receive Ancd Stu Pc Mx 4 Enter STU Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter Loadset Database Connect to STU and press RCV Key Eset as desired WAIT c Receive COMSEC FH 1 Ensure you are ready for N A data by STU transfer sender to press SEND 2 Place your STU in secure N A data mode 3 Press RC V in coordination Receiving final data with STU sender Transfer successful Loadset database key or Eset may be selected for the STU transfer Time cannot be transferred by STU The term MWOD is used in loading the Have Quick radio found in selected aircraft Do not press RC V until sending station is ready to press SEND 7 13 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 3e Send SOI Information From ANCD to ANCD via STU STU Task 3 DESCRIPTION This task permits an NCS or communications specialist to transmit SOI information by telephone classified or unclassified from an ANCD at one location to an ANCD at another location Proficiency of the sender and receiver in the employment of the STU is a prerequisite for performance of this and the following STU task SEND SOI INFORMATION FROM ANCD
261. nsmit on radios LISTENING SILENCE Prevents transmission on radios INSTALLATION This three position switch is for use of maintenance personnel only Crewmembers should not move switch setting 5 26 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CREWBOX C 2297 amp C 2298 CONTROLS AND USES CONTROLS PURPOSE FUNCTION SELECTOR This primary switch controls access to intercom and radios A and B Talk and listen on Intercom Talk and listen on radio A and Listen only on radio B Talk and listen on Intercom and Talk and listen on radio A Commander can Talk and listen on Intercom and Talk and listen on radio B Other crewmembers can Listen only on Intercom and Talk and listen on radio B INT ONLY Intercom Only Talk and listen on Intercom but Cannot talk or listen on radios VOLUME The volume control adjusts the audio level for headsets connected to that crewbox SIG EXT OFF This control is used only in the SIG position Other settings have no function with the SINCGARS radio 5 27 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 3i Control Display Unit CDU CONTROLS The CDU handset is menu driven Step through the menu using the four ARROW keys and the ENT and ESC keys Select functions using the ARROW keys and the ENT key The ESC key will always return the menu to the previous condition The 3 key turns on off backlighting of the display which will turn off after 7 seconds of inactivity Figure 5 21 CDU Controls CD
262. nt to transfer QREF Y N 7 Respond YES send to Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 8 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCD 4 9 Connect ANCDs and press Press SEND to send WAIT down arrow 5 47 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Prepare Target ANCD 1 ANCD ON select for QREF SOI transfer Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu 5 Enter ANCD Connect ANCD to ANCD V 6 Press down arrow Press RCV to receive WAIT c Transfer QREF SOI from 1 Press SEND on Source Processing Please wait ANCD to ANCD ANCD shows of bytes sent Sending of SOI data is completed 2 Within 20 seconds press Processing Please wait RCV on Target ANCD shows number of bytes sent Receive operation was successful develop QREF file merely scroll to the SOI items desired and press for KEEP to place each item in the QREF file You must respond YES to proceed This screen appears only if a QREF file is stored in your ANCD Do not press SEND on Source ANCD until you are ready to press RCV on Target ANCD then press RCV within about 20 seconds of pressing SEND NOTE See Special Operator Task 2 Alternate if you wish to transfer a full SOI information file 5 48 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5e Transfer Full SOI Informatio
263. ntenna the antenna connections of the four radios are routed to the multiplexer and the multiplexer then connects to a single common antenna To provide frequency hopping information to the multiplexer the SNAP control signals provided by the VAA must be connected to the multiplexer one SNAP cable per VAA Vehicular DC power 22 to 32 Vdc must also be supplied to the multiplexer through J2 on the Power Amplifier Mount MT 6353 VRO or through J2 on the SRM Mounting Base MT 6576 VRC The only two operator controls on the multiplexer are the POWER switch and the RADIO PRIORITY switch The POWER switch must be placed in the ON position to use the FHMUX the POWER switch can be turned ON and left ON if the DC power is controlled remotely by CB1 on the VAA Figure 3 3 POWER Switch The RADIO PRIORITY switch position is set based on the desired operating scenario In the EQUAL position all four radios connected to the multiplexer will have equal communications priority In the 1A 1B 2A and 2B positions the selected radio will have slightly higher priority than the other radios whenever there is frequency conflict a frequency conflict is when two or more hopping radios want to communicate on the same frequency at the same instant In the 1 1 position radios 1A and 1B operating in the retransmit mode have higher priority than radios 2A and 2B Normally the switch will be set in the EQUAL position but if desired higher priori
264. o MAN channel Upon caller s request send ERF on MAN channel Return to operational channel and check communications Immediately displace to new location if enemy is believed to have direction finding capabilities Alt NCS normally responds to CUE calls to preclude NCS displacement Figure 4 13 NCS CUE amp ERF PROCEDURE Change1 4 21 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 7 PERIODIC UPDATING 4 7a COMSEC Keys TEK Traffic Encryption Key TEK must be updated replaced at least every 30 days KEK Key Encryption Key KEK must be replaced at least every 90 days 4 7b FH Data HOPSET Hopsets do not require periodic change and may remain unchanged throughout an operation Hopsets may change at any time because of operational requirements TSK Transmission Security Key TSK must be replaced at least every 30 days the same frequency as TEK NET ID Net IDs do not require periodic change and normally remain unchanged throughout an operation They may be changed at any time for operational reasons 4 7c SOI Information DAILY The following SOI items change every 24 hours call signs suffixes expanders CUE frequency MAN frequency SC frequencies for channels 1 6 and sign countersign 10 DAYS Smoke and pyrotechnic signals change every 10 days NO CHANGE Unclassified call words and their associated suffixes and expanders DEFINITIONS A five day package of SOI information is called a set a ten day package is referred to as an edi
265. o another through use of the ANCD in conjunction with a Secure Telephone Unit STU PLGR The Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR can be loaded with the required operational key through use of the ANCD EGR The Embedded GPS Receiver EGR can be loaded with the required operational key through use of the ANCD 3 1b ANCD Characteristics CASE The ANCD is housed in a weather resistant case that provides a fill connector cryptographic ignition key CIK port and battery access cover as the only external openings LID A hinged lid allows access to the ANCD LCD display KEYPAD A 35 key keypad enables the operator receive store transfer and use ANCD data NIGHT VIEWING An internal ANCD lamp enables viewing of the display and keypad when night goggles are employed BACKUP MEMORY The ANCD will retain stored data for up to two minutes to enable the operator to change batteries when required 3 1c ANCD Physical Data DIMENSIONS Length 16 1 cm 6 3 in Width 11 2 cm 4 4 in Height 5 0 cm 2 0 in POWER The ANCD uses three 3 V lithium batteries WEIGHT With batteries installed the ANCD weighs approximately 2 pounds CAUTION SINCGARS HUB and ANCD batteries look similar and can be physically interchanged The HUB battery is 6 5 Volts while ANCD batteries are 3 Volts each If three HUB batteries are mistakenly placed an ANCD the ANCD will be destroyed Placing one ANCD battery in the ICOM SIP radio HUB position will
266. o create a tone and CALL message at companion radio by setting FCTN to ICM and pressing CALL and PTT at the same time With radio FCTN set to REM the radio operator can call the RCU operator by merely pressing the CALL button and PTT at the same time The following functions can be performed by the RCU operator located up to 4 KM away from the radio Single channel frequencies may be loaded and offset ERFs may be sent and received Radio MODE may be changed SC FH FH M Radio FCTN may be changed radio will transmit and receive only in the REM position Radio channels may be changed COMSEC positions of PT and CT may be selected COMSEC keys may be selected by scrolling Radio data rates may be selected OPERATING RULES TM 11 5820 890 10 8 The following rules apply to the operation of the RCU in conjunction with a SINCGARS radio They are made necessary by the manner in which the two components work together It is important that they be followed to preclude operational problems Ensure the RCU is turned ON before setting the radio FCTN to REM otherwise data will be lost in the radio COMSEC keys in the radio cannot be cleared from the RCU only at the radio The RCU display will show OPEN whenever the connecting field wire is disconnected or cut or when the companion radio FCTN is set to other than REM If the connecting field wire is disconnected or cut the radio automatically changes FCTN to STBY When th
267. o transmit and receive Interference is the accidental disruption of communications by friendly sources For practical purposes the following coverage of jamming includes both situations Anti jamming includes any corrective action taken by the operator to work through intentional jamming and accidental interference IDENTIFICATION If you are being jammed you may hear strong static strange noises random noise or no noise or signals at all These signals depend upon the type of jamming signals and whether your net is operating in single channel SC or frequency hopping FH mode The simplest method the enemy can utilize to disrupt your communications is to transmit noise or audio signals on your single channel operating frequency or on multiple FH frequencies during FH operation If the enemy can generate enough power on your hopset frequencies it is possible that your communications capability will be disrupted or even stopped While SINCGARS is jam resistant due to it s frequency hopping capability in the event that SINCGARS is jammed it may be necessary for you to take corrective actions The action you take depends on the type of jamming or interference that is disrupting net communications as well as the authorized FH hopset frequencies that are available to your net If you suspect you are being jammed look for one of the specific symptoms shown in the table below SC OPERATIONS Jamming anti jamming procedures for SC mode of operation
268. odes It cannot be used for enhanced data modes RCU RT COMSEC must be set to PT to talk on orderwire 5 62 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 6b Send Data Via RS 232 Mode Special Operator Task 10 STEP ACTION RESULT 1 Ensure computer has required commercial SIP ASIP radio will Accept any program offering communication program loaded a widely used file transfer protocol 2 Connect cable from computer to AUD DATA This data method does not require SIP ASIP VAA connector on the SIP ASIP RT functions 3 By voice alert receiving station that data Also coordinate data rate to be used if not message is to be sent via RS 232 designated by the comm program or unit SOP 4 Select EDM rate to be used for RS 232 See below for steps required to select EDM data transmission rate 5 Using computer prepare data message to be N A sent or load your computer with data Check net to ensure that traffic is not heard or Need clear net to ensure that data message goes noted by signal display through 7 Follow communication program procedures to Control is from computer SIP ASIP radio serves as send and receive data messages data communications carrier Both sending and receiving stations must use the same or compatible Xmodem communication program Any one of four enhanced data rates are used for RS 232 traffic 1200N 2400N 4800N and 9600N BPS Selection is based primarily upon the distance between stations For shorter ra
269. ols Check for missing control knobs Check for missing cables Check for proper installation Check tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cables Check for proper installation Check for proper grounding Vehicular radios Check for broken antenna parts Check for missing antenna parts Check for tie downs and antenna tips function properly Loose control does not function properly Frozen control does not function properly Knob missing and control does not function properly Cable is missing Cable is damaged and cannot be used Antenna is not properly grounded Antenna part broken and cannot be used Antenna part is missing TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Item to Operator Equipment Not Ready Check Service Procedure Available If 4 Before POWER Manpack Check for presence of a Main battery is missing and main battery cannot be replaced Vehicular Check for availability vehicle power and cannot of vehicle power be corrected Either radio Move COMSEC from RT display does not light Z to PT adjust DIM move FCTN from OFF to Z FH check that RT display lights 5 Before SELF TEST With FCTN in Z FH RT display does not show check that display GOOD shows GOOD Move COMSEC to CT b COMSEC alarm will not and check that alarm clear will clear Move FCTN to TST Self test ends with other and check that RT than GOOD displa
270. om ANCD to ANCD Via STU This task allows an NCS or communications specialist to send classified COMSEC keys and FH data from an ANCD at one location to an ANCD at another location regardless of distance by commercial or military telephone Receive COMSEC Keys FH Data Into An ANCD Via STU This task enables an NCS or communications specialist to receive and store an ANCD the COMSEC keys and FH data sent from another ANCD by telephone Send SOI Information From ANCD to ANCD Via STU This task permits an NCS or communications specialist to transmit classified SOI information from an ANCD at one location to an ANCD at another location by telephone Receive SOI Information Into An ANCD Via STU This task allows an NCS or communications specialist to receive and store in an ANCD that classified SOI information sent from one location to another by telephone TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 3c Send COMSEC Keys FH Data From ANCD to ANCD via STU STU Task 1 DESCRIPTION This task allow an NCS or communications specialist to send classified COMSEC keys TEK and KEK and FH data hopsets TSK Net IDs from an ANCD at one location to one at another location regardless of distance via commercial or military telephone circuits SEND COMSEC KEYS FH DATA FROM ANCD TO ANCD VIA STU SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Coordinate transfer by 1 Contact receiver m 2 Coordinate transfer Proper STU keys 2400 BPS PT CT preparations voice checked b Pre
271. on or larger force are accessible by merely changing to the proper net ID NO EXCEPTIONS With GPS time readily available to all SINCGARS NCSs and operators there is no reason to use other than GPS time for SINCGARS sync time 4 4c Common Zulu Time IMPORTANCE Zulu time is commonly used for military message dating to provide a common basis of time around the world Zulu time is used as basic SINCGARS sync time to ensure that all nets are using the same time especially important when operating near a time zone boundary AVAILABILITY The PLGR provides both local and Zulu time either may be selected and read or transferred directly from the device APPPENDIX Appendix Alto this manual provides a time zone map with Zulu time highlighted For example when Zulu time is 2400 hours local time in New York is 1900 and in California it is 1600 Change1 4 11 TM 1 1 5820 890 10 8 4 44 Cross Net Communications 4 12 ONE NET ONLY FH M POSITION RT CLOCKS COMMANDERS MONITORING Unless there is but a single FH net operating a totally unrealistic battlefield situation there is great advantage from the use of common sync time The NCS radio automatically maintains sync time control 4 seconds for that one net With a separate clock for each FH operating channel sync time is automatically maintained for your operational channel and the other four or five nets you have loaded into your radio Commanders aircraft
272. on the back of the operator for dismounted operations ASIP radio has an internal battery compartment and requires no battery box Single designated station per net requiring use of the FH M mode position and performance of net control tasks assisted and supported by designated alternate NCS stations as warranted by operational requirements Three digit number from 000 to 999 designating specific nets within a given TSK TERM Net members Offset Over the air rekey OTAR Packet Permanent memory Precision lightweight GPS receiver PLGR Primary tasks Retransmission RXMT Scanning Scrolling Single channel SC System Improvement Program Special tasks TM 11 5820 890 10 8 DEFINITION All net stations other than the NCS and designated alternate NCSs Feature allowing SC frequencies to be changed by plus of minus 5 or 10 KHz to reduce the effect of enemy jamming or other interference Procedure by which TEK may be electronically transmitted from NCS to NCS or from NCS to net members New data mode in which data messages are divided into frames smaller than 1800 bytes each for processing over SINCGARS voice data nets The packet data mode PCKT can be used only with the FBCB2 hardware and software system RT random access memory RAM location where data is stored and used data in permanent memory may be retrieved if desired retention of data in permanent memory depends upon main power or HUB ba
273. onnector of RT 1523E F or to AM 7239E through the CDU vehicular cable assembly CONTROLS The CDU is menu driven It is stepped through the menu using four arrow keys and the ENT and ESC keys Functions are selected by using the arrow keys and the ENT key The ESC key will always return to the previous condition Fields in the display are boxed when selected for change and values are highlighted in reverse video LIGHT To turn the backlight on press the light button To turn the light off press the light button a second time 3 8 SIMPLE KEY LOADER SKL See TM 11 5810 410 13 amp P for complete operating instructions Change 1 3 15 3 16 blank TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CHAPTER 4 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION SECURE CIPHER TEXT CT COMMUNICATIONS a Integrated COMSEC SINGLE CHANNEL SC COMMUNICATIONS 2 edu b Limitations of SC 1 enne Required Usage ete RUE FREQUENCY HOPPING FH COMMUNICATIONS b Frequency Hopping FH E es TS o MEE oae mmm 4 9 USE OF JULIAN DATE AND GPS ZULU TIME m 4 10 a Two Digit Julian Dato trente ree Pet tette et teet b Precise GPS TIME iiic data etit een atu 4 11 Common Zulu TIME
274. ontact the NCS or another There is no response to your calls heard on the net net station b Prepare radio for passive 1 Press FREQ on RT keypad RT display shows F XXX 2 Press SYNC on keypad RT display shows LF c Allow RT to make automatic 1 DO NOT press while Rt display will continue to show LF adjustment RT is in this mode XXX Wait until you hear traffic on RT will drop L from display will the net read F XXX again Re establish contact with Call NCS and re enter the net Passive method of late net entry is net NCS completed If traffic is not heard after using the Passive Late Net Entry method for three minutes so use the Hot Start procedure or CUE and ERF method of late net entry 5 36 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 4h Obtain SOI Information from ANCD Primary Operator Task 5 DESCRIPTION Because the ANCD replaces the paper SOI the operator performs this task whenever SOI information on nets suffixes pyrotechnics smoke or sign countersign is required As many as 40 Quick Reference QREF items can be made available to the operator in list form Full SOI information is readily available for all QREF entries Up to five time periods 24 hour days may be included in each QREF file Performance of this task involves turning on the ANCD selecting the SOI program entering QREF and scrolling to the element of SOI information desired 1 Rules to remember in obtaining SOI informatio
275. ontrol Monitor Loudspeaker LS 671 i enr reri Ree aba Single ASIP Radio Mount SARM ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT Handheld Remote Control Radio Device Control Display Unit nnne nennen enne Simple Key Loader stint sinn inten nns PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Secure Cipher Text CT Communications sse Single Channel SC Communications sse Frequency Hopping FH Net OPO Mine p tee 2 Electronic Updating Retransmission RXMT Operations essen e Remoting Capabilities sess ener nnn oir itt ee Ru TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Chapter Para Title Page OPERATOR TASKS E DUELO Start Up Peridium EE Primary Operator Preparation Special Operator 2
276. or 1 Load CUE MAN and SC Perform Primary Operator Task 1 Hot Start net opening freqs as required 2 Load COMSEC keys FH Perform Primary Operator Task 2 data and sync time Prepare net operators for 1 Ensure net ANCDs or SKLs N A Hot Start net opening are properly loaded 2 Advise operators when net is N A to be opened Open the net 1 Respond to individual Each operator calls as soon as ready operator calls to enter the net 2 Admit individual operators When all operators have called Hot into CT FH net Start is complete The ANCD automatically converts current date to a two digit Julian Date There is no action required on the part of the operator Unit SOP should specify if net RTs are to be loaded by individual operators or by communications specialists and designated NCOs Centralized loading of radios may be an attractive solution when the state of individual operator training is a consideration 6 14 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3i Conduct Cold Start Net Opening Primary NCS Task 4 DESCRIPTION The Cold Start net opening procedure has for most units been replaced by the simpler less demanding Hot Start method covered in Primary NCS Task 3 above The Cold Start method remains an option for NCSs to use if desired The Cold Start net opening procedure requires operators to load their radios with COMSEC keys and FH data but not sync time Sync time is passed electronically from the NCS to net members b
277. oves TEK from a Source ANCD through the Source NCS RT through the Target NCS RT into the Target NCS s ANCD or SKL Send TEK to Net Operators Using the AK Method of OTAR This is a method for disseminating a new TEK by electronic transfer with a net The procedure moves the new TEK from the NCS s ANCD through the NCS s radio directly into the radios of net operators Receive and Store TEK Sent by MK Method of OTAR This is the procedure followed by Target NCSs when a Source NCS sends a TEK by MK OTAR Special NCS Task 3 above This task enables the receiving NCSs to store the electronically transmitted TEK in an ANCD where it is readily available for further distribution within the unit when required TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4c Transmit Updated FH Data Via Net Update ERF Special NCS Task DESCRIPTION This task enables the NCS to electronically transmit new FH data to net operators when distribution by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD is impossible or impractical This procedure may be used to update change hopsets TSKs net IDs and sync time The task involves alerting net operators sending the ERF using the net operational channel confirming receive of the ERF and making a communications check when the changed FH data is put into effect TRANSMIT UPDATED FH DATA VIA NET UPDATE ERF SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare to send net 1 Obtain updated FH data Obtain from SigO ANCD SKL or update ERF and effective time
278. p Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo b Say Enter SET select Choose Send Receive Say Enter RECEIVE receive from Ancd Pc Broadcast Stu Say Enter BROADCAST Enter broadcast ID 1 16 gt 6 22 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS L 0 i ACTIONS RESULTS TNeypisaysEnterSORbreadcast Broadcast ID seftoX Enter SOP broadcast Broadcast ID set to X ID and press ENTR Polling ON OFF Say Press down arrow Connect ANCD to RT AUD DATA V 10 Say Connect ANCD to RT Emphasize AUD DATA for ANCD AUD DATA HS to Aud Fill connection Say When ready press Press RCV to receive down arrow and ACK WAIT d Send SOI information by 1 Say Standby broadcast will Alerts operators that broadcast is Broadcast Mode now be sent press RCV about to be sent coordinates now sending now pressing of SEND and RCV 2 Press SEND on NCS Processing Please wait Sending of SOI data completed If polling is used the NCS ANCD will indicate which stations did and did not receive the broadcast If polling is not used the NCS should have net members acknowledge receipt of SOI data Do not press SEND until net members are ready at your direction to press RCV Then press SEND within 20 seconds of having operators press RC V 6 23 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4e Send TEK to Other NCSs Using MK Method of OTAR Special NCS Task 3 DESCRIPTION This procedure allows an NCS to tr
279. pad Display will blink and change to CID CID number will not be displayed again Your CID will be established by unit SOP Change 7 19 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 54 Enabling GPS EGR Task 2 DESCRIPTION This procedure enables the ASIP RT to automatically send position information to an external device the CDU automatically transmits your position to the net Your RT must have a CID loaded EGR Task 3 ENABLING GPS TRANSMIT SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Verify RT is in CT mode Observe HT display Display reads CT If not set up the RT for CT operation b Show GPS mode Press GPS 5 on RT keypad RT display shows OFF AUTO PER or MOV OFF indicates that GPS is off AUTO PER and MOV turn GPS on AUTO transmits your position with each message PER transmits your position with each message or if a transmission has not occurred within the previous two minutes MOV transmits your position with each message or if your RT has moved a minimum distance since the last transmission The MOV distance is 100 10 meters in manpack and 300 30 meters in vehicular configuration indicates no GPS sync for example AUTO c Set GPS mode Press CHG 7 on RT keypad as RT display changes to OFF AUTO often as needed PER or MOV is shown when there is no GPS synchronization e g AUTO If in PCKT mode you can only scroll to OFF or AUTO 7 20 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 5
280. pare ANCD for STU 1 Turn ANCD ON select transfer Soi Radio Supervisor 2 Enter RADIO Send Receive Database sEtup COMSEC Time 3 Enter SEND send to Radio Ancd Stu Pc 4 Enter STU Loadset Database Time Key Eset Mwod 5 Enter Loadset Database System high is or Eset as desired U C S TS V C Select data to send 1 then PgUP select Loadset example PgDN to view item 99INDIVA LST DI 2 Press ENTR to select Connect to STU and press SEND data item WAIT WAIT d Send data by STU 1 Ensure receiving station is Both STUs must be placed in transfer ready for you to send secure data mode 2 Press SEND Sending final data Transfer successful V Loadset database key or Eset may be selected for STU transfer Time cannot be transferred by STU The term MWOD multiple word of day is used in loading procedure for the Have Quick radio found in selected aircraft Do not press SEND until receiving station is ready to press RCV see STU Task 2 for details 7 12 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 34 Receive COMSEC Keys FH Data Into ANCD STU STU Task 2 DESCRIPTION This task enables an NCS or communications specialist to receive and store in an ANCD those COMSEC keys and FH data classified or unclassified sent from another location via STU over telephone lines RECEIVE COMSEC KEYS FH DATA INTO ANCD VIA STU SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Coordinate STU tra
281. physically interchanged The HUB battery is 6 5 Volts while ANCD batteries are 3 Volts each If three HUB batteries are mistakenly placed in an ANCD the ANCD will be destroyed Placing one ANCD battery in the SIP radio HUB position will cause the RT to lose its fill of data Therefore be sure you know which battery goes where Always read the label before installing either HUB or ANCD batteries 2 18 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 5 VEHICULAR VEH RADIOS AN VRC 87A D F THRU 92A D F 2 5a Vehicular Radios General CONFIGURATIONS The following paragraphs describe SINCGARS vehicular radio configurations AN VRC 87A D F through AN VRC 92A D F Tvpe Nomenclature Para Short Range SR AN VRC 87A D F 2 bb Short Range Radio with Dismount AN VRC 88A D F 2 5 Long Range LR AN VRC 90A D F Short Range Long Range AN VRC 89A D F Short Range Long Range with Dismount AN VRC 91A D F Long Range Long Range AN VRC 92A D F 2 5g VAA Connectors A B models ICOM 2 bh VAA Connectors C D E models SIP ASIP 2 5 Cabling ICOM SIP ASIP 2 5 The A D F in SINCGARS radio system nomenclature indicates that the system uses ICOM SIP or ASIP RTs respectively ICOM RTs include RT 1523 A B SIP RTs include RT 1523C D and ASIP RTs include RT 1523E F COMPONENTS SINCGARS vehicular radio components are listed in Figure 2 12 Each item is illustrated in Figure 2 13 The specific components in
282. play CDU Task 5 DESCRIPTION This task allows the operator to view and edit one of 99 user defined waypoints and display the navigational solution to that waypoint If GPS information is not available from the ASIP RT the display will show NOT AVAILABLE DETAILED PROCEDURE 1 Verify that GPS is not OFF See EGR Task 2 2 Observe CDU display 3 Using UP A and DOWN Y keys select the MENU field The selected field is boxed NOTE If necessary use ESC key as needed to return to main display 4 Press ENT The selected menu item is boxed Using UP A and DOWN keys select NAV 5 Press ENT key A waypoint is displayed See step 7 below to create waypoints if none exist Press ENT and arrow keys to change waypoint NOTE A navigation solution to the waypoint is shown at the bottom of the display It is automatically updated every six seconds to provide real time navigation 6 To edit the waypoint change its name and coordinates select EDIT using the ARROW and ENT keys and go to step 7 To create a waypoint by pasting a previously copied position Local or SA select COPY EDIT using the arrow keys and go to step 8 7 28 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 If EDIT was selected the waypoint number is boxed The highlighted field is selected for editing by pressing the ENT key which causes the first character of the field to change to reverse video indicating the character can be edit
283. r a SINCGARS secure frequency hopping net using the RS 232 enhanced data feature 5 6a Use SIP ASIP RT as an RCU Special Operator Task 9 STEP ACTION RESULT 1 Ensure SIP ASIP RT and RCU RT are loaded SIP ASIP RT and RCU RT for remote with proper data operations radio 3 Set remoted radio FCTN switch to the REM This enables the RCU RT to control the remoted i position radio Set RCU RT FCTN switch to SQ ON Note FCTN positions LD SQ OFF and RXMT may also be used 7 i LD LDE RT and EXT options 2 appear in the display For ASIP EXT is not shown display blinks RCU RT Set RCU RT switch to the REM position This enables the RCU RT opr to call the rem radio opr by wire Press RCU RT CALL key and PTT at same Produces ring tone and CALL message at Rem time for 4 7 seconds RT oprs can now talk via orderwire not secure Wait for 7 seconds then note when RCU RT The SIP ASIP RT is now ready to perform as an Set RCU RT to SQ ON Rem radio is now controlled by the RCU RT For use of a SIP RT as either a manpack RCU or a manpack remoted radio Battery Box CY 8523A B is required Battery Box CY 8523C cannot be used for manpack remote operations ASIP RT requires a two wire adapter The Control Receiver Transmitter RCU C 11561 may continue to be used for remote control of a SINCGARS SIP radio when used for voice and SINCGARS data m
284. referred method of updating these categories of data is by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD When the tactical situation makes physical transfer impossible or impractical these electronic transfer means may be used All SINCGARS NCS personnel should receive at least familiarization training in these tasks In units which anticipate frequent mission related requirements for electronic data transfer NCS operators should be trained to proficiency In that many units will but rarely have a need to use electronic data transfer the assistance of the Signal Officer NCOs may be required for their NCSs to perform these tasks correctly 6 4b Summary of Special NCS Tasks SPECIAL NCS TASK 1 SPECIAL NCS TASK 2 SPECIAL NCS TASK 3 SPECIAL NCS TASK 4 SPECIAL NCS TASK 5 6 18 Change 1 Transfer Updated FH Data via Net Update ERF Used for electronic transfer of FH data hopset net ID TSK from one location to another Net update ERF may also include a change in sync time if desired Transmit SOI Information Using the Broadcast Mode This is the procedure used for electronic transfer of SOI information from one location to another Because of the time required to transfer SOI data by Broadcast each transmission is normally limited to one time period Send TEK to Other NCSs Using the MK Method of OTAR This is the principal method of electronically transferring a TEK from one location to another The MK manual key procedure m
285. rement leaking or staining inside the plastic packaging Keep all batteries in their original packaging until ready for use DO NOT test Lithium batteries for capacity with a test set No external test set exists that provides a reliable result DO NOT store batteries in unused equipment for more than 30 days If a battery compartment becomes hot to the touch if it hisses or makes a burping sound or if you smell irritating pungent Sulfur Dioxide gas off the equipment immediately and clear the area Let the equipment cool for at least an hour After the equipment is cool and the odor has cleared remove the battery or batteries Install new battery or batteries and resume operation If the equipment again becomes hot to the touch go through the above steps but do not install new batteries Turn in the equipment for maintenance DO NOT place Lithium batteries in ordinary trash turn them in for disposal in accordance with local regulations DO NOT store Lithium batteries with other hazardous materials and keep them away from open flame or heat DO NOT use water to fight a Lithium battery fire This is an extremely intense fire frequently characterized by a bright red flame Carbon Dioxide or dry chemical fire extinguishers are effective in fighting fires of other combustibles and in keeping the batteries cool when exposed to fires in the vicinity Sprinklers are recommended for storage areas to douse fires of other combustib
286. riendly radio For RT 1523E F pure nets with software version 7 0 or greater Perform a CUE call to the net Instruct all net members to switch to FH 2 mode Continue to operate normally NCS forwards MIJI to IEWO NCS of your problem Try to get interfering system shut down momentarily to determine if it is the Source of your problem If it is change your location remote your antenna or or try to place an obstacle between you and the interfering station Press your PTT two times Net should clear Advise NCS of your action Press your PTT two times Net should clear Advise NCS of your action Free up PTT or replace handset with a known good one Identify interfering radio and request operator to reduce RF PWR setting move your radio at least 50 meters or remote your RT or antenna Advise NCS of your action Continue to operate For RT 1523E F non pure nets with software version 6 6 or lower or other SINCGARS models Perform a CUE call to the Net Instruct all non RT 1523 E F with S W 7 0 or greater radios to switch to backup single channel secure frequency SC CT Instruct RT 1523 E F with S W 7 0 or greater radios to switch to FH 2 mode NCS will operate the net in a mixed net operation utilizing a SINCGARS mixed mode retransmission site station to provide communications between SC and FH net members Once jamming source is neutralized NCS will instruct the net to switch back to normal FH mode
287. rol Display NEN 3 15 l me E rm 7 25 Preventive Maintenance Checks and 8 24 1 Control Monitor C M e 2 37 COMPONEN S m 2 37 Operat r c ntrol eee ee E ene ET 5 25 p T PR ET 2 38 Physical 2 38 Control Receiver Transmitter 2 35 veri EET 2 35 125 19 8 TS 5 19 PTO INN UGA mr 2 36 Physical 2 36 Cross net communicationis cade utut peti uia 4 12 CUE and Electronic Remote Fill method of late net 4 18 Designate new default loadset 6 10 Electronic Updating DE 4 24 Electronic Remote Fill process for FH 4 4411 4 26 Embedded GPS Receiver EGR Tacks 7 19 Enhanced Operating Mode udo pP pr E Re att uta en co e atas ret ota censa Rute 4 6 4 6 5 36 Equipment improvement recommendations 4
288. ronic transfer is required by the tactical situation of the unit Perform CUE and ERF Method of Late Net Entry This task is performed when sync time in the RT becomes for any reason more than one minute different from that of the operational net Use of the CUE and ERF method is discouraged because it requires single channel communication and special action on the part of the receiving NCS The Hot Start procedure works equally well and it does not involve SC mode or NCS action For RT 1523A B versions sync time difference cannot exceed 100 days for the RT 1523 version difference cannot exceed 60 minutes Conduct Retransmission RXMT Operations Performance of this task is required when one or more stations of a net become out of normal SINCGARS operating range or an obstacle blocks line of sight communications This is a task that unit scouts staff vehicle drivers and communications specialists should be able to perform on short notice The RXMT capability of the SINCGARS radio is of significant value in various operational situations 5 43 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 NOTE DATA RXMT All data rates except PCKT may be RXMT with the following provisions 1 SDM data TF and AD1 No change to normal RXMT procedures Radios do not have to be set in Data mode data off Mixed radios at RXMT site or outstations is permitted 2 EDM DATA Radios at the RXMT site have to be set to the same EDM data rates as outstations Only SIP radios can
289. rposes only and is not authority to requisition replacements These items are part of the end item but are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment As part of the end item these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts The list is divided into sub listings for each radio set Illustrations are furnished to assist you in identifying the items B 3 EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS The following explains the columns found in the tabular listings a Column 1 Illustration Number No This column indicates the number of the illustration showing the item b Column 2 National Stock Number This column indicates the national stock number assigned to the item and will be used for requisitioning purposes c Column 3 Description This column indicates the federal item name and if required a minimum description to identify and locate the item The last line for each item indicates the CAGEC in parentheses followed by the part number d Column 4 Unit of Measure U M This column indicates the measure used in performing the actual operational maintenance function This measure is expressed by a two character alphabetical abbreviation 0 ea in pr e Column 5 Quantity Required Qty This column indicates the quantity of the item authorized to be used with on the equipment Change 1 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SECTION Il COMPONENTS OF
290. rst page of the system menu pressing it a second time displays the second page Change 1 5 21 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 BUTTON PURPOSE WP Pressing the WP key causes the Waypoint menu to be displayed Waypoint POS Pressing the POS key allows the Position display to be viewed Position NAV When waypoints are loaded pressing the NAV key allows Navigation displays to Navigation be viewed without waypoints loaded NAV key does not work CLR With the keypad in numeric lock the CLR key is used to move the cursor to the left Clear erasing wrong entries MNRK The MARK key is used to store present position as a waypoint Pressing the OFF key once starts a 30 second shut down process pressing it a second time shuts down the PLGR immediately NUM LOCK Pressing NUM LOCK toggles the keypad between control and numeric modes An Number Lock N is displayed at lower right when NUM LOCK is on 5 31 Control Monitor C M FRONT PANEL The front panel of the Control Monitor provides the operator four controls and five small displays for control of up to three radios Controls include FCTN function RADIO INIT initiate and DIM switches The five displays show RF power RT mode channel variable COMSEC mode and Main Standby Control Figure 5 18 CONTROL MONITOR 5 22 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CONTROL MONITOR CONTROLS AND USES CONTROL PURPOSE RADIO This control is used to select Radio 1 2 or 3 Positions 1 and 2
291. rvals or in random order lights If feasible try to place an obstacle between you and the enemy Advise NCS of your problem Change 1 5 69 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 FH OPERATIONS Jamming anti jamming procedures for FH operations are shown in the chart below JAMMING ANTI JAMMING PROCEDURES FH MODE OF OPERATIONS SYMPTOM POSSIBILITIES ACTIONS You are being jammed if disconnecting If feasible try to place an obstacle the antenna causes the SIG display to between you and the enemy Advise You hear loud noise or strong static making net traffic difficult to impossible to hear Your SIG display remains on or goes on and off at regular intervals Signal strength is greater than LO You hear a constant hiss or background noise in the handset but no loud noise or net traffic You hear background popping or static when receiving and your operating range is reduced Your SIG display is flickering NCS CORRECTIVE ACTIONS drop to LO and noise level is reduced You may be experiencing interference from a friendly communication system called a co site problem There is a captured RT in your net constantly transmitting to act as a jammer There is a stuck mike or bad handset in you net that is locked in the PTT position Your own handset is stuck if you hear sidetone without pressing PTT SIG display drops to LO or below when handset is disconnected You are probably experiencing co site interference from a f
292. s When you change net ID to contact a station in a division other than your own you will normally need to use that division s TEK You anticipated this need and loaded the additional TEK in your channel 5 the least used net of the loadset To contact the other division you change the net ID in channel 2 and scroll TEK 5 to CHAN 2 Use the following procedure to scroll TEK from one channel to another 1 5 only KEK cannot be moved out of channel 6 Set CHAN to the channel to be used Press CMSC RT display shows current TEK Press CHG until desired TEK appears f COMSEC alarm is heard press PTT twice to clear it Changing CHAN switch to another channel automatically returns TEKs to their original position 5 67 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 7d Scanning Capabilit 5 68 DEFINITION TO START SCANNING TO TRANSMIT TO CHECK FREQUENCY TO CANCEL CHANNEL TO RESTORE CHANNEL TO STOP SCANNING The SINCGARS radio has the ability to scan up to eight single channel frequencies CUE MAN and CHAN 1 6 When a signal is found the RT will lock in on that channel and the RT display shows the number of that channel As an operator you can both receive and transmit on the locked channel When the channel has been inactive for 2 5 seconds the RT will automatically resume scanning To start scanning follow this procedure Set CHAN to CUE FCTN to SQ ON MODE to FH and COMSEC to CT or PT as desired e Pres
293. s GPS B interface between GPS buffer and RT B GPS A interface between GPS buffer and RT A GPS output connector GPS In interface for GPS antenna Two wire binding posts used for remote control of RT A RT B and for connecting SIP RTs used as RCUs Power connector couples vehicle 27 5 VDC power to the intercom 2 5j CABLING Handsets RT A Lower Shelf RT B Top Shelf Computer FSK Devices HRCRD CDU TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Connected only to the AUD DATA or AUD FILL port of the SIP ASIP RT they will not operate if connected to the SIP ASIP VAA Use of a W4 cable from the RT AUD DATA port to the VAA J5 connector is required only for Packet data mode The RT A antenna is connected with a W2 cable from the RT antenna port to the PA connector Use of a W4 cable from the RT AUD DATA port to the VAA J4 connector is required only for Packet data mode The RT B antenna is connected from the antenna port directly to the antenna for short range radios and from the RT antenna port to the auxiliary PA J2 connector using cable CG 3855 3856 for RT B long range radios Connected to the AUD DATA port of the SIP ASIP RT Do not attempt to connect your computer to the VAA it will not work without FDCB2 software installed in the computer and tactical internet software installed in the VAA TacFire and other FSK data devices are connected directly to the AUD DATA port of the RT not to the VAA P1 straight co
294. s In data transmissions use of lower data rate increases the range EDM data rates are available on RT 1523C D E F only 2 16 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 4 BATTERY REQUIREMENTS 2 4a Manpack Power Source DESCRIPTION Manpack radios require batteries for their main power source Battery types and general guidelines about battery life are provided below These times are based on computations as well as experience Actual battery life will vary depending on factors such as temperature and the age of the battery 2 45 Main Power Batteries DESCRIPTION SINCGARS main power batteries include BA 5590A U Lithium SO non rechargeable SOCI BA 5590B U Lithium SO non rechargeable non SOCI BA 8180 U Zinc Air non rechargeable BA 5390 U Lithium MnOs non rechargeable non SOCI BA 5390A U Lithium MnO non rechargeable SOCI BB 2590 U Lithium lon rechargeable cannot be used with RT 1523A or RT 1523D BB 390B U Nickel Metal Hydride rechargeable NOTE SOCI State of Charge Indicator 2 4c Hold Up Battery HUB DESCRIPTION Hold Up Battery HUB BA 5372 U is required for memory retention in and SIP radios RT 1523 A B C D Seb para 5 78 for ASIP HUB Insert 2 44 BA 5590 Estimated Battery Life Estimated Battery Life Using BA 5590 RF PWR at HI Setting Table 2 5 Manpack Radio Main Power VOICE DATA FH amp CT RT 1523 RT 1523A RT 1523B RT 1523C RT 1523D RT 1523E F 0077 TBD Hea
295. s test results are Test shown in RT display Running RT self test is a routine step in start up procedure LD The load position is required for loading SC frequencies FH data and COMSEC Load keys required also to receive an ERF SQ ON This is the normal operating position of the radio for FH mode For SC mode this Squelch On position reduces noise SQ OFF This position is not used for the FH mode In the SC mode SQ OFF helps to bring Squelch Off in distant stations to work through jamming and to be compatible with radios lacking squelch capability REM The REM position disables front panel controls and is required for use of the Remote Control Monitor Remote Control Unit RCU HRCRD and CDU RXMT Use of the RXMT position enables the RT to automatically retransmit traffic from Retransmit one radio through another Both RT s are set to RXMT position and connected by an RXMT cable For RT s equipped with EGR clears both RT and GPS COMSEC variables After 15 seconds clears all FH data Operator pauses in this position for 15 seconds when setting FCTN switch to OFF Change 1 5 17 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SIP ASIP VAA Memory The SIP ASIP VAA contains a small microprocessor which allows data in the form of routing tables to be stored Internet When used in conjunction with FBCB2 hardware and software the SIP ASIP VAA supports internet communications among SINCGARS FH nets and between SINCGARS and EPLRS nets Emp
296. s SC frequency and may have to be placed in PT mode if the RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio is used The procedures for SC net to SC net RXMT communications are the same except that both RADIO C and RADIO D use SC frequencies and both RXMT radios may have to be placed in PT mode if the RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio is used Whenever SC transmissions are required there is the possibility that the enemy can locate the RXMT site by using direction finding techniques In operational situations where the enemy is believed to have direction finding capabilities an RXMT station should displace as frequently as necessary Operating in the EDM mode any rate a SIP ASIP RXMT station will pass all EDM SDM and voice traffic Both RXMT SIP ASIP radios must be set to the EDM data rate being used by the operational net When passing RS 232 traffic the equivalent EDM data rate must be set in both RXMT radios Mixed mode SC to FH and FH to SC cannot be used in the EDM mode This is not a limitation because nets having SC only do not have EDM capabilities When mixed mode RXMT communications are required the solution is to use an SDM data mode 4 31 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 10 ANTENNAS 4 10a Long Manpack Antenna AS 4266A SOURCE The long manpack antenna is issued as a component of the manpack and dismount radios Sge Appendix this manual for authorization details EMPLOYMENT The long manpack antenna is designed to au
297. s STO RT display will show SCAN Enter the number 8 to scan all channels at the same priority Enter the number 0 thru 7 to establish priority for that channel The priority channel will be scanned more often than other channels RT display will show the number you entered and scanning will begin Toresume scanning while a channel is locked in press STO To transmit on a locked in channel press PTT within 2 5 seconds after net clears or scanning will automatically resume To select a channel to transmit on use RT keypad to enter desired channel number and channel selected will appear in the RT display Press PTT within 2 5 seconds of channel number appearing in display To transmit on the priority channel you selected merely press PTT and RT display will show CH X and you are ready to transmit To determine the frequency of a locked in channel press FREQ and frequency will be shown in RT display To delete a channel from the scan sequence enter the channel number using the keypad and press CLR Scanning will resume less the deleted channel To restore a deleted channel enter channel number using the RT keypad display will show CH X and restored channel will be included in scanning sequence To stop scanning merely set CHAN from CUE to another position TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 7e Jamming and Anti Jamming Actions DEFINITION Jamming is the intentional transmission of signals that interrupt your ability t
298. s are as shown in the chart below JAMMING ANTI JAMMING PROCEDURES SC MODE OF OPERATIONS SYMPTOM POSSIBILITIES ACTIONS You hear no traffic and you are not Your handset could be stuck producing Press PTT several times to free up mike transmitting SIG display is lit and shows a hot mike situation If necessary replace handset with a signal higher than LO known good one You are being jammed In SQ OFF you If feasible try to place an obstacle hear strong static or random noise between you and the enemy Notify your When antenna is disconnected SIG supervisor and if appropriate prepare a display drops and noise disappears or is MIJI feeder report reduced Your RT is faulty or locked up With Set RT FCTN to STBY position and then handset and antenna disconnected your back to SQ ON If problem continues SIG display remains lit and above LO contact your unit maintenance You hear random radio traffic Your SIG You are experiencing friendly or enemy Set RT FCTN to SQ OFF and try to display is lit and shows a signal higher radio interference communicate Change to a longer range than LO antenna If feasible try to place an obstacle between you and the source of interference Advise NCS of your problem You may or may not hear any noise SIG You are probably experiencing enemy Set RT FCTN to SQ OFF and you hear display goes on and off at regular sweep jamming noise or static each time the SIG display inte
299. s message appears when you press the SIP ASIP RT GPS key when there is no EGR or PLGR installed NOKEY If you power up your radio in CT when there are no COMSEC keys loaded a NOKEY message will be displayed and a COMSEC alarm will be heard Setting COMSEC to PT or loading a COMSEC key will clear the alarm PT RX This message will be displayed whenever you have your radio in CT and receive a PT message SETDR For retransmission operations this message tells the RXMT operator who selects RS 232 that an EDM data rate 1200N 2400N 4800N or 9600N must be selected before RS 232 transmissions can be started NOTE SIP ASIP radios using RS 232 mode must be set to the same EDM data rate WAIT This message is displayed while BIT is running changing to the message GOOD when BIT is successful 2 12 Change 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 24 RT Physical Data Table 2 1 Receiver Transmitter Physical Data Weight RT Model kg Ib approx RT 1523 25 3 10 0 27 1 10 7 8 7 3 4 6 7 14 7 RT 1523A 25 3 10 0 27 1 10 7 8 7 3 4 6 9 15 2 RT 1523B C D 25 3 10 0 27 1 10 7 8 7 3 4 7 04 15 5 RT 1523E F 25 6 10 1 3 5 5 3 8 7 3 4 3 6 8 0 2 2h Common Connections Table 2 2 Common Connections Connector AUD DATA AUD FILL VAA J4 J5 BTRY BOX AUX AUX Item RT 1523E RT 1523F ANCD SKL X Expansion Module CDU X PLGR TF FSK 2 Wire adapter W 4 X X HRCRD
300. s no traffic on the net e Radio presents strange message or noise that will not clear Any of these problems may be caused by an equipment failure But these problems can also be caused by operator error improperly set controls weak batteries loose connections or use of wrong data to cite a few reasons The Troubleshooting Guides which follow offer the operator Systematic procedures for identifying and eliminating common faults helping the operator to maintain communications When there is an equipment failure or when your use of these Troubleshooting Guides fails to solve the problem contact your Unit Maintainer 8 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 OPERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 Loading RT With COMSEC FH Data From ANCD Fails STEPS CHECKS ACTIONS 1 Perform ICOM Fill Again 1 Does ANCD indicate that data YES Go to Step 2 is being transferred NO Continue 2 Does indicate that data YES Problem is solved has been received NO Go to Step 2 2 Verify ANCD Data Storage Does ANCD contain a loadset YES Go to step 3 NO Load replace ANCD Repeat Step 2 3 Ensure ANCD is Functional 1 Is low battery light on YES Replace btry cont NO Replace ANCD Cont 2 Does ICOM fill now load RT YES Problem is solved NO Go to Step 4 4 Ensure Fill Cable is Serviceable 1 Is cable damaged cut NO Continue checks or broken YES Replace cable cont 2 Is fill cable properly connected YES Continue to ANCD amp RT NO
301. s number of bytes sent Receive operation was successful f you wish to transfer a complete SOI refer to Special Operator Task 2 Alternate f this screen appears respond NO Either QREF or selected information can be transferred using this procedure but not at the same time If you wish to transfer a QREF file you may use this procedure or refer to Special Operator Task 2 To develop a QREF file merely scroll to SOI items desired and press for KEEP to place each item in QREF Do not press SEND until you are ready to press RCV Then press RC V within 20 seconds of pressing SEND 6 13 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 3h Conduct Hot Start Net Opening Primary NCS Task 3 DESCRIPTION This task represents a basic NCS requirement to open the SINCGARS secure frequency hopping net During use of the Hot Start net opening procedure NCS responsibilities are primarily supervisory in that each operator loads the radio with COMSEC keys FH data and sync time in preparation for the net opening Upon completing the ICOM fill which loads COMSEC FH data and sync time into all six RT channels the operator merely calls the NCS in secure FH mode and requests permission to enter the net NCS requirements are limited to ensuring that operators are provided the required data for net opening and respond to operator requests for net entry CONDUCT HOT START NET OPENING SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare NCS radio f
302. s of leakage staining or other indications of battery damage DO NOT use a damaged battery Zn Air batteries contain gelled Potassium Hydroxide KOH as an electrolyte This is corrosive and will burn the skin If it comes in contact with the skin wash thoroughly with soap and water If it comes in contact with the eyes flush with copious amounts of water and seek immediate medical attention NEVER disassemble heat burn or incinerate these or any batteries CO or Dry Chemical fire extinguishers are suggested for fires involving these batteries Turn in batteries for disposal Dispose of them in accordance with local regulations If you experience a safety hazard or incident notify your unit Safety Officer file a SF 368 Product Quality Deficiency Report and notify the CE LCMC Safety Office Ft Monmouth NJ 07703 DSN 987 7445 or commercial 732 427 7445 MANPACK LONG ANTENNA SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA COMES INTO CONTACT WITH OVERHEAD POWER LINES Never fully extend the long antenna directly under power lines If you must full extend the long antenna near power lines power line poles or towers or buildings with overhead power line connections never come closer than two times the antenna height from the base of the power line pole tower or building Stop before you get close to the power line and check for clearance before passing If needed either carefully tie down the antenna or r
303. sks which enable a SINCGARS NCS to make use of PLGR based GPS Zulu time for net openings and maintaining exact SINCGARS sync time for the duration of operations however extended they may be These four PLGR tasks involve reading Julian Date and Zulu time from the PLGR manually loading PLGR time into an ANCD electronically loading GPS time directly from the PLGR into a SINCGARS radio and loading required keys into the PLGR from an ANCD NCS personnel and operators having ready access to a PLGR should become proficient in PLGR tasks 7 2b Summary of PLGR Tasks PLGR TASK 1 PLGR TASK 2 PLGR TASK 3 PLGR TASK 4 Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time from PLGR This task allows an NCS or operator having a PLGR to obtain Julian Date and exact GPS Zulu time directly from the PLGR Manually Load PLGR Date and Zulu Time Into ANCD This task enables the NCS or operator having a PLGR to manually load Julian Date and GPS Zulu time into an ANCD Load PLGR Date and GPS Zulu Time Into SINCGARS RT This task permits an NCS or SINCGARS operator to electronically transfer Julian Date and GPS Zulu time directly from the PLGR to the SINCGARS radio by physical connection Load PLGR Key From ANCD Into PLGR This PLGR task allows an NCS or SINCGARS operator to load a key from an ANCD into a PLGR whenever required 7 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 7 2c Obtain Date and GPS Zulu Time from PLGR PLGR Task 1 DESCRIPTION This task enables the S
304. splay of the NCS and Alternate NCSs RESPOND TO CUE CALLS SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Note CUE message in RT 1 Switch from operational N A display channel to CUE in CT 2 Call CUE caller using CUE Keep SC messages as brief chan and CT mode as possible Assist CUE caller as 1 Upon contact direct caller to N A required go to MAN and CT 2 2 Determine CUE caller s N A requirement 3 Provide CUE caller an ERF See Primary NCS Task 4 if required or Special Operator Task 7 4 Admit caller to net if authorized Resume normal 1 Return to operational channel Do not leave your net if communications an Alt NCS is available 2 If enemy has DF capability Alt NCS should be prepared move to new location to displace frequently Either the NCS or Alt NCS may respond to CUE calls The preferred solution is for an Alt NCS to respond to CUE calls leaving the NCS free to control the net An Alt NCS may use the FH M position to send an ERF on the MAN channel while the NCS continues to use FH M on the operational channel without interfering with net sync time 6 17 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4 SPECIAL NCS TASKS 6 4a Definition of Special NCS Tasks WHAT ARE THEY WHAT S INVOLVED WHAT S REQUIRED There are five tasks categorized as special for SINCGARS NCS personnel These five tasks enable a SINCGARS NCS to electronically transfer FH data to include a TSK SOI information and COMSEC keys TEK only The p
305. ssary Intercom however is essential for the safe and effective operation of the combat vehicle Thus intercom is a Not Fully Mission Capable deficiency TM 11 5820 890 10 8 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FOR SINCGARS RADIOS USED WITH INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SET Item to Check Service CONTROLS MAIN PWR POWER ON OFF INT ACCENT RADIO TRANS MONITOR SWITCHES CABLES d COMM CHECK Intercomm Radio A Radio B AN VIC 1 Operator Equipment Not Procedure Ready Available If Check for cracked or broken controls Check for loose controls Check for frozen controls Check for missing control knobs Check for missing cables Check for proper installation of cables Check for tightness of connectors Check for obvious damage to cables Ensure VAA CB1 is ON Ensure VIC AM 1780 circuit breaker is ON Turn Power Switch to NORM Power lamp should light Check ability to talk on Intercom from all crew control boxes at ALL INT ONLY and A CDR only at position C Check ability to talk and listen to Radio A from all crew control boxes at ALL and A Check ability to listen to Radio B from all crew control boxes at ALL and C Intercom does not function Although the SINCGARS radios of a combat vehicle equipped with the VIC intercomm system can operate without the VIC many combat vehicles require the operational use of the intercomm for internal vehicle command and control Whether
306. ssary for them to send an to the distant station in order to establish FH communications Sending an ERF requires the sending operator to change from FH to FH M with associated risk to net sync time if the operator fails to return to FH immediately after sending the ERF The ERF procedure is known by all NCS personnel thus the RXMT operator should be able to obtain verbal help if needed SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Obtain data to be sent by If not already loaded load data net ID only see Special Operator ERF in RT D Task 8 for details b Contact distant station Alert RT B RXMT data is being sent ERF is sent on operational channel by ERF used for the alert c Prepare RT to send ERF 1 Set FCTN to LD d Send 1 Press LOAD on RT keypad Display shows HLD 2 Enter channel where data Display shows HF XXX is stored 3 Press ERF on RT keypad Display shows SEND e Make communications 1 Wait for distant station RT B 20 30 seconds should be adequate check to store the ERF 2 Call RT B and confirm that Obtain ACK from all operators who ERF was received were to receive the ERF 5 58 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Resume normal 1 Change MODE from FH M Important to get out of FH M after communications to FH sending the ERF 3 Continue FH CT RXMT Task of send an ERF is communications yee Any radio may be used but in preparing for an
307. st amount of RF power needed to communicate with other stations Figure 5 5 RF PWR Switch RF POWER SWITCH POSITIONS AND USES PURPOSE LO Low Power M Medium Power HI High Power PA Power Amplifier DIM CONTROL VOL WHSP 5 8 Provides voice operational range of approximately 200 400 meters This position is used extensively by units in closely deployed situations Actual range is dependent upon weather position line of sight interference and various other factors Provides voice operational range of approximately 400 meters to 5 kilometers Manpack radio operators can conserve battery life by selecting lowest effective RF power setting Provides voice operational range of approximately 5 to 10 kilometers and data transmission range of 1 to 5 kilometers the latter depending upon data rate BPS as well as the other factors cited under LO above This setting applies only to vehicular long range radios using a power amplifier Approximate voice range provided is 10 to 40 kilometers data range of about 5 to 25 kilometers dependent upon the data rate being used and various other factors This control enables the operator to adjust the level of brightness of the RT display Turning the knob clockwise increases the level of light turning it counterclockwise dims the display light When using night vision goggles DIM is to be set fully counterclockwise The Volume Whisper control enables the op
308. suggestions for improvement of publications and blagfimior dditiona 2 be used if more space is needed TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION APD V4 00 RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND Use Part Il reverse for Repair Parts and BLANK FORMS Special Tool Lists RPSTL and Supply For use of this form see AR 25 30 the proponent agency is Catalogs Supply Manuals SC SM TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART I ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC SM AND BLANK FORMS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER PARA FIGURE ITEM PAGE GRAPH LINE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON TYPED NAME GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE AUTOVON SIGNATURE PLUS EXTENSION DA FORM 2028 FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028 1 DEC 68 WHICH WILL BE USED APD V4 00 TO Forward to proponent of publication or form Include ZIP Code FROM Activity and location Include ZIP Code PART ll REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS SUPPLY MANUALS PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE TOTAL NO OF MAJOR PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE ITEM ITEMS RECOMMENDED ACTION NO NO NO NUMBER NO NO NO SUPPORTED PART Ill REMARKS Any general remarks or recommendations or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank forms Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed TYPED
309. t sync time Figure 2 4 RT 1523B Features Change1 2 5 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RT 1523C Control knobs are affixed with side positioned Allen screws RT cover is affixed with Phillips headed screws All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode switch may remain in FH position to change net ID Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Simple Key Loader SKL a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR manually via the keypad or by ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of GO CT Changing to CT clears message RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time New keypad with SIP features GPS connector Figure 2 5 RT 1523C Features RT 1523D Control knobs are affixed with side positioned Phillips screws RT cover is affixed with Phillips screws All three digits of net ID may be changed by operator RT Mode switch may remain in FH position to change net ID Sync time may be loaded electronically from an Automated Net Control Device ANCD a Simple Key Loader SKL a Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR manually via the keypad or by ERF Running self test with COMSEC in PT results in display message of GO CT Changing to CT clears message RT will accept ERF if sync time is less than 100 days different from net sync time New keypad with SIP features GPS connector
310. t sync time The Passive Late Net Entry process enables an operator to re enter the net without requiring action on the part of the NCS or other net operators PRIMARY TASK 5 Obtain SOI Information from ANCD SOI information electronically stored in the ANCD or SKL replaces the paper SOI extract The ANCD or SKL SOI program is used when information on nets suffixes pyro smoke sign countersign is needed It may be used to view quick reference QREF related items in group time period set find and memo It may also be used to obtain the net ID of a net that is not a part of the loadset being used 5 4c Select RT Preparation Settings From MENU Preparation TASK 1 DESCRIPTION This task is required to set the ASIP radio to proper settings for other tasks MENU selections are Volume Channel Power Mode and COMSEC These settings will need to change as operationally necessary The back light function is also covered DETAILED FLOW CHART Select RT Preparation Settings from MENU SUBTASKS ACTION RESULTS a Set RT Volume 1 Press MENU Press Menu to display Vol level 2 Press Digit 1 9 for Vol Setting Display reads WHSP if 0 selected 0 for Whisper Mode b Set RT Channel 1 Press MENU until CHAN Display reads 1 6 Q for CUE M for 2 Press Digit 1 6 for Channel Manual desired 0 for MAN 7 for CUE C Set RT Power 1 Press MENU until PWR Display reads LO M HI PA 2 Press CHG for desired PWR setti
311. taining the prescribed COMSEC keys FH data hopset TSK and net IDs and GPS based sync time to support net opening preparations NCS personnel are expected to properly assemble their own manpack radios and install their own required vehicular radio components in preparation for net opening This includes connecting cables antennas handsets loudspeakers and any other components that are to be used CAUTION YOUR RT CAN BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER ATTACHMENT OF MANPACK ANTENNAS 1 To avoid damage turn the sleeve only not the antenna 2 Turning the antenna can destroy the antenna connector in the RT 6 3 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4 PMCS LOADING RT NET DISCIPLINE SYNC TIME In that NCS personnel are also operators they are required to perform Before Operation Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS as shown in Chapter 8 Performing PMCS involves checks of controls cables antennas power source self test keypad data loading and ability to communicate By performing PMCS NCS personnel are assured that all components of their radios are working properly or that something needs to be fixed by the NCS operator or unit maintenance The PMCS charts found in Chapter 8 should be followed exactly in the performance of PMCS No NCS operator action will pay greater dividends When they are satisfied with the results of Before Operation PMCS actions NCS personnel load their own radios with data and sync time
312. tch to OFF Check that LS 671 Power Indicator Lamp is Out TM 11 5820 890 10 8 8 2e Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 MAINTENANCE The maintenance concept for the ANCD is for the unit level CONCEPT OPERATOR MAINTENANCE maintainer to requisition and repair all external parts in accordance with TM 11 5810 394 14 amp P If the problem is internal Unit Maintenance personnel will use BIT software to determine the operational status of the ANCD If the BIT confirms that the ANCD faulty the unit will turn in the faulty ANCD through normal supply channels to the COMSEC depot The unit will then requisition a replacement ANCD through normal supply channels Also replacement ANCDs are normally available at brigade and higher level Signal Offices for temporary loan to units needing replacement ANCDs Unit SOP should indicate how temporary replacement ANCDs are to be provided to subordinate units ANCD operator maintenance tasks are e Check for frayed cables loose nuts or screws correct seating of connectors and completeness of equipment whenever required e Clean the display window and keypad as necessary for clarity e Replace the battery on an as required basis when prompted by the ANCD LOW BAT message BATTERY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE USING A COIN OR SCREWDRIVER REMOVE FOUR SCREWS AND BATTERY COMPARTMENT COVER FROM ANCD REMOVE THE BATTERY HOUSING FROM THE ANCD REMOVE BATTERIES FROM THE BATTERY HOUSI
313. te ERF is transmitted over the operational channel 6 20 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 6 4d Transfer SOI Information Using Broadcast Mode Special NCS Task 2 DESCRIPTION This procedure enables an NCS to send SOI information electronically to net members wherever updating by physical connection of ANCD to ANCD proves to be impossible or impractical The Broadcast Mode requires approximately two minutes to transmit one time period of a battalion SOI extract The procedure includes a polling feature which allows the NCS to determine by automatic query if up to 16 net operators designated by special ID numbers did or did not receive the SOI information sent by Broadcast TRANSFER SOI INFORMATION USING BROADCAST MODE SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Prepare NCS radio to Ensure is set to SQ ON N A Normal NCS RT settings send SOI by broadcast CT and FH M 2 Change DATA from OFF to Broadcast uses data mode set to 1200 1200 bps Turn ANCD ON select Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 3 1 1 qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo b Prepare ANCD for 501 data broadcast Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter SEND Scroll MV amp press ENTR to select SOI set V b Press down arrow SOI Set name Edn name 6 This screen will appear only if QREF file is stored in ANCD Press 4VV to display and Do you want to transfer QREF press ENTR to select Y N
314. ted aircraft Do not press SEND on Source ANCD until you are ready to press RCV on Target ANCD then press RC V within about 20 seconds of pressing SEND You must enter YES in order to proceed NOTE You can clear your ANCD of COMSEC FH data sync time by performing steps b 1 through b 5 above 5 46 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 54 Transfer QREF SOI Information ANCD to ANCD Special Operator Task 2 DESCRIPTION This task is required in preparation for unit operations SOI information is passed from the brigade or higher LCU operator down to unit Signal Officers and NCSs who develop unit specific Quick Reference QREF files for operator use Dissemination within units is accomplished by transferring SOI information from one ANCD to another When this special task in not performed by communications specialists or designated NCOs operators must be trained to perform the data transfer Operators who are expected to perform Special Operator Task 1 should also be trained in this task SUBTASKS ACTIONS 1 Turn ANCD ON RESULTS a Prepare Source ANCD for QREF SOI transfer select Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter SET select Choose Send Receive 4 Enter SEND Scroll M V and press ENTR to select SOI Set V b Press down arrow and scroll Set name nr to set desired Edn name tp ENTR 6 Press ENTR to select Do you wa
315. ted until the radios are placed back into a RXMT mode RXMT may be performed as FH to FH SC to SC or mixed FH to SC FH to SC mode is particularly effective when communications between a SINCGARS net and a VRC Series 12 or similar SC net are required The use of two OE 254 antennas separated as widely as feasible may be required in order to achieve line of sight communications See Special Operator Task 7 for the procedure regarding sending an ERF RT 1523 version of the SINCGARS radio requires that COMSEC switches of RXMT radios be set to PT for SC SC and FH SC communications Only the SC RT must be in PT If the net is operating in CT the RXMT operators can monitor only the FH portion of the traffic RXMT mode RT C and RT D provide half duplex communication A handset or speaker must be connected to both RXMT radios for both sides of a communication to be heard by RXMT operators 83 2 33 8 8s 3 33 8 RETRANSMIT CABLE RXMT RADIO C RADIO D RETRANSMIT STATION RADIO A REQUESTING STATION Figure 5 22 RXMT Operation Change 1 5 57 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 5 Send an as Part of RXMT Operation Special Operator Task 7 DESCRIPTION This is not a normal operator task It is performed only as part of an RXMT operation When operators are required to perform RXMT operations it may be nece
316. tery CY 8664 VRC Cable Assembly Set Electrical Equipment CX 13436 VRC Control Display Unit Control Monitor C 11291 A VRC AN VRC 88A 91A Multiplexer Frequency Hopping TD 1456 VRC Carrying Case Radio Automated Net Control Device 2 10 Handset H 250 U Handheld Remote Control Radio Device C 12493 U Loudspeaker LS 671 VRC or LS 685 U Antenna Manpack AS 3683 PRC or AS 4266 PRC AN PRC 119A D F Mounting Base MT 6352 A VRC Mounting Base Electrical Equipment MT 6845 VRC Amplifier Radio Frequency AM 7238 A B VRC Mounting Base MT 6353 VRC Receiver Transmitter RT 1523 A B C D E F C U Control Receiver Transmitter RCU C 11561 C U Mounting Base MT 6576 VRC Survivable Low Profile Antenna AS 3916 VRC Amplifier Adapter Vehicular AM 7239 A B C D VRC Antenna Vehicular AS 3900 VRC or AS 3916 VRC AN VRC 87A D F 87C 88A D F 89A D F 90A D F 91A D F 92A D F Intercommunications Set AN VIC 1 V Adapter Wire Line HYX 57 TSEC Change 1 D 1 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 ABBREVIATIONS AAL additional authorization list ACK acknowledge AD Analog Data AK automatic keying ANCD automated net control device ANT antenna APPL application ATTN attention AUD audio BATT battery BII basic issue item BIT built in test BPS bits per second BRK breaker BRT bright CAGEC Commercial And Government Entity Code CCI controlled cryptographic item CDR commander control display unit CFD common fill device CH channel CHAN
317. tion 4 7d Sync Time NO REQUIREMENT There is no requirement to periodically change sync time The only requirement is to keep radios within a net and nets within a command on the same sync time OPERATIONAL The operational requirement calls for each NCS to once daily check RT sync time against GPS time If the difference is more than one second the NCS is expected to adjust the sync time in the NCS radio Sync time in net member s radios can then be updated by the NCS transmitting or merely pressing PTT several times This sync time updating procedure ensures that cross net communications are readily available to commanders and others who need them 4 22 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 7e ANCD SKL Loads and Updating ACTIVE RESERVE DATA ANCD SKL LOAD UPDATE CYCLE Multiple SOI editions and COMSEC FH data loadsets reduce the need for updating the ANCD loads By loading one active loadset 30 days three active SOI editions 30 days one reserve loadset 30 days and two reserve SOI editions there are three results The unit has all the active data loadset and SOI it needs for 30 days At the end of 30 days the unit changes to the reserve loadset and the last edition and continues to operate without interruption The unit then has another thirty days during which to reload ANCDs with new loadsets and SOI editions in the same proportion By making full use of the ANCD memory capacity it is thus possible to minimize the imp
318. tion Key to other NCSs using MK method of task 6 24 Short Range Long Range SR LR Radio 2 23 Short Range Long Range SR LR Radio with dismount components 2 24 Short Range SR Radio componens ire ree iere t e I Tie 2 21 Short Range SR Radio with dismount components 2 22 Short Range SR Radio with Single ASIP Radio Mount SARM components 2 41 Short Range SR Radio with Single Radio Mount SRM 2 32 Simple Key Loader SKL ici ed ree eet p uut fo uci bui tabo tes ute ca pees 3 15 Boziorg ugoiisori gc E 4 23 SINGGARS associated TASKS xe eee goes 7 1 SINCGARS low profile antenna SEPA oie gei tentus eras ete Gea e ea e arden eee 4 33 SINCGARS radio rairteriali6B se us iet thi e dai bur eee 8 1 SINCGARS Receiver Transmitter 2 2 Reguired USAGE SEES ite acide emda alana ante st 4 5 Single Radio Mount SRM 2 32 E 2 34 Single channel SC communications SERE DR DONDE 4 4 jer slap n 4 4 Bee E 4 5 MOONE eC
319. ts 8 26 Main power battery requirements 44 8 27 Rt 5 18 P rormance dala C 2 36 PUY SICA AR acti ue od a epe 2 36 Remoting capabilities ipei iine es peu best Pa a ER DO Re letus Ente 4 34 Using 55 4 42 Using Loudspeaker ES 67 7 5 p eto t 4 41 Using Receiver Transmitter RT as nennen 4 40 Using Remote Control Device 2329 6 39 4 45 Using Remote Control Unit ROW aac isis taroen nena bb edat n Reden 4 34 Using Wire Line Adapter HYX 57 1 iiie obe Fette 4 44 Reporting equipment improvement 1 2 Reporting errors and recommending 1 2 Respond to CUE calls Ren n te Uu 6 17 Retransmission RXMT operationS ic Lote petendo epe temen eere hector ua edu Avast eu a pente 4 28 E Ier oT DA Agnes cde Mc 4 29 Carp 4 28 Mio T 4 30 2 12 RT Physical Data error tee ea rend ecu 2 13
320. ttery Hand held device providing GPS time for use as sync time in SINCGARS radios Those operator and NCS tasks which are essential to adequate job performance Feature of SINCGARS radio that enables SC or FH traffic to automatically pass from one RXMT RT to another thus increasing the effective range to that of two radios Feature of SINCGARS radio that search all SC channels for traffic cannot be used in the FH mode of operation Procedure by which may be move from one channel to another does not apply to key stored in channel 6 Mode of communication using one designated frequency Process by which Army materiel managers systematically improve equipment capabilities to meet established operational requirements The SIP ASIP radio is a product of a SINCGARS System Improvement Program Those operator and NCS tasks which may be required in job performance these tasks entail additional training to achieve operator proficiency Change 1 D 9 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 TERM Updating Vehicular radios Zero D 10 Change 1 DEFINITION Electronic or physical procedures by which COMSEC FH data and SOI information are changed performed at prescribed intervals and as the need arises Radio configurations consisting of one or two RTs mounting base vehicular amplifier adapter power amplifier power amplifier adapter power supply adapter antennas loudspeakers and handsets as appropriate these radios
321. tting If not set to OFF the RT is enabled to provide GPS position information to an external device the CDU Also your position SA is transmitted to the net as follows OFF GPS turned off AUTO GPS turned on It sends your position with each message PER GPS turned on It sends your position with each message or periodically if a transmission has not occurred MOV GPS turned on It sends your position with each message or if the RT has moved a minimum distance since the last transmission Also used to enable loading of GPS time and EGR key Displays the current SA receive selection ON or OFF Change using the CHG 7 key TM 11 5820 890 10 8 CID 8 Displays CID status CID or NO CID FCTN switch must be set to LD before CID can be cleared using the CLR key Clearing CID prevents enabling GPS and disables SA function CLR MENU MENU appears on SINCGARS ASIP when key is pressed Multiple presses will scroll MENU FREQ BACKLIGHT ASIP radio must be in SQ ON Press key FREQ then CHG to change intensity Change 1 5 14 1 5 14 2 blank TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Connectors SIP RT P1 Systems The P1 systems connector is located on the back of the SIP RT This connector provides RT power and signaling interfaces SYSTEMS CONNECTOR P1 ANTENNA CONNECTOR Qn GPS CONNECTOR 45 RXMT CONNECTOR 2 AUD FILL CONNECTOR 23 AUD DATA CONNECTOR J4 Figure 5 12 SIP RT Connectors J5 GPS Located on t
322. ty can be given to a critical communications link Figure 3 4 RADIO PRIORITY Switch The TEST position is used only for Off Line BIT and the switch should not be placed in this position except as directed in the 20 and 30 maintenance manuals 3 6 BIT FAULT o 7 19 19 m 11 5820 890 10 8 SECOND POWER AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY FOR LR LR DASHED CABLES USED ONLY FOR LR LR POSITION A POSITION B Figure 3 5 SINCGARS Vehicular Radios connected to FHMUX Change1 3 7 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 3 4 SECURE TELEPHONE UNIT STU 3 4a STU Capabilities PURPOSE ANCILLARY DEVICES APPLICATIONS DATA RECEIPT AVAILABILITY 3 45 STU Characteristics COMSEC DATA RATES CIK COMPATIBILITY TEMPEST COMMERCIAL 3 8 Change 1 To enable secure up to and including SECRET level of classification voice and data transmissions to be performed over commercial and military telephone circuits The ANCD or SKL may be connected to the STU to serve as the source of data and information to be transferred via telephone COMSEC key FH data hopset lockout TSK net ID and SOI information may be sent over commercial and military telephone circuits distance unlimited At the receiving end of the STU transfer operation data is received by and stored in a target ANCD or SKL available for use when r
323. ults are attained by using two OE 254 antennas separated as far as cabling will permit The least satisfactory results will be obtained if two installed antennas on the same vehicle are used 4 29 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 4 9c RXMT Procedures NCS DESIGNATIONS In that the illustrative situation makes RADIO A an NCS RADIO C will always operate in the FH position Because RADIO B is an outstation in RADIO A s net RADIO B also operates in the FH mode RADIO D an RXMT radio operates in the FH M position and serves as NCS for the two station net consisting of RADIO B and RADIO D ELECTRONIC UPDATES OTAR and Broadcast transmissions will pass through an RXMT installation but ERF data will not If it is necessary to send net FH data to RADIO B electronically break the RXMT link send the ERF to RADIO D using one of the net IDs or SC frequencies RADIO D then sends the ERF to RADIO B using the second net ID or SC frequency NOTE RXMT MODE When ASIP radios are used at the RXMT site and are temporarily taken out of the RXMT mode the RXMT cable must be disconnected until the radios are placed back into a RXMT mode DATA RXMT All data rates except PCKT may be retrans with the following provisions 1 SDM data TF and AD1 No change to normal retrans procedures Radios do not have to be set in Data mode data off Mixed radios at RXMT site or outstations is permitted 2 EDM DATA Radios at the RXMT site have to be set to the same EDM dat
324. urning to the SOI menu shown above and entering GROUP TMPD SET FIND or MEMO 3 The following are examples of SOI information which may be available in a full SOI file a GROUP Enter Group and scroll to the SOI item desired Group qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo TO1 Set 5210 DEM 003 003 5210 SPT 5 38 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 b NET Enter Net and scroll to the SOI item desired Net qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo TO6 1 4 FA BN W7T C81975 M74800 0424 TO1 1 41 ADA CMD Y1Z Callwrd BULLDOG Callword is obtained by pressing right arrow then left arrow to return to NET display c SUFFIX Enter sufX and scroll to the SOI item desired sufX qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Commander COFS XO Expanders are found at the end of suffixes d PYRO SMOKE Enter Pyro and scroll to the SOI item desired Pyro qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo GREEN SMOKE Safe to land or drop supplies here Meaning of GREEN SMOKE can be obtained by pressing right arrow then left arrow to return to Pyro menu You may scroll through signals or meanings as desired by pressing up down arrows 5 39 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 e TIME PERIOD Enter Tmpd and scroll to the SOI item desired Tmpd qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo Enter Time Pd gt dH f SET Enter Set and scroll to the SOI item desired
325. weight and mission runtimes listed below BA 5390 LMC2 runtime is approximately 50 greater than the BA 5590 BB 2590 Li lon rechargeable runtime is about equal with the BA 5590 BB 390B U Ni Mh rechargeable runtime is about 2596 lower than BA 5590 BA 8180 runtime is 4 days longer than the BA 5590 but is much heavier and requires a tethered adapter see AAL Appendix Change 1 8 25 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 RCU BATTERY RCU MAIN POWER BA 5590 Approximate Length of Expected Service RF PWR in HI VOICE DATA FH amp CT nema OFF Operator usage rate is defined as 9 minutes of receiving monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting on average NCS usage rate is defined as 2 minutes of receiving monitoring to every 1 minute of transmitting on average 8 3c Manpack Radio RCU Hold Up Battery HUB HUB Hold up battery used is e Battery Non Rechargeable BA 5372 U BATTERY MANPACK RADIO RCU HUB BATTERY BA 5372 Approximate Length of Expected Service TYPE OF USE RT 1523 Series RCU CAUTION SINCGARS HUB and ANCD batteries look similar and can be physically interchanged The HUB battery is 6 5 Volts while ANCD batteries are 3 Volts each If HUB batteries 3 of them are mistakenly placed in the ANCD it will be destroyed Placing one ANCD battery in the RT HUB position will cause the RT to lose its fill of data Therefore be sure you know which battery goes where Always read the label before installin
326. y 4 1 2 b Transportation Discrepancy Report TDR 00361 1 2 REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS EIR HAND RECEIPT HR MANUALS DESTRUCTION OF ARMY ELECTRONICS MATERIEL SECURITY CLASSIFICATION AND MARKING PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT NOMENCLATURE CROSS REFERENCE LIST LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES a Equipment b Equipment GapabllillBS ia rnit be intu udis 1 3 c 1 3 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS AUXILIARY ITEMS 1 1 SCOPE The Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System SINCGARS is a family of Very High Frequency Frequency Modulation VHF FM combat net radios designed to provide the primary means of command and control for combat combat support and combat service support units This manual covers operation of the SINCGARS Ground ICOM Manpack and Vehicular radio sets along with associated SINCGARS equipment and items used with SINCGARS 1 2 CONSOLIDATED INDEX OF ARMY PUBLICATIONS AND BLANK FORMS Refer to the latest issue of DA Pam 25 30 to determine whether there are new editions changes or additional publications p
327. y Box CY 8523A B C 23 4 9 2 8 5 3 3 12 8 5 0 1 4 2 4 Battery BA 5590 BA 5390 12 5 4 9 5 8 2 3 10 9 4 3 1 0 2 25 i 3 0 Battery BB 390B U BB 390B U 12 125 49 4 9 10 9 4 3 9 4 1 9 4 2 Battery BB 2590 U 12 5 4 9 a 1 45 3 2 Antenna AS 3683 104 9 41 3 0 3 0 7 Antenna long AS 4266 264 2 104 0 7 2 Manpack Radio with RT 1523 EMEN RN 77177778 Manpack Radio with 15234 128 82 Radio with 15238 1 124 26 6 Radio with 15230 124 269 Manpack Radio with 15230 1 124 69 Radio with 1523 1 4810 0 Manpack Radio with RT 1523F 45000 Length of long antenna when folded is 45 7 cm 18 in When using BA 5590 as main power battery and short antenna AS 3683 A Change 2 15 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 2 3d Manpack Radio Performance Data Table 2 4 Manpack Radio Performance Data HI HI Above data applies equally to dismount radios and RCUs Ranges shown are for planning purposes only They are based upon line of sight and are average for normal conditions Ranges depend upon location sighting weather and surrounding noise level among other factors Use of the OE 254 antenna will increase ranges for both voice and data transmissions Enemy jamming and mutual interference conditions will degrade range
328. y ERF Coordination is essential to ensure that all operators are ready when the ERF is sent and that they properly store the data While the Cold Start method works experience has shown that coordination requirements and operator actions make it a more demanding process than the Hot Start method It is available for use whenever an NCS needs to bring all operators into the net at the exact same time CONDUCT COLD START NET OPENING SUBTASKS 02 ACTONS RESUIS a Prepare NCS radio for Load CUE MAN and SC Perform Primary NELLE Task 1 Cold Start net opening freqs as required Load COMSEC keys FH Perform Primary Operator Task 2 data and sync time Prepare net operators for 1 Ensure all operator RTs are Operators perform an ICOM fill less sync Cold Start net opening properly loaded time Advise operators when the Operators must be standing by at exact net is to be opened net opening time Send ERF at announced 1 Alert net that ERF is to be Helps operators note when ERF is net opening time sent at this time received Press LOAD on RT RT display shows HLD Get data from what chan Enter channel in which RT display shows data is stored blinks and beeps Press ERF on RT RT display shows SEND 6 15 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS RESULTS LTS d Confirm receipt of ERF EN a operators time to 20 30 EN _ should be adequate store the ERF Direct operators to ACK NCS and oper
329. y shows LOAD SINGLE CHANNEL FREQUENCIES INTO RT SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS a Obtain required CUE MAN 1 Turn ANCD ON select and or SC freqs Soi Radio sUpervisor 2 Enter SOI qRef Group Net sufX Pyro Impd Set C s Find Memo 3 Enter TMPD Enter Time Pd gt 4 Select time period desired gRef Group Net sufX Pyro Tmpd Set C s Find Memo 5 Enter QREF Scroll to net desired note SC freqs needed 4 Set CHAN to CUE MAN or CHAN 1 6 5 30 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 SUBTASKS ACTIONS RESULTS Load SC freqs 1 Press FREQ RT display shows 00000 or 30000 3 Enter 5 digit SC freqs RT display shows X X X X X d Store SC freqs Press STO within 7 seconds RT display blinks once e Prepare to communicate 1 Set FCTN to SQ ON DEP 2 Set CHAN to CUE MAN or N A CHAN 1 6 3 Communicate in SC PT mode N A when desired ANCD contains CUE MAN and some SC frequencies Other SC frequencies to be loaded in Channels 1 6 must be obtained from your NCS or SigO Operators normally do not load a CUE frequency only NCS and alternate NCSs need to receive CUE messages The MAN frequency must be loaded if the Cold Start net opening procedure is to be used Channels 1 thru 6 are loaded with SC frequencies only when single channel communications are known to be mission requirements In a typical frequency hopping net which uses the Hot Start net opening procedure it is not necessary for the operator
330. y shows GOOD at end Before KEYPAD With RT set to CT SC LD and channel shown a Press FREQ CLR and a Any test frequency 0 9 enter test frequency cannot be entered in RT CUE 31000 MAN 32000 CHAN 1 43000 CHAN 2 54000 CHAN 3 65000 CHAN 4 76000 CHAN 5 87000 CHAN 6 87975 b Press STO for each Any test frequency 0 9 entry cannot be stored in RT TM 11 5820 890 10 8 Item to Operator Equipment Not Ready Check Service Procedure Available If DATA LOADING a SC Freq COMSEC key FH data Sync time COMM CHECK Voice data SC mode FH mode Plain text Cipher text RXMT mode Load SC freq Load COMSEC key Load FH data Load sync time electronic or manual Check for sidetone Check voice comm in SC PT and FH CT check SQ OFF while in SC mode If data comm is mission required check data comm in FH CT using mission related data device If RXMT is mission required check RXMT in all mission related modes SC freq will not load COMSEC key will not load FH data will not load Sync time will not load Sidetone is not heard Cannot communicate in SC PT or FH CT voice mode Cannot communicate in mission required data mode using mission related data device Cannot retransmit in mission related modes Does not function properly means that a control will not do what it is intended to do for example turning the FCTN knob does not chan

TM 11-5820-890-10-8 SINCGARS GROUND

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents